You are on page 1of 798

Autodesk Inventor

Topics in this section Fundamentals Work Environment Parts Assemblies Drawings Collaboration and Visualization Design Optimization System Performance Glossary

Autodesk Inventor >

Fundamentals
Topics in this section Getting started Basic 3D Workflow Transition from 2D Transition from SolidWorks About Help

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals >

Getting started
Topics in this section Getting Started tab Environments User Interface Tools in the Application Window The Ribbon Enhanced Tooltips InfoCenter Navigation tools Navigation Bar Views of models Browser Icon Reference

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Getting Started tab
Access learning components of the Inventor Help system, such as the Ribbon Introduction (video), Command Locator, Ribbon Tutorial, Show Me animations, New Feature Workshop and others, directly from the Getting started tab on the ribbon. The Getting Started tab is available at all times within Autodesk Inventor.
Tip If you are familiar with the location of commands in previous versions of

Autodesk Inventor, use the Command Locator to find the new location of the command in the ribbon. Click on the Getting Started tab and select Command Locator. In the Command Locator click the command you are trying to locate.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Environments
Concept Procedure

To access, work in, and exit environments To access Environments within an Assembly file To access Environments within a Part file To access Environments within a Drawing file Work in Environments Once you enter an environment, all commands that enable you to work within that environment are available for you. Each specialized environment has a unique tab, called a contextual tab, with commands specific to that environment. For example, when you enter the Studio environment, a new tab labeled Renter is displayed. Example of the Studio contextual tab

The Render tab is specific to Studio. Tabs specific to an environment have a unique color to indicate you are working in a specialized environment. To exit Environments To exit an environment accessed from the Environments tab or the Sketch environment and return to the general working environment, click Finish on the Exit panel, which is located on the ribbon to the far right.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

User Interface
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Return Access: On the Quick Access toolbar, click the arrow on the Return button, and select an option.

Use Return to quit in-place editing and quickly return to the desired environment. The destination depends on which modeling environment you are working in. Return (to previous) Return to Parent Returns to the previous editing state. For example, Return (to previous) in the sketch environment returns to the part that contains the sketch. Returns to the parent component in the browser. For example, when editing a part in a subassembly, Return to Parent changes the edit target to the subassembly. When editing a sketch, Return to Parent changes the edit target to the part that owns the sketch. Returns to the top model in the browser, regardless of how deep the edit target is in the browser hierarchy.

Return to Top

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started >

Tools in the Application Window
Concept Procedure

Customize the Quick Access toolbar

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Application Menu
Concept Procedure

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window > Application Menu >

Search for Commands
In the Application Menu, perform a real-time search for all commands located on the ribbon. The Search field displays at the top of the Application Menu. Search results can include menu commands, basic tooltips, and command prompt text strings. You can enter a search term in any language.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window > Application Menu >

Access Common Tools
Concept Quick Reference

Print models and drawings Prints or plots all or any portion of a model or drawing. Access: Click Print.

Print Model Print Drawing You can print or plot all or any portion of a model or drawing. To print a model To print a drawing To print a note

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window > Application Menu >

Recent Documents
Concept Procedure

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents You can view the list of recent documents, or open documents from the right pane of the Application Menu when no first level item is selected:

Click Open Documents to view open documents.

Click Recent Documents to view recent documents.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window > Application Menu >

Currently Open Documents
Concept Procedure

To toggle between Recent Documents and Open Documents You can view the list of recent documents, or open documents from the right pane of the Application Menu when no first level item is selected:

Click Open Documents to view open documents.

Click Recent Documents to view recent documents.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window > Application Menu >

Preview Documents
View a thumbnail of files in the Recent Documents and Open Documents lists. When you hover over a file in either of the lists, a preview of the file is displayed along with the following information: Path where the file is stored Date the file was last modified Version of the product used to create the file Name of the person who last saved the file Name of the person who is currently editing the file You can also include a thumbnail of the file next to the files in the list. To change the file icon to a thumbnail preview, click the drop-down list at the top of the Recent Documents or Open Documents lists and choose a small, medium, or large thumbnail.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window >

Quick Access Toolbar
Concept Procedure

Customize the Quick Access toolbar To add and remove commands to the Quick Access toolbar 1. On Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down arrow.

2. On the Customize menu, click the command name you want to display on the Quick Access toolbar. A check mark next to a command name indicates it is displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. To add commands to the Customize Quick Access toolbar menu 1. On the Ribbon, right-click on the command you want to add, and select Add to the Quick Access toolbar. To move the Quick Access toolbar menu above or below the ribbon 1. On Quick Access toolbar, click the drop-down arrow.

2. On the Customize menu, click Show Above the Ribbon to display the Quick Access toolbar above the ribbon, or Show Below the Ribbon to display the Quick Access toolbar below the ribbon. A check mark next to a command name indicates it is displayed on the Quick Access toolbar.

The meter can be used in Inventor Only: Restricts the display to just the Autodesk Inventor process. . When hovering over the Capacity Meter. Note The Capacity Meter is not available in 64-bit operating systems.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window > Status Bar Concept Quick Reference Capacity Meter The Capacity Meter provides several pieces of information with regards to memory consumption. and amount of memory used by the session. the tooltip displays details of used and available memory. then red once 80% has been used. total number of files open in the session. The meter has three indicators: total number of occurrences in the active document. The color changes from green to yellow when more than 60% of the allotted space is used.

. total number of files open in the session. the tooltip displays details of used and available memory. The meter has three indicators: total number of occurrences in the active document. The capacity meter is not available in 64 bit operating systems. then red once 80% has been used. The meter can be used in Inventor Only: Restricts the display to just the Autodesk Inventor process. and amount of memory used by the session.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window > Document tab Concept Quick Reference Capacity Meter The Capacity Meter provides several pieces of information with regards to memory consumption. . The color changes from green to yellow when more than 60% of the allotted space is used. When hovering over the Capacity Meter.

Use the keyboard arrows to navigate to commands on the ribbon and Application Menu Note Keytips are not customizable. more keytips are displayed for that tool. Keytips allow you to navigate in the Application Menu and in the ribbon using only the keyboard. Keytips appear as underlined characters to indicate which key or combination of keys on the keyboard must be pressed to activate a command.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window > Keytips Use the keyboard to access the Application Menu. Press the Alt key or F10 to display shortcut keys for common tools in the application window. and ribbon. When you select a keytip. Quick Access toolbar. . Keytips allow you to perform tasks without using your mouse.

In the Application Menu. the Application Menu is displayed. saving. push pins keep an item in the list of recently opened items. Application Menu The menu that is displayed when you click the application button. If you click the application button. . and publishing a file. On the ribbon.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Tools in the Application Window > Glossary application button The button that is displayed in the top-left corner of the application. push pins are used to keep a ribbon panel expanded. The Application Menu contains common tools for creating. push pin A push pin-shaped button used on the ribbon and in the Application Menu.

xml file containing command from the User Commands panel To import a command from the User Commands panel .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon Concept Procedure To minimize the ribbon To toggle the visiblity of all controls To change the ribbon appearance To move a command on the ribbon to the expanded panel To move a command on a main panel on the ribbon to the expanded panel To move a command from the expanded panel to the main panel on the ribbon To ungroup commands from a drop-menu To display or hide a ribbon panel To show or hide text labels on ribbon panels To change the docking position of the ribbon To create and add a command to the User Commands panel To remove a command from the User Commands panel To export a .

. Shortcut menu: Right-click the ribbon tab bar. Minimize to Panels: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab and panel titles are displayed. Show Full Ribbon: Displays tabs and full panels. The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: Minimize to Tabs: Minimizes the ribbon so that only tab titles are displayed. and then click one of the minimize options. To move a command on the ribbon to the expanded panel Right-click on a command and select Move to expanded panel. click Minimize. Note Minimize behavior is available only for the horizontal ribbon.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon > Display and Organize the Ribbon Concept Procedure To minimize the ribbon 1. To toggle the visiblity of all controls On the ribbon. click View tab To change the ribbon appearance Right-click the ribbon tab bar and select Ribbon Appearance and make a selection. Pointing device: Double-click the name of the active ribbon tab. To move a command from the expanded panel to the main panel on the Windows panel Clean Screen. 2. To move a command on a main panel on the ribbon to the expanded panel Right-click on a command and select Move to expanded panel. including controls. Click the ribbon minimize button to the right of the ribbon tabs.

To display or hide a ribbon panel Right-click anywhere inside the ribbon. Note To return commands to the drop-down menu. right-click on the command and select Return commands to drop-down menu. To ungroup commands from a drop-menu Right-click on a command that has a drop-down arrow and select Ungroup from drop-down menu.ribbon Right-click on a command in an expanded panel and select Move to main panel. To change the docking position of the ribbon Right-click the ribbon tab bar. click or clear the name of a panel. . Under Panels. click Ribbon Docking and make a selection. To show or hide text labels on ribbon panels Right-click the ribbon tab bar and click Show Panel Titles.

they are disabled.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon > Customize the Ribbon Concept Procedure Quick Reference Customize User Commands On the ribbon. Click Export to display the Save Copy As dialog box. enter a file name. Access: Right-click on the ribbon. Adds specified commands to the User Commands panels in the active tab. Choose commands from Commands Add Remove Import Controls the display of the list of commands. Navigate to the desired file. Removes specified commands to from the User Commands panels in the active tab.xml file. Creating user-defined commands creates the User Command panel. Click the drop-down arrow to narrow the selection. Saves the current user-defined settings in an . Export . and then click Save.xml file. A display mode where all points of a model are projected along parallel lines to the screen. The User Commands are only for the active Tab. You can create a unique User Commands panel for each tab. Click Import to display the Open dialog box. Select a file location. and select Customize User Commands Important The User Commands panel is created when you specify one or more commands in the Customize User Commands dialog box. and then click Open. you can create one custom panel within each tab to display commands you want to be available from that tab in Autodesk Inventor. If commands are not available for the active environment. Imports the user-defined panel settings from an .

Cobalt Color Icon Theme Amber Color Icon Theme The cobalt color icon theme closely matches the icon colors in other Autodesk products. Click the Amber Icon Color Theme icon to display the ribbon icons for the amber icon color theme. The amber icon color theme is similar to Autodesk Inventor 2009.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon > Color Themes You can control the color of the icons in the ribbon using the Application Options dialog box. Color Theme settings. . Note In addition to changing the icon color. Colors tab. To use the cobalt icon color theme. you can control the color of the Applicaton frame in the Colors tab in the Aplication Options dialog box using the Application Frame setting. click the Cobalt Icon Color Theme icon.

On the ribbon. ribbon A palette that displays buttons and controls used for both 2D drawing and annotation and 3D modeling. See also ribbon tab and ribbon panel and slide-out panel. and rendering. Multiple ribbon panels form a ribbon tab. ribbon tab The most general control on the ribbon. expanded panel An area on the ribbon associated with a ribbon panel. such as a hatch or table. is included in a selection. floating panel A ribbon panel that is not attached to the rest of the ribbon or application frame. . push pin A push pin-shaped button used on the ribbon and in the Application Menu.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > The Ribbon > Glossary contextual ribbon tab A ribbon tab that is displayed only when a particular type of object. Ribbon panels contain buttons or other controls. An expanded panel contains additional tools and controls. when it is oriented across the top of the file window. pins keep panels expanded. See also ribbon panel and ribbon. Ribbon tabs contain ribbon panels. pins keep an item in the list of recently viewed items. viewing. Toolbars can be changed to contextual tabs in the CUI. (RIBBON) ribbon panel A labeled control in the ribbon. In the Application Menu. horizontal ribbon The ribbon. which contain buttons or other controls.

usually on the left or right of the file window. .vertical ribbon The ribbon when it is oriented vertically.

On the ribbon. click Show Tooltips. under Tooltip Appearance. Click OK. In the Application Options dialog box. . General tab. To control the display of the second-level tooltip 1. 3. 2. click Tools tab Options panel Application Options.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Enhanced Tooltips Concept Procedure To turn tooltips on or off 1. click Tools tab Options panel Application Options. 3. click arrows to specify the seconds to delay the display of the second-level tooltip. 2. under Tooltip Appearance. General tab. In the Application Options dialog box. On the ribbon. Click OK.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter Topics in this section Find Information Using InfoCenter Glossary .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter Concept Procedure To browse search results To rearrange the topics displayed on a panel To search multiple sources for information To search a single location for information To add a location to search To access the Subscription Center in the program To display the InfoCenter Favorites panel To save a link in InfoCenter as a favorite To remove a favorite link from the InfoCenter Favorites panel To specify locations to search for information To add a new location to search for information To remove a search location To specify the CAD Manager Channel location and name To specify the channels to display in the Communication Center panel To specify InfoCenter balloon notification settings To add an RSS feed to Communication Center To remove an RSS feed from Communication Center To display topics in Help .

In the InfoCenter box. enter a keyword or phrase. Click and drag a category or group header to the desired position. 2. but you cannot move them into other groups. Then press ENTER or click the Search button. In the InfoCenter box. Display a panel by doing one of the following: In the InfoCenter box. Note You can rearrange categories within a group. .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter > Overview of InfoCenter Concept Procedure To rearrange the topics displayed on a panel 1. click the Communication Center button. click the Favorites button.

3. Click Add Search Location. 2. . Click Add. 4. specify a document or a file location to search.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter > Search For Information Concept Procedure To add a location to search 1. In the Add Search Location dialog box. In the InfoCenter box. click the down arrow next to the Search button.

If subscription resources are not available in your product. 2. under Subscription Center. click the Subscription Center button. your product is not entitled to subscription benefits. . In the InfoCenter box. click the subscription resource you want to access.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter > Access Subscription Center Concept Procedure To access the Subscription Center in the program 1. Note Subscription Center is not available to all product users. On the Subscription Center panel.

and may include links to RSS feeds. Topics in this section Overview of Communication Center Receive New Information Notifications .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter > Receive Product Updates and Announcements You can click the Communication Center button to display links to information about product updates and announcements.

RSS Feeds. and other announcements (including articles and tips). it sends your information to Autodesk so that you receive the correct information. RSS feeds generally notify you when new content is posted. Receive information from RSS feeds to which you subscribe. Communication Center sends the following information to Autodesk: Product name (in which you are using Communication Center) Product release number Product language Country/region (specified in the Communication Center settings) . Communication Center provides the following types of announcements: Autodesk Channels: Receive support information. product updates. You are automatically subscribed to several default RSS feeds when you install the program. All information is sent anonymously to Autodesk to maintain your privacy. click the Communication Center button in the InfoCenter box.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter > Receive Product Updates and Announcements > Overview of Communication Center To open Communication Center. Communication Center Online Policy Communication Center is an interactive feature that must be connected to the Internet in order to deliver content and information. Each time Communication Center is connected. CAD Manager Channel. You can customize the items that display in the Communication Center panel. Receive information (RSS feeds) published by your CAD manager.

Autodesk maintains information provided by or collected from you in accordance with the company's published privacy policy.Your unique Customer Involvement Program (CIP) ID if you are participating in the CIP program Autodesk compiles statistics using the information sent from Communication Center to monitor how it is being used and how it can be improved. which is available at http://www. .autodesk.com/privacy.

Communication Center notifies you by displaying a balloon message below the Communication Center button on the InfoCenter box. in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter > Receive Product Updates and Announcements > Receive New Information Notifications Whenever new information is available. If you don’t want to receive Communication Center notifications. Click the link in the balloon message to open the article or announcement. . turn off Balloon Notification.

2. . In the InfoCenter box. click the Favorites button to display the Favorites panel. Click the star icon that is displayed next to the link that you want to remove from the Favorites panel.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter > Save and Access Favorite Topics Concept Procedure To remove a favorite link from the InfoCenter Favorites panel 1.

click RSS Feeds. Click Remove. Right-click an RSS feed.Remove RSS Feed dialog box. Click OK. In the InfoCenter . Click Search Settings. click the down arrow next to the Search button. In the InfoCenter Settings dialog box. In the InfoCenter box. In the right pane. do one of the following: Click Remove.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter > Specify InfoCenter Settings Concept Procedure To remove an RSS feed from Communication Center 1. . 6. 2. click Yes. in the left pane. 5. 4. 3.

.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Find Information Using InfoCenter > Search Topics in Help Concept Procedure To display topics in Help In the InfoCenter box. click the Help button.

such as articles. . Usually allows users to receive notifications when new content is posted. and selfpaced e-Learning. RSS stands for Rich Site Summary (or Really Simple Syndication).Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > InfoCenter > Glossary Communication Center Displays links to information about product updates and product announcements. Subscription Center Provides access to information about subscription services such as product enhancements. RSS feed Information published by a website to which you subscribe. etc. InfoCenter You can use InfoCenter to search a variety of information sources with one query. web support from Autodesk technical experts. You can also easily access product updates and announcements.

Topics in this section View Cube SteeringWheels .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools Navigation tools change the orientation and view of your model. You can create a view that defines an area of a model as the Home view and use preset views to restore known viewpoints of a model with the Autodesk ® ViewCube® navigation tool. rotating the model among other ways of changing the orientation of the model using the tools on SteeringWheels. The display of a model can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the magnification at which objects are displayed.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube Concept Procedure To control the position of ViewCube To control the size of ViewCube To control the inactive opacity of ViewCube To display the compass below ViewCube To display the ViewCube menu .

and then click ViewCube.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Overview of the ViewCube Concept Procedure Quick Reference ViewCube Options Sets the preferences for working with the ViewCube. Application Options Display When Dragging on the ViewCube When clicking on the ViewCube Default ViewCube Orientation Document Settings . Right-click on the ViewCube and select Options. Access: Select Tools tab Options panel Application Options Display tab.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > ViewCube Menu Concept Procedure To display the ViewCube menu To display the ViewCube menu. Click the context menu button located near the ViewCube. or the main area of the ViewCube. do one of the following: Right-click on the compass. . Home icon.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient the View of a Model with the ViewCube Concept Procedure To reorient the current view to a preset orientation To view an adjacent face To interactively reorient the view To use animated transitions when reorienting a view to a preset orientation To automatically fit the model after a view orientation To roll a face view To define the Front view To restore the Front view To change the view projection mode To define the Home view To reorient the model to the Home view To lock to the current selection To examine an individual object with the ViewCube .

and click Reset Front. .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient the View of a Model with the ViewCube > Reorient the Current View Concept Procedure To restore the Front view Right-click on the ViewCube.

and click one of the following options: Orthographic Perspective Perspective with Ortho Faces . Right-click on the ViewCube.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient the View of a Model with the ViewCube > Set the View Projection Mode Concept Procedure To change the view projection mode 1.

.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient the View of a Model with the ViewCube > Home View Concept Procedure To reorient the model to the Home view Use one of the following methods: Click the Home button ( ) located near the ViewCube. Right-click the ViewCube. and click Go Home.

The ViewCube reorients the view of the model based on the center point of the selected objects. 2. In the model. select one or more objects to define the center point of the view.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Reorient the View of a Model with the ViewCube > Examine Individual Objects with the ViewCube Concept Procedure To examine an individual object with the ViewCube 1. . Click one of the preset locations on the ViewCube. or click and drag the ViewCube to reorient the view of the model.

initial view presented when a drawing is first opened. compass A visual aid that indicates the directions North. ViewCube User interface element that displays the current orientation of a model. selection sensitivity The ability to define the pivot point for reorienting a model based on the current selection. and West in the current model. East. You can interactively rotate the current view or restore a preset view. . Home view A special view saved with the drawing that is controlled through the ViewCube. roll arrows Curved arrows located above the ViewCube with which you can rotate the current view 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise. The Home view is similar in concept to the default.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > View Cube > Glossary 3D view Any view where the UCS icon appears in rendered colored form: current visual style is not 2D Wireframe. South.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels Concept Procedure To display a Wheel To close a wheel To change the size of a wheel To change the opacity of a wheel To enable tooltips for a wheel To enable tools messages for a wheel To display the Wheel menu .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Overview of SteeringWheels Concept Procedure Quick Reference SteeringWheels Options Access: Click Tools tab Options panel Application Options Display tab Right-click the wheel in the graphics window and select Options Show Tool Messages Show Tool Tips Display Navigation Options .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Wheel Menu Concept Procedure To display the Wheel menu Click the down arrow in the lower-right corner of the wheel or right-click on the wheel. .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels Concept Procedure To switch to the big View Objects wheel To switch to the mini View Objects wheel To switch to the big Tour Building wheel To switch to the mini Tour Building wheel To switch to the big Full Navigation wheel To switch to the mini Full Navigation wheel .

Restores the most recent view orientation.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels > 2D Navigation Wheel With this wheel. Zoom. Repositions the current view by panning. it is particularly useful when you do not have a pointing device with a scroll wheel. You can move backward or forward by clicking and dragging left or right. The 2D Navigation wheel wedges have the following options: Pan. The wheel includes the Pan and Zoom tools. . Rewind. Adjusts the magnification of the current view. you can access basic 2D navigation tools.

. and click Mini View Object Wheel.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels > View Object Wheels Concept Procedure To switch to the mini View Objects wheel Right-click the wheel.

.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels > Tour Building Wheels Concept Procedure To switch to the mini Tour Building wheel Right-click the wheel. and click Mini Tour Building Wheel.

and click Mini Full Navigation Wheel.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Wheels > Full Navigation Wheels Concept Procedure To switch to the mini Full Navigation wheel Right-click the wheel. .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools Concept Procedure To specify a point on a model as the center of a view To specify the target point for the Zoom and Orbit tools To reorient a view by moving towards or away from the model To look around a view with the Look tool To look around and walk through a model with the Look tool To invert the vertical axis for the Look tool To orbit a model with the Orbit tool To orbit around an object with the Orbit tool To turn on selection sensitivity for the Orbit tool To start the Orbit tool with the middle mouse button To pan the view with the Pan tool To start the Pan tool with the middle button To restore the previous view To restore a previous view with the Rewind History panel To change the elevation of a view To use the Walk tool to move through the model To change the movement speed for the Walk tool To constrain the Walk tool to the ground plane To adjust the height of the current view from the Walk tool To zoom the view with a single click To zoom a view in and out by dragging To zoom in to an area of the model by specifying window .

To zoom in and out by scrolling the mouse wheel when a SteeringWheel is displayed .

hold down the CTRL key before using the Zoom tool. 5. Click and hold down the Center wedge. If you are using one of the Full Navigation wheels.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools > Center Tool Concept Procedure To specify the target point for the Zoom and Orbit tools 1. Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the big View Object wheel. Release the button on your pointing device when the sphere is displayed. . 3. 4. Use the Zoom or Orbit tool to reorient the view of the model. The model is panned until the sphere is centered. 2. Drag the cursor over the desired location of the model.

. Click and hold down the Forward wedge within the scope of the model. Display the big Tour Building wheel. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools > Forward Tool Concept Procedure To reorient a view by moving towards or away from the model 1. the model moves forward 50% of the distance between the current location and the pivot point. Drag the cursor up or down to change the distance from which you view the model. Note If you click the Forward wedge once. 4. 3. The Drag Distance indicator is displayed. 2.

3. Click OK.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools > Look Tool Concept Procedure To invert the vertical axis for the Look tool 1. 2. and click Options. . Dragging downward and upward lowers and raises the target point of the current view. Display a wheel. select Invert Vertical Axis for Look Tool. In the SteeringWheels Options dialog box. Right-click the wheel. 4.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools > Orbit Tool Concept Procedure To start the Orbit tool with the middle mouse button 1. 2. Press and hold down the scroll wheel or middle button on your pointing device and drag to orbit the model. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. Press and hold down the SHIFT key. . 3. Display one of the wheels other than the big View Object or Tour Building wheels. 4.

The cursor changes to the Pan cursor. . or one of the mini wheels. Release the wheel or button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. 4. 3. 2. Drag to reposition the model.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools > Pan Tool Concept Procedure To start the Pan tool with the middle button 1. Display the 2D Navigation wheel. the Full Navigation wheel. Press and hold down the scroll wheel or middle button.

Dragging to the left restores an older previous view. 3. The current position in the navigation history is indicated by the orange box dragged along the Rewind History panel. drag to the left or to the right to restore a previous view. Display a wheel. . You must have previously used the Rewind tool to see views available on the right. While holding down the button on your pointing device. Click and hold the Rewind wedge. 2. Dragging to the right restores a view that is newer than the one you are currently viewing. The Rewind History panel is displayed.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools > Rewind Tool Concept Procedure To restore a previous view with the Rewind History panel 1.

Drag up or down to change the elevation of the view. 3. The Vertical Distance indicator is displayed. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. Click and hold down the Up/Down wedge. 4. Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the Tour Building wheels. 2.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools > Up/Down Tool Concept Procedure To change the elevation of a view 1. .

2. Display one of the Full Navigation wheels or the mini Tour Building wheel. 4. . Press and hold down the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key. drag up or down. Click and hold down the Walk wedge.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools > Walk Tool Concept Procedure To adjust the height of the current view from the Walk tool 1. 3. Do one of the following: Press and hold down the SHIFT key to enable the Up/Down tool. The cursor changes to the Walk cursor and the Center Circle icon is displayed. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel.

2. 3. Release the button on your pointing device to return to the wheel. Scroll the wheel forward or backward to zoom in or out. .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Navigation Tools > Zoom Tool Concept Procedure To zoom in and out by scrolling the mouse wheel when a SteeringWheel is displayed 1. Display one of the wheels other than the big Tour Building wheel.

Labels are displayed on each wheel wedge and they are larger than the size of the cursor. and other navigation tools. No labels are displayed on any of the wedges. mini wheels The small version of SteeringWheels. selection sensitivity The ability to define the pivot point to reorienting a model based on the current selection. First Contact balloon The interactive graphical tooltip that is displayed when the SteeringWheel is pinned during startup.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation tools > SteeringWheels > Glossary basic wheels A reference to the View Object wheel and Tour Building wheel. SteeringWheels. heads-up display (HUD) The process of transparently displaying user interface elements on top of or over the drawing area without obscuring the view of the objects drawn on the drawing area. rewind Restores the previous view or movement path created by the Autodesk ® ViewCube® navigation tool. tool message . SteeringWheels Tool set that provides access to 2D and 3D navigation tools. big wheels The large version of the SteeringWheels. and they are often the size of the cursor.

See also SteeringWheels. wheel wedge A section on the surface of a SteeringWheel that is designated for a specific navigation or orientation tool. wrap around Behavior in which the cursor wraps around the window and appears on the opposite side to allow the continuation of a drag operation instead of stopping at the edge of the drawing area. wheel A reference to one of the individual user interface elements that make up SteeringWheels. wheels A reference to more than one of the individual user interface elements that make up SteeringWheels. . tracking menu A cluster of buttons that follows the cursor as you move it over the window.A small instructional message that appears over the drawing window and is specific to the active navigation tool from a SteeringWheel. See also SteeringWheels. wheel surface Area of a SteeringWheel that is used to organize wedges and other buttons.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation Bar Concept Procedure Use the navigation bar View faces of models from selected planes Pan views Rotate views with the Free Orbit and Constrained Orbit command Zoom views in or out Zoom to view all Zoom views of selected features Zoom views of areas .

or around the X and Y axes.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation Bar > Access Navigation Tools from the Navigation Bar Concept Procedure Quick Reference Viewing commands The viewing commands manipulate the view in the graphics window of the active part. rotating a part during a fillet operation so that you can select edges that are otherwise hidden. The elements within the frame zoom to fill the graphics window. Turns the cursor to an arrow that is used to zoom the view in or out. zooms the selected edge. feature. You can rotate the view planar to the screen around the center mark. In a drawing. You can use viewing commands to manipulate the view while performing other operations. You can select the element either before or after clicking Zoom. . assembly or drawing. Changes the cursor to a four-directional arrow used to drag the view in the graphics window. or a view in the Engineer's Notebook. line. In a part or assembly. zooms the view so that all active sheet fits in the graphics window. Not used in drawings. zooms the view so that all elements in the model fit in the graphics window. In a part or assembly. Changes the cursor into cross hairs that are used to define a frame for the view. around a horizontal or vertical axis. Not used in drawings. adds a rotate symbol and cursor to the view. In a part or assembly. For example. or other element to fill the graphics window.

. Not used in drawings. zooms and rotates the model to display the selected element planar to the screen or a selected edge or line horizontal to the screen.In a part or assembly.

unified navigation tools Navigation tools that are common across multiple Autodesk programs. The unified navigation tools include Autodesk ® ViewCube® and SteeringWheels navigation tools. .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Navigation Bar > Glossary navigation bar Interface element from which you can access both unified and productspecific navigation tools from a centralized location.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Views of models Concept Procedure Display shadows Navigating a model in 3D .

Ground Shadow Casts a shadow on the plane below the model. . Appearance panel. no shadow is cast. If visibility of any geometry such as a feature or surface is turned off. Choose one: No Shadow The default setting displays the model without a shadow. you can cast a shadow on the plane beneath the model. click the down arrow on the Shadow command. annotations.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Views of models > Orthographic views Concept Procedure Quick Reference Display shadows To present a model more realistically and provide orientation when viewing a model. On the View tab. except that details of individual components are visible. Work features. X-Ray Shadow Same as Ground Shadow. and sketch geometry are not visible in shadows.

. 2. position the model so that you are sighting down the axis of your intended initial motion.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Views of models > Perspective views Concept Procedure Navigating a model in 3D In Perspective Camera mode. This moves the camera and the camera target point along your current line of sight. This moves the camera and the camera target point along your current line of sight. Use key F3. Set the model view to Perspective Camera mode by selecting the Perspective Camera in the Appearance panel of the View tab. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse while the Zoom command is active. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse while the Zoom command is active. use the Zoom and Pan commands in conjunction with key combinations to navigate through a model in 3D. Then. 1. Use the key combination SHIFT+F3.

you may need a wider angle lens. Tip You can adjust camera position and lens focal length simultaneously to set the amount of perspective distortion. Show Me how to navigate through a model in 3D. For instance. . Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse while the Pan command is active.2. for a given view or view path. Use the key combination SHIFT+F2. Use SHIFT+CTRL+F3. This action pivots the camera to change the line of sight. It is not meant to indicate that you can record actions that take place in the graphics window by choosing either Perspective Camera mode or Orthographic Camera mode. Note The term "camera mode" indicates only the particular view method used for models in the graphics window.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference Topics in this section Sketch Construction Model Sheet Metal Assembly Weldments Drawing Presentation State Substitute Analysis Notebook Application .

displays cut model edges projected onto the sketch plane. displays 3D sketch geometry created by projection of a curve onto a surface along a vector. displays geometry associated with a helical curve in a 3D sketch. displays associated sketch image. . Projection directions are defined by the surface normals. displays 2D sketch geometry created by projection of a loop onto the sketch plane. displays 3D sketch geometry created by projection of a curve onto a surface at the closest points. displays geometry in shared 2D sketch.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Sketch 2D Sketch Shared 2D Sketch Helical Curve Project to Surface Along Vector Project Cut Edges Project to Surface at Closest Point Wrap Projected Curves to Surface 3D Sketch Shared 3D Sketch Sketch Image Project Loop displays geometry in associated 2D sketch. displays 3D sketch geometry created by wrapping projected curves about a surface. displays geometry in associated 3D sketch. displays geometry in shared 3D sketch.

displays solid geometry in the construction environment. displays surface geometry in the construction environment. displays wire geometry in the construction environment. indicates geometry was checked with the Quality Check tool and no errors exist.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Construction Construction Group Construction Solid Construction Surface Construction Wire Data Checked with Errors Data Checked no Errors displays geometry group in the construction environment. . indicates geometry was checked with the Quality Check tool and errors exist.

displays the surface boundary patch shared by different features. displays the part bend feature. displays the associated circular pattern of the feature and contains the pattern occurrences. Coil Surface Shared Coil Surface Coil Composite Shared Composite Composite iMate End of Part Marker Decal . displays the solid part model. displays the associated coil surface. bounds the features that are processed (above the marker) from those that are not (below the marker). displays the coil surface shared by different features. displays the associated circular pattern of the solid part and contains the pattern occurrences.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Model Angle iMate Surface Part Shared Surface Part Part Blocks Block Instance Bend Boundary Patch Shared Boundary Patch Chamfer Circular Pattern of Part Circular Pattern displays iMate defined with angle constraint. displays iMate composed of multiple iMates. displays surface part model. displays shared surface part model. displays the associated surface boundary patch. displays the composite shared by different features. contains sketch block definitions. displays the associated chamfer feature. displays the associated composite feature. displays the associated sketch block instance. indicates a decal has been placed on a model face. displays the associated solid coil feature.

displays surface extrusion feature shared by different features. displays the associated extended surface feature. indicates the link between the derived and base components is broken. displays grounded iPart that is not enabled. displays the associated surface for the derived part. Delete Face Broken Link Derived Part Derived Surface Shared Derived Surface Emboss Extend Surface Extrusion Surface Shared Extrusion Surface Extrusion Face Draft Face Loop Fillet Flush iMate Hole Insert iMate 3D Intersection iPart Disabled iPart Disabled Grounded iPart Grounded iPart Stitch Surface Shared Stitch Surface Loft Surface displays the delete face feature created with the Delete Face command. displays the associated emboss feature. displays stitch surface feature shared by different features. displays associated iPart. displays 3D curve created at geometry intersection. displays surface extrusion feature. displays the associated fillet feature. displays iPart that is not enabled. displays the associated face loop feature. displays the associated face draft feature. displays surface loft feature. . displays the associated derived part and contains the included parts and features. displays the derived surface shared by different features. displays the associated stitch surface feature. displays iMate defined with flush constraint. displays solid extrusion feature. displays the associated hole feature.model face. displays iMate defined with insert constraint. displays grounded iPart.

displays the mirrored part or features and contains the mirror occurrences. displays the solid created from the intersection of the associated component and the other solid components. displays grounded part that is not enabled. displays the associated replace face feature. displays surface revolve feature shared by different features. displays a bounding box body representative of the derived component. displays the associated rectangular pattern of the solid part and contains the pattern occurrences. displays the associated moved face feature. Derived Include Origin Plane Origin Point Part Disabled Part Disabled Grounded Part Grounded Part Pattern Occurrence Pattern Occurrence Independent Rectangular Pattern of Part Rectangular Pattern Replace Face Revolve Surface Shared Revolve Surface .Shared Loft Surface Loft Mate iMate Mirror Move Face Derived Box Derived Cut Derived Intersect displays surface loft feature shared by different features. displays the associated rectangular pattern of the feature and contains the pattern occurrences. displays part that is not enabled. displays feature or part occurrence in the pattern. displays solid loft feature. displays the model origin point. displays the section of the associated component included in the derived part. displays part with all degrees of freedom removed. indicates the component was subtracted from the derived part. displays iMate defined with mate constraint. displays surface revolve feature. indicates the pattern occurrence is set to independent relative to the pattern. displays the associated model origin plane. displays part.

displays the displays the associated shell feature. displays solid revolve feature. displays a grounded work axis shared by different features. displays iMate defined with rotation motion constraint. accesses iPartor iAssembly authors. displays the associated rib feature. organizes iPart or iAssembly members in the browser based on the keys chosen in the author tables. displays a construction geometry axis used to facilitate the creation of part features. displays solid sweep feature. Table Item Table Tangent iMate Thicken Surface Shared Thicken Surface Thicken Thread Trim Surface iFeature Grounded Work Axis Shared Grounded Work Axis Work Axis . activates the iPart or iAssembly member. displays surface sweep feature shared by different features. displays the associated split feature. displays iMate defined with tangent constraint. displays the surface created with the trim surface command.Surface Revolve Rib Rotation iMate RotationTranslation iMate Sculpt Shell Split Sweep Surface Shared Sweep Surface Sweep Table Folder different features. displays surface sweep feature. displays a work axis with all degrees of freedom removed. displays surface thicken feature. Icons are shown when List by Keys is selected in the context menu. displays solid thicken feature. displays iMate defined with rotationtranslation motion constraint. displays the associated thread feature. The active member is shown with a check mark. displays surface thicken feature shared by different features. displays the associated iFeature.

displays a work point with all degrees of freedom removed. displays a work plane shared by different features. displays a construction geometry point used to facilitate the creation of part features. .to facilitate the creation of part features. Shared Work Axis Grounded Work Plane Shared Grounded Work Plane Work Plane Shared Work Plane Grounded Work Point Shared Grounded Work Point Work Point Shared Work Point displays a work axis shared by different features. displays a grounded work point shared by different features. displays a work plane with all degrees of freedom removed. displays a construction geometry plane used to facilitate the creation of part features. displays a work point shared by different features. displays a grounded work plane shared by different features.

displays sheet metal cut feature. displays sheet metal part with all degrees of freedom removed. displays sheet metal contour flange. displays sheet metal hem. displays seam between two sheet metal faces. . displays sheet metal flat pattern when active. displays sheet metal fold. displays sheet metal folded model when active. displays sheet metal part. displays sheet metal face. indicates presence of sheet metal part with visibility turned off. displays sheet metal flange.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Sheet Metal Corner Chamfer Contour Flange Corner Seam Cut Part Disabled Grounded Part Disabled Part Invisible Grounded Part Invisible Part Grounded Part Face Corner Round Flange Flat Pattern Folded Model Fold Hem Punch displays sheet metal corner chamfer. displays grounded sheet metal part that is not enabled. displays sheet metal part that is not enabled. displays sheet metal corner round. indicates presence of grounded sheet metal part with visibility turned off. displays cut or shape punched in a sheet metal face.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Assembly Angle Constraint Angle iMate Result Composite iMate Result Layout Constraint Private Design View Design View Locked Design View Assembly Disabled Assembly Disabled Grounded Assembly Grounded Assembly Flush Constraint Flush iMate Result iAssembly Factory Disabled iAssembly Factory displays components engaged in an angle constraint. displays assembly that is not enabled. displays components engaged in a composite iMate. displays assembly with all degrees of freedom removed. displays components engaged in an angle iMate. activates the associated design view. indicates model is an iAssembly Factory displays iAssembly Factory that is not enabled. displays components engaged in a layout constraint. displays components engaged in a flush iMate. . displays assembly. displays grounded assembly that is not enabled. indicates the design view is locked and cannot be affected by changes to the assembly model. activates the associated private design view. displays components engaged in a flush constraint.

indicates Level of Detail browser entry is set to exclude. displays components engaged in an insert constraint. displays grounded component that is a member of an iAssembly Factory and that is not enabled. displays a grounded iAssembly Factory. displays the associated grounded substitute Level of Detail in the assembly that is not enabled. displays grounded component that is a member of an iAssembly Factory. displays component that is a member of an iAssembly Factory. . displays components engaged in an insert iMate. activates the associated substitute Level of Detail representation. activates the associated Level of Detail representation.Disabled Grounded iAssembly Factory Grounded iAssembly Factory iAssembly Member Disabled iAssembly Member Disabled Grounded iAssembly Member Grounded iAssembly Member Insert Constraint Insert iMate Result Level of Detail Representation Folder Level of Detail Representation Level of Detail Representation Excluded Substitute Level of Detail Representation Disabled Grounded Substitute Level of Detail displays grounded iAssembly Factory that is not enabled. displays component that is a member of an iAssembly Factory and that is not enabled. contains the Level of Detail representations for the assembly.

. activates the associated positional representation. displays an assembly component that is affected by an assembly feature. displays the associated grounded substitute Level of Detail in the assembly. contains the positional representations for the assembly. and Level of Detail representations for an assembly. displays components engaged in a rotation iMate. groups assembly nodes for better browser organization. displays components engaged in a mate constraint. displays components engaged in a rotationtranslation iMate. displays components engaged in a mate constraint that includes at least one axis displays components engaged in a mate iMate. indicates presence of a grounded substitute Level of Detail with visibility turned off.Invisible Level of Detail Substitute Invisible Grounded Level of Detail Substitute Substitute Level of Detail (LOD) Grounded Substitute Level of Detail Mate Constraint Axial Mate Constraint Mate iMate Result Participant Positional Representation Folder Positional Representation Representations Folder User-defined Folder Rotation Constraint Rotation iMate Result RotationTranslation Constraint RotationTranslation iMate indicates presence of a substitute Level of Detail with visibility turned off. displays components engaged in a rotational motion constraint. displays the associated substitute Level of Detail (LOD) in the assembly. contains the view. displays components engaged in a rotational-translational motion constraint. positional.

displays the associated circular pattern of the component and contains the pattern elements. indicates presence of virtual component with all degrees of freedom removed. indicates presence of virtual component that is not enabled. indicates presence of virtual component. indicates presence of grounded virtual component that is not enabled. displays component as an element in the pattern. displays the associated rectangular pattern of the component and contains the pattern elements. . displays components engaged in a tangent iMate.Translation iMate Result Tangent Constraint Tangent iMate Result Translational Constraint Virtual Component Disabled Virtual Component Disabled Grounded Virtual Component Grounded Virtual Component Circular Component Pattern Element Rectangular Component Pattern translation iMate. displays components engaged in a tangent constraint. displays components engaged in a translational motion constraint.

displays the assembly features that represent a groove weld displays the assembly features that represent a groove weld with associated weld symbol. and holes. The assembly is enabled and can be edited in-place displays the assembly features that represent a fillet weld displays the assembly features that represent a fillet weld with associated weld symbol. displays graphical element representative of a cosmetic weld with associated weld symbol. displays the grounded weldment assembly. Valid assembly features for machining include chamfers. displays assembly features that represent the post-weld machining and finishing. The assembly is not enabled and cannot be edited in-place. The assembly is enabled and can be edited inplace. displays assembly features (chamfers. The assembly is not enabled and cannot be edited in-place. displays the weldment assembly. extrude cuts. displays the weldment assembly in the background. displays the grounded weldment assembly in the background. extrude cut. and holes) used to remove Weldment not Enabled Grounded Weldment not Enabled Grounded Weldment Fillet Weld Fillet Weld with Symbol Groove Weld Groove Weld with Symbol Machining Preparations .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Weldments Cosmetic Weld Cosmetic Weld with Symbol Weldment displays graphical element representative of a cosmetic weld.

Weld Symbol Welds displays the weld and associated symbol. displays assembly features that represent the actual weld. Assembly weld bead features can be cosmetic welds or solid fillet or groove welds and can only reside in the Welds feature group. . Right-click to select options to sort beads by All Beads. It contains all consumed and unconsumed weld bead features.extrude cut. Consumed Beads Only. or Unconsumed Beads Only. and holes) used to remove material to prepare the model for welding. The Beads folder is located in the Welds feature group.

indicates auxiliary view placed on a sheet different than the parent view.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Drawing AutoCAD Block Folder AutoCAD Block AutoCAD Model Assembly Auxiliary View Shortcut Auxiliary View Border Folder Border Sheet Border Break Out contains the AutoCAD blocks. Crop View Detail View Shortcut Detail View AutoCAD Drawing . The view is created without an alignment to the base view. indicates the drawing is an AutoCAD DWG file. displays view cropped from another view. indicates detail view placed on a sheet different than the parent view. provides access to delete the current sheet border. Use the shortcut and go to the detail view sheet. indicates material was removed from an existing view to expose obscured parts or features. contains border formats. Use the shortcut and go to the auxiliary view sheet. displays the AutoCAD block instance. plot and measure the file contents in Inventor. contains the model definition for the AutoCAD DWG file opened in Inventor. indicates a detail of a specified portion of a base view. provides access to format and insert a sheet border. but can be attached to the base view. displays and provides access to the assembly in the drawing view. View. indicates a view projected from an edge or a line in a base view.

partial. contains resources that are used to add and set up new drawing sheets. indicates a full. indicates projected view placed on a sheet different than the parent view. displays and provides access to the associated revision table. displays and provides access to the associated hole table. displays the associated non-static sketch symbol on the drawing sheet. displays a view that contains one or more associated sketches. Use the shortcut and go to the section view sheet. half. Use the shortcut and go to the projected view sheet. groups symbols for better browser organization. depending on the drafting standard. displays and provides access to the associated parts list. The draft view does not contain a representation of a 3D model. displays and provides access to the associated general table. offset. indicates a first-angle or third-angle projection of a base view. or aligned section view from a specified base view. indicates section view placed on a sheet different than the parent view. Drawing Resources User-defined Symbols Folder Field Text General Table Hole Table Sketch Symbol Overlay View Parts List Part Projected View Shortcut Projected View Revision Table Section View Shortcut Section View .Drawing Draft View displays drawing file. provides access to drawing property fields. displays and provides access to the part in the drawing view. uses a positional representation to show an assembly in different positions in a single view.

indicates the drawing file is in a deferred state. provides access to edit the associated title block.Sheet Format Folder Sheet Sheet Sketch Sketched Symbol Folder Sketch Symbol Template Slice Static Sketched Symbol Title Block Folder Title Block Shortcut to Base View contains sheet formats. Use the shortcut and go to the parent view sheet. indicates the views were created as dependent views on a different sheet. displays and provides access to edit the associated sheet. indicates the first placed view in a new drawing or a view independent of existing drawing views. displays and provides access to the associated sheet sketch. contains sketch symbols. indicates a detail view pinned to another view. provides access to associated sketch symbol definition. indicates a zero-depth section or "slice" from an existing view. contains title block formats. displays the associated static sketched symbol on the drawing sheet. Independent View Drawing Attached Updates Deferred " .

displays rotational tweaks and associated components. .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Presentation Presentation Part Sequence Task Tweak Rotation Tweak Translation Explosion denotes top node of a presentation file. displays a part. displays translational tweaks and associated components. contains one or more sequences. displays tweaks and associated components. contains presentation features for the active view.

indicates an adaptive part or feature.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > State Adaptive Error Adaptive Warning Analysis Invisible Active indicates a cross-part projection failure. indicates that the analysis visibility is off. indicates associated entry in the browser is outdated. indicates a serious problem with the contact set. and active positional representation. indicates a minor problem with the adaptive relationship. indicates component is included in the contact set. Examples include active analysis. indicates a serious problem. Hover over the icon for additional information. indicates that a file link is unresolved. indicates no errors are present relative to the associated browser entry. Contact Set Contact Set Error Contact Set Warning Adaptive Excluded Healthy Unresolved File Update Required Warning Error Flexible Automatic Solve . indicates a flexible assembly or sketch block. indicates a minor problem with the contact set. Hover over the icon for additional information. indicates a minor problem. indicates associated component has been set to exclude. indicates a design accelerator component is in automatic update mode. active design view. indicates that the associated item is active.

indicates a design accelerator component is in manual update mode and is up-to-date.Positional Variation Sick Manual Mode Updated indicates the positional variation is unable to resolve. .

Manual update of part required to reflect changes made to external references. displays sheet metal part designated as a substitute. Manual update of part required to reflect changes made to external references. Substitute Sheet Metal Part Substitute Surface Part .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Substitute Substitute Part displays part designated as a substitute. displays surface part designated as a substitute. Manual update of part required to reflect changes made to external references.

Surface Analysis Zebra Analysis . Activate the analysis to view the results.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Analysis Cross Section Analysis Curvature Analysis Draft Analysis indicates a cross section analysis has been performed. Activate the analysis to view the results. Activate the analysis to view the results. indicates a draft analysis has been performed. indicates a Gaussian curvature analysis has been performed. Activate the analysis to view the results. Activate the analysis to view the results. indicates a curvature analysis has been performed. indicates a surface continuity analysis has been performed.

. displays a comment associated with a note in the engineer's notebook. indicates presence of an engineer's notebook associated with the part.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Notebook Notebook View Engineer's Notebook Note Comment displays a view associated with a note in the engineer's notebook. contains comments and views in the engineer's notebook.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Getting started > Browser Icon Reference > Application OLE Folder contains files linked or embedded in an Inventor model or drawing. .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Basic 3D Workflow Topics in this section 3D modeling concepts DWG geometry workflow .

play. Use it to show a detailed presentation of the prototype or the finished product being designed. Show Me how to animate a presentation view .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Basic 3D Workflow > 3D modeling concepts Concept Procedure 3D Animation You can develop. and record animations of exploded views to show the order and path of tweaks in a complex assembly.

Create a door for an electrical box Using DWG Tutorial 3 .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Basic 3D Workflow > DWG geometry workflow Using DWG Geometry Workflow When starting a design using existing DWG geometry.Create a panel for an electrical box Using DWG Tutorial 2 . What is the workflow for using DWG geometry? Using DWG Tutorial 1 . The final tutorial creates a part within an assembly. Create a part. the workflow is as follows: 1. The following tutorials each start with the same DWG file to create part features. Put parts together into an assembly. 1. and then shows how to place the previously created parts into position in the assembly. 2. 4. 3. Create an assembly drawing. Create a drawing of the part. first import your DWG geometry into an Autodesk Inventor part sketch. To create a part using DWG geometry. Create a part. 2. Create a drawing of the part.Create a box and assemble with the panel and door .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D Topics in this section Basic foundations Use your AutoCAD geometry AutoCAD terms More concepts .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations Topics in this section 2D to 3D Comparison Keystroke Reference Autodesk Inventor file types Dimension Commands Geometry Creation Commands Geometry Editing Commands Insert commands View Commands .

Autodesk Inventor has six 3D Autodesk Inventor A 3D indicator represents the X. 3D Autodesk Inventor When you have components to assemble. and blue indicates Z. You do not need to use coordinates when you draw. dimension driven design 2D AutoCAD You create geometry and then place dimensions. Objects are drawn on the XY plane of the current UCS. planes of operation. you change the dimension values. To change the length or height. and you do not need to define snap and grid settings or origin points. UCS icon vs. you do not need to rely on the 3D Indicator much. However. . and Z axes. green indicates Y. You manage change within that sketch by modifying the dimension values rather than modifying the geometry. Y. you place constraints or "rules" on those components to restrict their movement. It provides a movable coordinate system for coordinate entry. 3D Autodesk Inventor You sketch a part and then control the exact size and shape by changing the dimension values. Constraints 2D AutoCAD You do not use constraints or create relationships between primitives-based models. The red arrow indicates the X direction. associated dimensions update. When you change existing geometry. Most AutoCAD geometric editing commands are dependent on the location and orientation of the UCS. Changing one primitive has no impact on another primitive. and viewing.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations > 2D to 3D Comparison Geometry driven vs. 3D indicator 2D AutoCAD The UCS icon helps you visualize the orientation of the drawing plane.

3D Autodesk Inventor You work with a minimum of four file types. radial. create each individual view of your model. Multiple users can work on the same design at the same time. ordinate. or in a drawing file. You can also create dimensions that are associative. or work separately in 3D. All components of your work exist in the same file. Dimensions 2D AutoCAD To dimension in AutoCAD. reference dimensions. There are four basic dimension types that are used differently as you design: model dimensions. Autodesk Inventor has six different 3D assembly constraints that determine how components in your assembly fit together and how they move: Mate. sketch dimensions. and drawing dimensions.impact on another primitive. angular. . 3D Autodesk Inventor You can place dimensions on layers when used with drawings. Basic dimensions in AutoCAD include linear. It can be tedious if you have more 3D Autodesk Inventor You can automatically generate all the projected views for a model. You cannot separate your model from your drawing. This DWG file contains paper space. Multiple file types are advantageous because you can work separately on a part. an assembly. nonassociative. or exploded. Views 2D AutoCAD For each drawing. 2D. Insert. You place these dimensions on a layer. model space. Tangent. Rotation. and Rotation-translation. and arc length. including section. File types 2D AutoCAD You work with one file type: DWG. and 3D. you add measurement annotations to a drawing. Angle. Any changes associate and update in all other files.

3D Autodesk Inventor You can window select 2D geometry and select vertices and segments to move and stretch geometry. To scale or mirror a single 3D part. auxiliary. while applying the Boolean operation of your choice. mirror. and broken views. Selection and grips 2D AutoCAD You can window select both 2D/3D geometry and use grips to stretch. by design. rotate. and scale. 3D Autodesk Inventor The scale and mirror commands work on 2D geometry. you derive the part. and then derive the assembly into a single part. you typically use blocks. Most of the data is stored in the external part files. 3D Autodesk Inventor You place the parts in an assembly. intersect).than one view. Write them out to a file (WBLOCK). Autodesk Inventor assemblies. store little data into the assembly file. Reuse of data and external files 2D AutoCAD To avoid file bloat and reuse recurring data like library elements or standard parts. Scale and mirror 2D AutoCAD There are specific scale and mirror commands that work on both 2D and 3D geometry. move. subtract. 3D Autodesk Inventor You typically set up a project file with a library path and place existing part files and standard files in an assembly. You can also mirror individual features or the entire 3D part without using the Derive command. To select 3D geometry . Boolean operations 2D AutoCAD You have specific commands to create Boolean operations between different solids (union. and reuse them as external references (XREFS).

and presentations. 3D Autodesk Inventor Text styles. use the dedicated command. Color and light styles are available in parts. geometry. and dimension styles throughout the product.and scale. you can select parts in the browser. text styles. For operations like rotate. assemblies. Because Autodesk Inventor has a model browser. alternatively. and layers are available in the drawing environment. Styles and layers 2D AutoCAD You have access to layers. . To select 3D geometry you use the "Component selection" command. dimension styles.

or character sequence. Key F1 Name Help Function Help for the active command or dialog box. including function can have reserved shortcuts assigned to them. Any combination of Shift. Down Arrow. Page Up. See Customize . Warning: The following table does not apply if other definitions are imported. . Category Global . /). Autodesk Inventor has many predefined shortcut keys and command aliases. You can see all predefined shortcut keys and command aliases by selecting Tools tab Options panel Customize and clicking the Keyboard tab. combination of keys.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations > Keystroke Reference Note The following applies only when default multi-character Command Aliases are loaded. Using the defined key. End.= [ ] \ . Page Up. Down Arrow. You can also define your own custom shortcut keys and command aliases. Page Down. Ctrl. Up Arrow. Other keys. but these keys are not user-definable. End. or one of the following keys: Home. you can start a command like an AutoCAD command alias. A combination of the Shift key along with a numeric key (0-9). Up Arrow.Keyboard tab for information on how to enable or disable default multi-character Command Aliases. ' . and Alt keys along with an alphanumeric character. A shortcut can be defined using any of the following keys or key combinations: A punctuation key (including ` . The following table represents a subset of the more shortcut keys and command aliases which are predefined in Autodesk Inventor 2010. Note Some shortcut keys and command aliases are only active in specific environments. Page Down. punctuation key. or the Autodesk Inventor 2010 definitions are edited. or one of the following keys: Home. A command alias is an alphanumeric character or character sequence that can be used to start a command.

In assemblies. Display all constraints.F2 Pan Pans the graphics window. Display the isometric view of the model. applies a mate constraint. Global F3 Zoom Global F4 Rotate Global F5 Previous View Global F6 Isometric View Global F7 Slice Graphics Sketch F8 F9 Esc Delete Show All Constraints Hide All Constraints Quit Delete Sketch Sketch Global Global Alt + drag mouse Assembly . Returns to the previous view. moves spline shape points. Rotates objects in the graphics window. Zooms in or out in the graphics window. Hide All Constraints. Quits a command. In a sketch. Deletes selected objects. Partially slice away the model to reveal the sketch plane.

Automatically rotates model in graphics window. Activates the Baseline Dimension Set command. Click to quit. Activates the Select command menu.Ctrl + Y Redo Activates Redo (revokes the last Undo). To draw a circle. removes the last sketched segment. Create a chamfer Creates circular pattern of sketch geometry. Activates the Constraint command. In the active Line command. Activates the General Drawing BDA Baseline Dimension Set Drawing C C Center point circle Constraint Sketch Assembly CH CP Chamfer Circular Pattern Part /Assembly 2D Sketch D General Dimension Sketch / Drawing . Global Ctrl + Z Undo Global Shift + right mouse click Global Shift + Rotate Global B Balloon Activates the Balloon command.

Activates the Line command Creates a leader text Creates a loft feature. Activates the Move Component command. Activates the Hole command. Creates a fillet. Activates the Ordinate Dimension Part D Face Draft E Extrude Part F FC Fillet Feature Control Frame Part /Assembly Drawing H Hole Part /Assembly L Line Sketch LE LO M Leader Text Loft Move Component Drawing Part Assembly MI Mirror Part /Assembly N Create Component Assembly ODS Ordinate Dimension Set Sketch .Dimension General Dimension command. Creates a face draft / taper. Activates the Feature Control Frame command. Activates the Extrude command. Activates the Create Component command. Creates a mirror feature.

Activates the Text command. Activates the Create iMate command. Activates the Revolve command. Creates a sweep feature. Creates rectangular pattern of feature or sketch geometry. Activates the 3D Sketch command. Activates the Tweak Components command. Activates the 2D Sketch command. Assembly P Place Component Q Create iMate Assembly R Revolve Part /Assembly RO Rotate Component Assembly RP Rectangular Pattern Part /2D Sketch S 2D Sketch 2D Sketch/Part/Assembly Part S3 3D Sketch SW Sweep Part /Assembly T Text Sketch/Drawing T Tweak Components Presentation . Activates the Place Component command.Set Dimension Set command. Activates the Rotate Component command.

Creates a work point. . Creates a work plane. Sketch ] / . Work Plane Work Axis Work Point Grounded Work Point Global Global Global Global .TR Trim Activates the Trim command. Creates a work axis. Creates a grounded work point.

dwg. 3D part model data is contained in a file with the extension .prt (UGS NX) . Autodesk Inventor maintains data in multiple associated files.dxf . its dependent files are updated.sldasm (SolidWorks) .sat .step Note You can translate or open an AutoCAD DWG file.ipt.neu (Pro/ENGINEER) . For example. which maintain one file with multiple types of data. When you change a file. . You can only open an Autodesk Inventor DWG file (.g.sldprt.x_t.asm.idw. 3D assembly model data is contained in a file with the extension .prt. 2D drawing data is contained in a file with the extension .ide) that contain iFeatures definitions Related files are associated to each other. .iam. Autodesk Inventor also maintains: Presentation files (. when you change an assembly. Note on opening DWG files . iFeature files (.dwg). . . .ipn).Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations > Autodesk Inventor file types Unlike AutoCAD and Mechanical Desktop. . .x_b (Parasolid) . You can translate the following file types (See Access files from other CAD systems): . that contain definitions for exploded assemblies and specialized assembly views.prt. .dwg (AutoCAD) .asm.iges . drawing views and presentations of that assembly update automatically.

In AutoCAD. This table shows AutoCAD Dimension commands and the corresponding Autodesk Inventor Dimension commands in 2D Sketch environment. Several commands in Autodesk Inventor combine the functionality of multiple single commands in AutoCAD. the dimensions drive the geometry parametrically. and a radius dimension when you select an arc.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations > Dimension Commands Many AutoCAD commands are equivalent to commands in Autodesk Inventor. This command replaces several single-purpose AutoCAD commands. a diameter dimension when you select a circle. some AutoCAD Dimension commands have corresponding Autodesk Inventor commands that can only be used when dimensioning in a drawing file (IDW or DWG). Autodesk Inventor has additional commands that have no equivalent in AutoCAD. you create 2D geometries to the required dimensions. In Autodesk Inventor. AutoCAD Linear Dimension Aligned Dimension Radius Dimension Diameter Dimension Angular Dimension Edit Dimension Autodesk Inventor General Dimension General Dimension General Dimension General Dimension General Dimension Double-click the dimension In addition. The General Dimension command creates a linear dimension when you select one or two elements. AutoCAD Baseline Dimension Autodesk Inventor Baseline Dimension .

Continue Dimension Ordinate Dimension Quick Dimension General Dimension Ordinate Dimension Baseline Dimension Set Ordinate Dimension Set Quick Leader Tolerance Dimension Center Mark Note on opening DWG files Leader Text Feature Control Frame Center Mark .

You then control the precise size and position by adding dimensional and geometric constraints. you usually create 2D geometry to the precise size required. Center Point In addition. . This table compares AutoCAD Drawing commands to the corresponding Autodesk Inventor Sketch commands. While creating sketches for part features in Autodesk Inventor. you often use 2D Sketch commands to create geometry quickly (with no regard to size).Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations > Geometry Creation Commands In AutoCAD. AutoCAD Line Polyline Polygon Rectangle Arc Circle Spline Ellipse Point Autodesk Inventor Line Line Polygon Two point rectangle Three point arc Center point circle Spline Ellipse Point. some AutoCAD Drawing commands have corresponding Autodesk Inventor commands that can only be used when drawing a 2D sketch in a drawing file (IDW or DWG).

AutoCAD Hatch Text Autodesk Inventor Fill. Hatch Sketch Region Text .

This table compares AutoCAD Editing commands to their corresponding Autodesk Inventor 2D Editing commands. You can also find a group of 3D editing commands to modify 3D parts.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations > Geometry Editing Commands Note on opening DWG files You edit the 2D sketches in Autodesk Inventor using the 2D editing commands to update their 3D parts. AutoCAD Erase Copy Mirror Autodesk Inventor Delete key Ctrl+C Mirror Offset Array Offset Circular pattern Rectangular pattern Move Rotate Trim Extend Move Rotate Trim Extend .

AutoCAD Edit Hatch Autodesk Inventor Right-click and select Modify Hatch Right-click and select Edit text Edit Text . In addition.Chamfer Fillet Edit spline Chamfer Fillet Select a fit point and drag Note Use the Move and Rotate commands in Autodesk Inventor to copy at the same time. some AutoCAD Editing commands have corresponding Autodesk Inventor commands that can only be used when modifying a 2D sketch in a drawing file (IDW).

Image files can be imported into Autodesk Inventor files by clicking Sketch tab Insert panel Image. 2D DWG and DXF files can be used in Autodesk Inventor sketches to create features: On the ribbon. This table compares AutoCAD Insert commands to the corresponding Autodesk Inventor Insert commands. Disable this option as required. From a Part file. click Sketch tab Insert panel ACAD Note By default. 3. 3D DWG and DXF files can be used in Autodesk Inventor 3D sketches to create features: In part (.iges and .sat) Import . OLE Objects can be imported into Autodesk Inventor files by clicking Manage tab Insert panel Insert Object. click Sketch tab Insert panel ACAD. geometry imported using the Insert AutoCAD File command has the endpoint constrained. Note By default. 5. Import to import 4.ipt) files: On the ribbon.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations > Insert commands The following file types can be imported into an open Autodesk Inventor file using the appropriate Insert command: 1. 2. AutoCAD Attach Image Autodesk Inventor Ribbon: Sketch tab Insert panel Image Ribbon: Manage tab Insert panel Import (. geometry imported using the Insert AutoCAD File command has the endpoint constrained. Enabling this option slows down performance. click Manage tab Insert panel SAT and IGES files into Autodesk Inventor files.

OLE Object Ribbon: Manage tab Insert panel Insert Object .

AutoCAD Pan Real-time Zoom Real-time Zoom Window Zoom All Zoom Previous Free Orbit Continuous Orbit Autodesk Inventor Pan Zoom Zoom Window Zoom All F5 key Free Orbit Shift + Free orbit .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Basic foundations > View Commands The mouse scroll direction for real-time zoom in AutoCAD is opposite to Autodesk Inventor by default. This table compares AutoCAD View commands to their corresponding Autodesk Inventor View commands. To reverse the mouse scroll direction to be the same as in Autodesk Inventor when using real-time zoom in AutoCAD. set the system variable Zoomwheel to the value 1 (default value: 0).

dwg file that does not contain Autodesk Inventor data. select the . . you can: Open the file directly in Autodesk Inventor Import the file Access: In the Open dialog box.dwg file that does not contain Autodesk Inventor data in the Open dialog box. and then click Options. All Autodesk Inventor data creation commands are available. Select Open or Import. Drawing Settings Open Opens the file with full visual fidelity. Note Once a .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > Use your AutoCAD geometry Concept Procedure Quick Reference File Open Options When you select a .dwg). The file can only be opened as an Autodesk Inventor drawing (. Imports and translates AutoCAD data into Autodesk Inventor. Options panel Application Options and select the The Non-Autodesk Inventor DWG options control the default value for the File Open Options dialog box.dwg file contains Autodesk Inventor data. you can no longer import the file into Autodesk Inventor. Import Use the Application Options to specify a default value: Click Tools tab Drawing Tab.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > AutoCAD terms Here is a list of common terms and command names used in AutoCAD with links to the Help topic in Inventor. AutoCAD term Array (rectangular and polar) Inventor term Pattern (sketch) Pattern (feature) Pattern (component) Scene styles Sketch block Split Content Center General Dimension Drawing dimensions Measure Delete Pack and Go iProperties Coil Sheet Lighting styles Color styles Leader Constraints Application options Document settings Free orbit Constraints Edit sheet Help topic link Pattern (sketch) Pattern (feature) Pattern (component) Scene styles Sketch blocks Split Content Center Environment Parametric dimensions Dimensions in drawings Measure Delete a sketch Package files iProperties Coil features Add or edit a sheet Lighting styles Color styles Add a note with a leader Plan constraints Application options Document settings Free orbit Plan constraints Edit sheet Background Block Break DesignCenter Dimension Distance Erase eTransmit Fields Helix Layout LightList Materials Mleader Object snap Options Orbit Ortho mode Page setup .

Plan Plot Publish Slice Style Tolerance Viewports Visual style Workspace Zoom object View face Print Multi-sheet plot Split Text style Feature Control Frame Drawing views Display mode Environment Zoom selected View face Print models and drawings Plot multiple drawing sheets Split faces. trim and split solids Text styles Feature control frame Drawing views Change the display mode Environments Zoom selected .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts Concept Procedure Promote drawing dimensions .

Autodesk Inventor provides a list of possible commands that match the letters you type (until the command is unique or until you select from the list). Type a command alias at any time the command is valid. Like most Microsoft Windows-based products. These shortcuts are indicated on menus with underlined or with a letter within brackets while a command tooltip is displayed User-defined command aliases provide a command line-like ability without an area of the interface being dedicated to command entry. Autodesk Inventor does provide a means of accessing product functionality through keyboard shortcuts and command aliases. A set of predefined command aliases is delivered with Autodesk Inventor and you can extend them with aliases more suited to your particular workflow needs. Autodesk Inventor provides keyboard access to menus and command functions. .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > Where is my Command Line? Autodesk Inventor does not have a specific area of the user interface that is an exact parallel to the command line in AutoCAD.

Autodesk Inventor sketch geometry captures relationship information as it is being created. The key difference is that these relationships (or constraints) make the inevitable editing process much easier and more predictable when they are applied correctly. first create a circle that represents a hole followed by a rectangle that represents the stock in which the hole is placed. Dimensions in your drawing can be manually applied. circles.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > What is the Difference Between Drawing and Modeling? Modeling three-dimensional solid features often begins with creating a twodimensional sketch that defines a portion of the shape of your part. Because the drawing uses placed views of your model any changes that you make to your models are automatically reflected in your updated drawings. You can begin the solid modeling process using sketches that represent some (or all) of the parts in your assembly. you must first have a model into which you plan to place the hole. it is possible to create geometry in any sequence because you are responsible for tracking the meaning of the geometry. Sketching involves the creation of lines. Because you have a solid representation of your model the system knows which edges to display as solid or dotted in each of your drawing views. Other tools allow you to take advantage of the power of your computer while assisting you with the functional aspects of your design. Individual part models are then created using geometry from a single sketch in the context of the assembly model. when creating a 2D drawing. This sequence does not work while modeling in 3D because to place the hole. These tools allow you to . You can also import the dimensions you placed on your model sketches and use them in the appropriate drawing view. They are familiar steps to anyone who has created a drawing in a CAD product. Assembly designs are often started using a technique called top-down design (or skeletal modeling). For example. When the addition of features (or components) to your model is complete. Views of your model are arranged on your drawing sheet. In the 2D design world. it is time to create the traditional three view drawing. The 3D modeling sequence resembles the creation of the physical part and the creation of one feature usually depends on a previous feature. arcs. Autodesk Inventor's sketch commands look and feel like the two-dimensional geometry commands you used previously. Assembly models are also frequently created using a bottom-up approach in which previously created part models are placed together to represent the final assembly. This feature hierarchy allows the computer to track the meaning of the geometry. and dimensions.

the drawing captures the physical information needed to create the part. shafts.verify the engineering integrity of: bolted connections. gear train designs. Both the drawing and modeling approaches to design result in a familiar engineering drawing. In the 2D approach. . springs. and structural loads all using three-dimensional models and design parameters unique to your design. In the solid modeling approach. the drawing is one of several uses for the created model. bearing life.

For example. To establish relationships between components placed within assembly models. Within Autodesk Inventor's assembly environment. Constraints can also be manually applied to alter the relationships between geometry after the sketch geometry exists. dragging the endpoint of a line that is constrained to be perpendicular to another line does not change the perpendicularity. arcs and other geometry while the geometry is being created. features of one component can have relationships to features on other components. For example. These relationships determine the position (and sometimes the size) of each component. Show Me an introduction to constraints .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > What are constraints? The dictionary defines a constraint as being a restricted or confined state within prescribed bounds. The idea that geometry within Autodesk Inventor behaves differently depending on the constraints that were applied is one that often hinders new users transitioning from a 2D drawing application. These geometric constraints allow the subsequent editing of the sketch with predictable results. mating the bottom of a box to the top of a table ensures that the bottom face of the box remains in contact with the plane representing the top of the table. Autodesk Inventor uses constraints in two primary ways: To control geometry within sketches. Within Autodesk Inventor's 2D sketch environment constraints are inferred between lines.

dwg) and Autodesk Inventor Drawings (.dwg) opened in Autodesk Inventor .dwg) imported into Autodesk Inventor AutoCAD Drawings (.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > What happens to AutoCAD layers in Autodesk Inventor? AutoCAD Drawings (.

and then view. Objects display exactly as they do in AutoCAD. and measure the file contents. and then copy and paste AutoCAD entities into an Autodesk Inventor sketch. When you translate 2D data from a DWG file.dwg) file in Autodesk Inventor. Mapping fonts Text styles . Note If you do not require AutoCAD objects translated into Autodesk Inventor objects. you can map the fonts in the DWG file to the fonts used by Autodesk Inventor. you can directly open any AutoCAD DWG (.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > How do fonts and text work in Autodesk Inventor? Autodesk Inventor uses the same Microsoft Windows and TrueType fonts used by most Windows-based programs. plot. all the AutoCAD data is selectable for Copy/Paste so you can open an AutoCAD DWG file in Autodesk Inventor. In addition.

dwg) imported into Autodesk Inventor AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg) opened in Autodesk Inventor .dwg) and Autodesk Inventor Drawings (.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > What happens to AutoCAD blocks in Autodesk Inventor? AutoCAD Drawings (.

To produce a manufacturing drawing without an associated 3D or model file. Note on opening DWG files . data is stored in multiple files with different file types.iam) with references to each part. When there are multiple solids. the translator creates an Autodesk Inventor part file (. or blocks to develop templates in Autodesk Inventor.ipt) for each body and an assembly file (. When you translate data from AutoCAD or Mechanical Desktop. You can create a part file or add the data to a sketch in the active part. they become ShapeManager solid bodies in an Autodesk Inventor model file. To use 2D data to build a part model. borders. translate the AutoCAD data to an Autodesk Inventor drawing file (. translate the AutoCAD file to an Autodesk Inventor part model (.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > Decide which file type to use for translating DWG data In Autodesk Inventor. You can create a drawing file or add the data to a sketch in the active drawing.ipt). use the import settings to place the translated data in a new drawing file (. To use AutoCAD title blocks. choose the destination file type based on the type of data you are translating and how you use it. When you translate AutoCAD 3D solids.idw).idw).

Right-click and select Promote to Sketch from the menu. Click Options and select Next. 1. 3. Click Open. The geometry is placed on a sketch associated to a draft view. You can promote the dimensions to the sketch and use them to control the size of the geometry parametrically. select Next. select Promote Dimensions to Sketch. You can edit it or change its format and display. In the Import Destination dialog box. Note on opening DWG files . After a dimension is promoted. dimensions are placed on the drawing sheet as drawing dimensions. Select an AutoCAD file and click Open.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > How do Autodesk Inventor dimensions work? Concept Procedure Promote drawing dimensions When you import AutoCAD data into a drawing. 4. You can also promote the dimensions to sketch dimensions after importing an AutoCAD file. 2. 5. 1. Select the dimensions to promote. it behaves the same way as any sketch dimension. In the Layers and Objects Import Options dialog box. 2.

the Autodesk Inventor material format is applied to the translated part. material data is defined by the material format assigned to the part.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > What happens to Mechanical Desktop materials? When you translate 3D data in a Mechanical Desktop file to Autodesk Inventor parts and assemblies. If the part template you use contains a material format with the same name as the Mechanical Desktop material. . If the part template does not contain a matching material format. You can specify a template to use when translating a Mechanical Desktop part. the material format can be edited and used in the same way as a format created in Autodesk Inventor. In Autodesk Inventor. the template used to create parts contains multiple materials formats and you select the material when creating a part. the material data for the translated parts is added to the part files. To change the definition of a material in Autodesk Inventor. To view the material assignment and other physical properties of the part. Usually. After the file is translated. click iProperties and select the Physical Properties tab. use the settings in the Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor dialog box. the translator adds a format to the translated part and uses the material data from the Mechanical Desktop file to define the new material format.

If settings in the translated dimensions are different. decimal. Scientific. If translated dimensions use a space as the decimal separator. the space is changed to a decimal point. and Windows Desktop styles are mapped to Autodesk Inventor decimal style. engineering. Unit styles Autodesk Inventor provides a decimal and a fractional unit style. Rounding precision Decimal precision Zero suppression Decimal separator . Autodesk Inventor has a single setting for leading and trailing zeros in linear and angular dimensions. and a warning message is displayed.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > Numeric units in translated DWG data Note on opening DWG files Since AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor have different options for numeric formats. All AutoCAD data with greater precision is converted to 1/128. The greatest level of rounding precision in Autodesk Inventor is 1/128. Autodesk Inventor uses the setting for linear dimensions. the dimensions are converted to the maximum allowed precision. some attributes are converted when dimensions are translated. If the precision of translated dimensions is greater than available in Autodesk Inventor. Fraction and architectural are mapped to Autodesk Inventor fractional style. and a warning message is displayed.

dwg) and the AutoCAD data is saved as AutoCAD data. The AutoCAD data is translated into Autodesk Inventor data.dwg file. You can save a file as an Autodesk Inventor drawing (. The Autodesk Inventor data is translated into AutoCAD data.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > Open/Save DWG Data vs. When you open an AutoCAD DWG (. In addition. You can view.dwg file. AutoCAD data remains as AutoCAD data. and measure the file contents. plot. all the AutoCAD data is selectable for copy and paste.dwg) data directly in Autodesk Inventor. You can open an AutoCAD DWG file in Autodesk Inventor. Portions of the Autodesk Inventor data are reusable in AutoCAD as blocks. Open AutoCAD DWG files directly to view. Objects display exactly as they do in AutoCAD. and the AutoCAD data remains AutoCAD data in Autodesk Inventor. or measure native AutoCAD data in Autodesk . You can save an Autodesk Inventor drawings natively in DWG format without translation. You can import a . Open/Save as Use the Open command to open AutoCAD (. You can then view.dwg) file in Autodesk Inventor. Autodesk Inventor drawing data remains associative to the model. plot. measure and minimally edit the Autodesk Inventor drawing data in AutoCAD. plot. Import/Export The following options are available when you are working with DWG files: You can directly open a DWG file. and then copy and paste AutoCAD entities into any Autodesk Inventor sketch. When opening the file in AutoCAD the Autodesk Inventor drawing data looks just like it does in Autodesk Inventor. You can export a .

Translated AutoCAD data is not associative back to the Autodesk Inventor model. . Import/Export When you import an AutoCAD DWG file into Autodesk Inventor the AutoCAD data is translated into an Autodesk Inventor part or drawing file.or measure native AutoCAD data in Autodesk Inventor or when you want to translate (copy/paste) AutoCAD data selectively into an Autodesk Inventor sketch. based on your import settings. Use Autodesk Inventor's native DWG format if you must have Autodesk Inventor drawing files that can be viewed. Use import or export if you need fully editable data in AutoCAD or Autodesk Inventor. or measured in AutoCAD and remain associative to the Autodesk Inventor model data. When you export an Autodesk Inventor file into AutoCAD DWG. The original AutoCAD file is left intact and unchanged. plotted. the Autodesk Inventor data is translated into AutoCAD objects in a new DWG file. but the AutoCAD data is fully editable in AutoCAD.

While Autodesk Inventor drawing data and AutoCAD data can coexist in the same file. Assembly (.idw or . You can select objects in model space for use with copy/paste and the measuring commands.iam files.idw) files Autodesk Inventor requires separate file types for models and drawings. All Autodesk Inventor drawing commands are available in sheets/layouts. Drawings are . Assemblies are . . first determine how you plan to use that data in Autodesk Inventor. including rotate. and sheets/layouts are editable by both AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor.ipt files. There are options so you can directly open existing DWG files within Autodesk Inventor and you can select geometry for import to use within an Autodesk Inventor sketch.dwg) files Model space displays data exactly as it displays in AutoCAD. Paper space layouts are displayed as sheets in Autodesk Inventor. AutoCAD data can be viewed. plotted. Dimension and text styles.ipt). Parts are . and is selectable for delete and copy/paste. some data is shared between both applications. layers. You can place views and create annotations on a layout created in AutoCAD and the Autodesk Inventor data coexists with the AutoCAD data.dwg files. Model space is a read-only environment in Autodesk Inventor and is accessed in the browser. Exploded assembly views are saved as . AutoCAD Drawing (.dwg) and Autodesk Inventor Drawing (. Blocks. For more information. see Working directly with DWG in Autodesk Inventor Autodesk Inventor Part. You can change the background color and perform all viewing functions.iam) and Drawing (. while not equal. and measured. are synchronized such that supported changes made in one application are duplicated in the other application.ipn files and later used in a drawing view in an IDW or DWG file. (.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > How does Autodesk Inventor handle model space and paper space? To import an existing DWG file that contains information separated by AutoCAD in both model and paper space.

Autodesk Inventor models are created full-scale. which uses model space to draw and paper space (layouts) to annotate and plot. When creating a drawing of an Autodesk Inventor part or assembly model. It is like the AutoCAD workflow. . drawing views are created using a scale factor appropriate to the drawing sheet size.

there is no reliable means of automatically converting AutoLISP to VBA is practical. and the database schemas and application programming interface (API) differences between AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor. Like the AutoCAD User Community. parts. consider the capabilities of iFeatures. On-line Resource: Autodesk Inventor Customization message board . Autodesk Inventor utilizes Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) as its extensibility language. AutoLISP has been a mainstay for users working with AutoCAD. Autodesk Inventor provides built-in functionality for automating the creation of features. and iAssemblies in cases where they apply. Many AutoLISP routines are used to automate the creation and editing of commonly used geometries. Because of the syntactical differences between LISP and BASIC. While not intended to replace AutoLISP. It is possible that user-created solutions exist that can replace your regularly used AutoLISP routines.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from 2D > More concepts > What about all my AutoLISP routines? Since it was first introduced in 1986. and assemblies that are used repeatedly. iParts. Autodesk Inventor users have been actively extending their productivity by creating and sharing VBA add-in applications.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from SolidWorks Topics in this section Transition from SolidWorks .

SolidWorks term Parts Library features Library features Surface Knit trim AutoLimits Sensors Equations Properties Assemblies Light-weight assemblies Speedpack assemblies Assembly constraints Design Library Toolbox smart fasteners Contact solver Contact sets Animation Animator PhotoWorks PhotoView 36 Inventor Studio Render and animate overview Level of Detail representations Level of Detail representations iParts iAssemblies iFeatures Sculpt Autolimits Parameters iProperties Physical properties iPart Fundamentals iAssemblies iFeature fundamentals Shape description AutoLimits Parameters in models iProperties Inventor term Help topic link Assembly constraints Content Center Bolted Connection Contact solver Contact sets Assembly constraints overview Content Center Environment Bolted Connection Component Generator Component collision and contact .Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > Transition from SolidWorks > Transition from SolidWorks Welcome to Inventor. Here is a checklist of common terms used in SolidWorks with links to the Help topic in Inventor.

Note To display the following Help topics. you must have Analysis or Routed Systems. Analysis Dynamic Simulation Stress Analysis FEA Routing Tube & Pipe Cable & Harness Tube & Pipe Cable & Harness Tube and pipe fundamentals Fundamentals Dynamic Simulation Stress Analysis FEA Frequently asked questions (FAQ) Stress Analysis overview .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help Topics in this section Online Help: The Inside Track Find the information you need Join the Customer Involvement Program .

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help > Online Help: The Inside Track .

Navigation tabs in each topic link to related procedures. use the Get Started tab on the ribbon to learn about Inventor. dialog boxes. There is on-demand access from the context menu (right-click). browsers. references. and the menu bar. The Help menu on the main application menu bar has many resources to help new users learn Inventor and experienced learners to continue learning. The other is for users transitioning from AutoCAD or are new to using 3D software. Choose the one that fits for you. Access related animations from within a Help topic or access all the animations through the Visual Syllabus and the Help home page. What are ways to gain access to Help? How is Help organized? How do I get around in the Help system? What options does Help offer? How can I learn how to use Autodesk Inventor? How can I use the AutoCAD-specific Help? . and concepts. Key features of the Help are: Two Help home pages. If you are new to Inventor. menus. or through context-sensitive links.Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help > Find the information you need The Autodesk Inventor Help system is available from the Help menu. F1 function key. the Help icon. Show Me animations demonstrate how to complete a task or how to understand a concept. The default is for new or experienced Inventor users.

Autodesk Inventor > Fundamentals > About Help > Join the Customer Involvement Program Concept Procedure To turn the CIP on or off 1. 2. 4. 3. In the Customer Involvement Program dialog box. select a level of participation. On the InfoCenter toolbar. . to the right of the Help button. Click OK. click the drop-down arrow. Click Customer Involvement Program.

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment Topics in this section Work environment in Autodesk Inventor Styles and Style Libraries Customize Autodesk Inventor .

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor Topics in this section Application Options settings Measurement units Components Selection sets of components .

Shows line weights according to values you enter. regardless of magnification. The line weight is independent from the zoom magnification. Display true line weights Display line weights by range (millimeter) . For example. Then open the Drawing tab of the Application Options dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor > Application Options settings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Line Weight Settings Sets the line weight display in drawings. Shows line weights on screen as they would appear on paper. a line 0. and click Settings. Access: Choose Options.5-inch text. Values range from smallest (left) to largest (right).5 inch thick is the same as the height of 0.

change the default units in the templates that you use to create files.Units tab Sets the default units system and dimension precision for the active model file or template. Note To change the default units system applied when you create new files. Options panel Document Settings Units Modeling Dimension Display Default Parameter Input Display Examples Defined Parameter LENG = 1 mm + 2 mm LENG = 3 mm Display as value (in edit box) 1 mm + 2 mm 3 mm Display as expression (in edit box) LENG = 1 mm + 2 mm LENG = 3 mm .Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor > Measurement units Concept Procedure Quick Reference Document Settings . Access: Click Tools tab Units tab.

In an assembly. you can include work features while creating components. The features of components originate as sketches that can be fully or partially dimensioned.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor > Components Parts and subassemblies are created in part files or created in place in assembly files. For example. components are positioned relative to one another with assembly constraints. To make a custom version of a component in only one assembly. save the component in a part file with a new name. Feature volume is specified using feature-creation commands and supplying key values. changes are made to all occurrences of the component in its source file and in other assemblies. place a work axis on a cylinder center and a hole center to align the components along their center axes as they will be aligned when manufactured. To fit components together easily. When you edit an Autodesk Inventor component in an assembly. . Features can be resized by changing dimension values or redefined by specifying different angles or termination methods or relationships to other features.

Selected filters can be selected in the drawing. Select All selects the entire list and makes them available in the drawing. Select None clears the check mark from all filter types. Click to add a filter or clear the check mark to omit the filter from the set. Click the arrow and select the filter set from the list. Filter Set Filters . Detail. Access: On the Quick Access toolbar. or Layout. filter set to change. Lists the filters available for the selected filter type.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Work environment in Autodesk Inventor > Selection sets of components Concept Procedure Quick Reference Select filters Specifies the elements that can be selected when using the Select command filter sets in drawings. click the arrow on the Select command and then click Edit Select Filters. Invert Selection toggles between selected and unselected filters. Specifies the Custom.

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries Topics in this section Style Libraries Transition legacy projects to a style library Modify styles Work with styles Textures on parts Styles in sheet metal parts Styles in drawings Dimension styles in drawings .

including assemblies that are migrated but contain components that are not migrated. Get all files referenced by a specific file by right-clicking the file in the process list. Add Specific Files button Browses to the folder that contains the files to process. Double-click to select a project and make it active. Clear the check box to exclude a file from processing. Drop them in the list to add them. and path. The Style Management Wizard uses the active project to resolve all file paths during processing. and path. Selected files are listed by file name. Its settings for Style Library and path are summarized below the window. Using the Style Management Wizard. Welcome page Projects to Manage page Describes the Harvest Styles and Purge Styles processes. Purging removes unused style information and can be beneficial in large assemblies by reducing required memory. Alternate methods of adding files to the list: Drag and drop files from Microsoft Windows Explorer.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries > Style Libraries Concept Procedure Quick Reference Style Management Wizard The Style Management Wizard is a tool for administrators to assist in batch-style management for Autodesk Inventor files. Files that are not migrated are skipped during batch processing. Selects files to process in a detailed view. type. file type. Lists all defined projects by Name and Project Location. you can: Harvest styles from Autodesk Inventor files and place them in a target style library. Add All Files in Active Project button Lists all files by file name. Autodesk Inventor All files must migrate to the latest version of Autodesk Inventor. Purge styles from Autodesk Inventor files. Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Tools Style Management Wizard. and Files to Process . Use the Style Management Wizard when transitioning to using a style library with your design project. The active project is indicated by a check mark.

Press Pause to halt the processing temporarily or Cancel to stop. the source style library you are copying. and then Get All. Purge All Unused Styles from Files automatically deletes unused styles from selected documents. Harvest Styles into Target Style Library specifies the target style library. . Select Management Options page Chooses a harvest or purge operation. using previously selected options. Browse to the folder where the library will be stored. Get all drawings or presentations that use a specific file by right-clicking a file in the process list. Clear the check box of files you want to exclude from processing. Use the Browse button to browse to a specific library. Begin Batch Processing Starts batch processing. and then selecting Get Referenced Files. Select an Existing Style Library Lists the Default Style Library and any project that uses a style library. Adds all files that the selected file is dependent on to the list. Specify to copy an existing style library or create an empty library. Use Source Project Style Library Automatically selects the style library specified in the project. Select Drawings and Presentations. Create a New Style Library Opens the New Style Library dialog box.right-clicking the file in the process list. and if copying. Adds to the process list all drawings and presentations in the project search paths that use the specific file. Styles not saved to a styles library are permanently lost.

Set Up and Deploy the Style Library . transitioning to style libraries in the middle of a project requires careful consideration.Create the New Style Library and Template Set Step 4 .Collect Existing Styles Step 2 . Most of the new styles functionality is available without using a library. It insures that active projects can continue to progress without requiring users to take Style Libraries into consideration. Note While using a style library on new projects is simple. Step 1 . all pre-R9 projects migrated to Autodesk Inventor 9 or newer are set to not use a Style Library. Use the following general procedure to create a Style Library and template set for existing projects.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries > Transition legacy projects to a style library Concept Procedure Transition to Style Libraries By default.Optimize Styles from Legacy Versions of Autodesk Inventor Step 3 .

in referenced files (child documents). If Yes. Lists styles in the current document. If the style does not match the library. Identifies the style type. . and optionally. Child document file names are listed in the document name column. to match the styles in the style library. Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Update Click a column heading to sort contents. Indicates if a style was changed in the document or library. Clear the check box to update styles in the parent document only. Switches individual styles to update. If No. Update? Click the Update Styles in all Child Documents check box to update styles in referenced files. All columns resort to correspond with the new order. Click Yes to All to update all document styles to the library version or No to All to preserve the changed styles in the current document. Document Name Style Name Type Changed Shows file name in which the style is used. it is marked Not in Library.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries > Modify styles Concept Procedure Quick Reference Update styles Updates styles in the current document. Not available in part documents. the current document style definition remains in effect. the style in the document is updated to match the version in the style library.

Sheet Metal Unfold Lists the sheet metal unfolding rules in the active document or global style library (depending on the filter setting of Local or All Styles). backup KFactor value and bend table tolerances.return style values to the saved values. Click the expand/collapse “+” to the left of the Sheet Metal Unfold entry in the left-hand portion of the Style and Standard Editor dialog box to display the list of existing rules. click Sheet Metal Unfold.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries > Work with styles Concept Procedure Quick Reference Style and Standard Editor . Location Filter . Select the Add to Standard check box to add to the available styles list in the active standard style.return to the previously edited style. attributes and controls that are displayed as described in the following sections: Linear . Save . Unfold Method Dropdown selection specifies one of three unfold method options. Back .show Local Styles or All Styles (from the library) in the browser. You are prompted to save the previous edits. New . Reset . The option selected will determine the options.create new styles. Access: Click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor In the browser pane. Specifies unfolding method (linear or bend table) as well as units.save changes to an existing style in the current document. Select an existing sheet metal unfold rule to display its option settings. and then click the sheet metal unfold style name to display the selections and values used while unfolding in the right portion of the dialog.

Done .use to import a material style exported from another document.after saving changes. click to dismiss the Styles and Standard Editor dialog.Bend Table Custom Equation Import . .

2.Workspace\Textures. Specify the location of the styles library on a shared network folder. Copy the . In a shared environment. Next. under Frequently Used Subfolders.bmp images in this folder display in the Choose Texture dialog box. . it is recommended that the CAD administrator: Create one Autodesk Inventor project file which allows styles to be edited.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries > Textures on parts Concept Procedure Assign custom textures to styles in shared environments You can store custom texture . Note You can also store custom bump maps and reflection files in the surfaces library in the Autodesk Inventor Studio environment.bmp images to this folder. Note All . Example Note The CAD administrator performs these tasks. add an entry named Textures that points to [shared network folder]:\Inventor\Styles\. It displays after editing the project editor pane as: Textures . 3. Create a second project file which provides a read-only Styles library. Distribute the read-only Styles library project file to the users. In the Project Editor. create a subfolder named Textures. 1. Refer to: Working with custom bump maps and reflection files in a shared environment. accessed from the Styles Editor.bmp files in the Styles library. Step 1: Create a project file specifically for editing and defining styles. For example: [shared network folder]:\Inventor\Styles\.

Select the color style you want to assign a custom texture to. click Manage tab Styles Editor. Save the project file. 2.9 to assign custom textures to other color styles. Step 2: Assign a custom texture to a color style. 1. 6. Open a new or existing . 6.ipt part file. its subfolders and the texture files come with it. On the ribbon. Select a texture. Repeat steps 5 . Click Color to display the current color styles.\. Set the Folder Options. Select the Project Library option and select the textures folder. 4. Styles and Standards panel 3. Styles Library path to . Note If you relocate the styles library folder. 5. 8. . For this example select Blue. Note: Refer to steps 2 -3 in Step 1. 5. 7. Right-click the edited color style (Blue) and select Save to Styles Library. Click Choose to assign a custom texture to the Blue color style. Set Use Styles Library = Yes.4.

Save and distribute the configured read-only project file to users. 4. In the previous example. . Set the Use Styles Library = Read Only.Step 3: Configure the read-only styles library project file for users. add an entry named Styles that points to the same folder as defined previously. Create a Frequently Used Subfolder named Textures and set it to (for example) [shared network folder] :Inventor\Styles\Textures. Note Enter the path in both places to provide access to the custom textures. the path specified is:[shared network folder]:\Inventor\Styles\. 3. Set the Folder Option Styles Library path to the styles library location defined by the administrator. 1. It displays as Textures: Styles\Textures after you complete the edit step. Open the Project Editor and switch to the project file where the users are going to work.) 5. 2. Under Libraries.

Select an existing sheet metal unfold rule to display its option settings. Location Filter . New . backup KFactor value and bend table tolerances.Sheet Metal Unfold Lists the sheet metal unfolding rules in the active document or global style library (depending on the filter setting of Local or All Styles). Reset . The option selected will determine the options. Save . Specifies unfolding method (linear or bend table) as well as units. Access: Click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor In the browser pane. click Sheet Metal Unfold.show Local Styles or All Styles (from the library) in the browser. Unfold Method Dropdown selection specifies one of three unfold method options. attributes and controls that are displayed as described in the following sections: Linear .Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries > Styles in sheet metal parts Concept Procedure Quick Reference Style and Standard Editor . and then click the sheet metal unfold style name to display the selections and values used while unfolding in the right portion of the dialog. Select the Add to Standard check box to add to the available styles list in the active standard style.return to the previously edited style. Click the expand/collapse “+” to the left of the Sheet Metal Unfold entry in the left-hand portion of the Style and Standard Editor dialog box to display the list of existing rules. You are prompted to save the previous edits.create new styles.save changes to an existing style in the current document.return style values to the saved values. Back .

use to import a material style exported from another document. Done . click to dismiss the Styles and Standard Editor dialog. .after saving changes.Bend Table Custom Equation Import .

Click the browse button to locate and load a . and then click OK. Select the line type to add or SHIFT-select to load multiple line types.lin file.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries > Styles in drawings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Load Line Type (LIN file) Line Type Definition File Available Line Types Displays the location of the . .lin file. Displays the available line types associated with the selected line type.

In the dialog box. Edit Chamfer Note. or bend notes. Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor. Options depend on which note type is selected on the Units tab of the Dimension style dialog box. To override precision and tolerance parameters for an existing hole or chamfer note. click to expand the Dimension style in the browser. Click More to expand the dialog box. click the Notes and Leaders tab. click Precision and Tolerance. or Edit Bend Note. In the Dimension Style window. Hole notes Chamfer notes Bend notes . and then click Precision and Tolerance. In the Styles and Standards Editor.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Styles and Style Libraries > Dimension styles in drawings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Precision and Tolerance Sets the precision and tolerance attributes for hole. Click the More button to expand the dialog box. right-click the note and then select Edit Hole Note. chamfer.

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor Topics in this section Customize work environments in Autodesk Inventor Custom shortcut keys Custom command aliases Dynamic input and command alias behavior .

symbols.Sheet tab Sets the default labels for sheets and sets the colors for elements on sheets in a drawing or template. Sheet3). Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Document Settings. so set a background color that provides good contrast. As a new sheet is added. the label is used with an incremental number (for example. Sets the color of highlighted elements (when the cursor passes over them). Sheet 2. and then click the Sheet tab in the dialog box. Sheet1.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor > Customize work environments in Autodesk Inventor Concept Procedure Quick Reference Document Settings . Sets the default label assigned to new sheets in the drawing browser. Sets the outline color for the sheet. Sheet Sets the background color for the sheet. Click in the box and enter the label. and other elements does not change. Sets the color of selected elements. Default Sheet Label Colors Sheet Outline Highlight Selection . Sets the display colors for elements of the sheet. Click a color button to open the Color dialog box and select the color for the associated element. The color of views.

Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor > Custom shortcut keys Concept Procedure Quick Reference Customize . Options panel Customize. and then click Keyboard Buttons . Access: Ribbon: Tools tab the Keyboard tab.Keyboard tab Add and modify custom command aliases and shortcuts.

which you can use to start commands from the keyboard. In the Categories list. Unassigned Only commands without assigned shortcuts or aliases are displayed in the command box. click Reject or press the Delete or Backspace key. or Unassigned. 5. To discard the new alias. Note To discard an existing alias. In addition to the predefined aliases. Note Autodesk Inventor ships with a set of default multi-character command aliases. In the filter list. Assigned. See Customize . and then click the 2. 3. Select Tools tab Keyboard tab. 1. using any of these methods: Press any single letter or number key (A-Z. Enter the shortcut. click in the Keys column next to the associated command. Assigned Only commands with assigned shortcuts or aliases are displayed in the command box. All All commands are displayed in the command box. Options panel Customize. select All.Keyboard tab for information on how to enable or disable default multi-character command aliases.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor > Custom command aliases Concept Procedure Create custom command aliases Autodesk Inventor has many predefined command aliases. click the command category that you want. to see a list of associated commands and aliases in the command box. which are not loaded by default. click in the Keys column next to the . 0-9). 4. In the command box. you can assign new custom aliases or change the existing definitions. Press any combination of alphanumeric keys.

Continue to assign aliases or click Close to close the dialog box. 7. To assign the alias. Tips for creating and using custom shortcut keys and command alias character sequences . click Accept or press Enter.associated command and press the Delete or Backspace key. 6.

Command Name List of command names associated with assigned aliases and shortcuts Buttons . and customize command aliases and shortcuts.Autodesk Inventor > Work Environment > Customize Autodesk Inventor > Dynamic input and command alias behavior Concept Procedure Quick Reference Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference Execute. view. in the active environment. Click an alias or shortcut in the list to execute the associated command. Access: Keys List of assigned keys in use as command aliases and custom shortcuts.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts Topics in this section 2D sketches 3D sketches Dimensions Constraints Work geometry and work features Part modeling overview Part features Plastic Features iFeatures and iParts Part faces and bodies Solid modeling Part Analysis Construction Environment and Importing Data Sheet Metal Parts .

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches Topics in this section Sketch environment Sketch coordinate system Path sketches Profile sketches Projected geometry Projected loops Attach sketches to new planes (Redefine) Slice graphics to reveal sketch planes Plan and create sketches Sketch blocks Work with sketches Linetype of sketch geometry Sketch properties Splines Sketch points Use text in part sketches Images in sketches .

All operations on sketch geometry. such as dimensioning and constraining. Show Me about the difference between sketched and placed features What is the sketch environment? What is the significance of the Finish Sketch command? Why are empty sketch icons placed in the browser? How many ways can I make a sketch? .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Sketch environment All sketch geometry is created and edited in the sketch environment. take place when the sketch environment is active.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Sketch coordinate system Concept Procedure Set the sketch grid You can control the spacing and number of grid lines or turn off the sketch grid. The sketch grid is aligned with the sketch plane for the coordinate system. Moving or rotating the coordinate system origin reorients the sketch grid. To set the spacing and number of grid lines To display or hide the sketch grid Tip When a sketch command like Line is active. . Clear the check mark to sketch without grid snap or reselect to snap to the specified grid settings. right-click to turn Snap to Grid on and off.

click the drop-down menu in the Measure distance dialog box. and then select Add to Accumulate. When you are done making your selection and want to view the total length of the selected line segments. Select one line segment. Continue this selection method for each line segment you want included in the total. Click the drop-down menu in the Measure distance dialog box again. . On the ribbon. Select the next line segment to measure. Select the next line segment. click the drop-down menu on Measure distance dialog box. and then select Add to Accumulate. and then select Add to Accumulate. 3. Click the drop-down menu on the Measure distance dialog box again.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Path sketches Concept Procedure Measure 2D open profiles Use Measure distance to measure multiple segments and add their lengths together by following a series of repeated actions. Note Restart clears the current selection set so you can add to the measured lengths. 4. click Tools tab Sketch mode. 5. and select Restart. click the drop-down menu on the Measure distance dialog box. and select Display Accumulate. 6. Measure panel Distance in the 2. click the drop-down menu again. 1. and select Restart.

Sweep. 1. A profile may be a single loop. select the feature in the browser. When finished with changes. or Loft). Note To resize the profile sketch or redefine values in the feature. Select one or more loops. All loops selected in a single operation are one profile. 2. or islands. Right-click and choose Edit Sketch or Edit Feature from the menu. Profile sketches are required to create Extrude. click Update. . You can sketch on a planar face and select one or more loops as the profile. Sweep. Revolve. Sketch one or more loops. click a sketched feature command (Extrude. hold down Ctrl and click a profile. and Coil features. Revolve. intersecting loops. To remove a profile from the selection set.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Profile sketches Concept Procedure Create a profile sketch Use any closed 2D sketch (including model edges) as a profile for a feature. Loft. On the Model tab. multiple loops. 3.

or sketch geometry from another sketch onto the active sketch plane.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Projected geometry Concept Procedure Quick Reference Projected geometry Creates reference geometry by projecting model geometry (edges and vertices). Project geometry Project cut edges Project flat pattern . When the geometry is changed to normal. it no longer updates with the parent geometry and can be edited independently. projected edges. work features. loops. The projected geometry is not associative and do not update if the parent geometry moves or resizes. In an assembly. loops. and vertices update when the originating geometry changes. As reference geometry. when the edges would intersect the sketch plane. Reference geometry can be used to constrain other sketch geometry or used directly in a profile or path sketch. project edges of a selected component cut by an assembly section onto the sketch plane. You can right-click on the reference geometry and select Break Link to change the reference geometry to normal.

you can project loops from an existing part to the sketch of the new part. . On the ribbon. The projected geometry is associative to the parent part and a Reference symbol is nested beneath the sketch symbol in the browser. A projected loop places a Projected Loop entry in the browser under the Sketch symbol. click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Geometry. 1.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Projected loops Concept Procedure Project loops onto the sketch plane The Project Geometry command selects edges and loops or all loops on a face and projects them onto a sketch plane. You can select edges. circle. click the loop you want to project. When the Select Other tool displays. Continue to cycle through selections until the geometry you need is highlighted. or ellipse. cycle through geometry until the loop highlights. a face may be highlighted because there are several possible selections. A projected loop entry is nested below the sketch in the browser. loops. such as a part face. Note When creating a part in an assembly. In the graphics window. When there is more than one loop selection possible. Note When the geometry is a closed spline. 3. or a face. the Select Other tool cycles through and highlights each. and then select it. Create a sketch on or offset from the geometry you want to project. 2.

Show Me how to move sketch geometry to a different face If the sketch is constrained or dimensioned to the plane on which it originated. 1. the constrained geometry is included when the sketch is moved to a different plane. . You can delete extraneous geometry as needed. 2. Click the face or plane on which to attach the sketch. select the sketch you want to attach to a face or plane. and then use constraints and dimensions to position it and modify its size as needed. In the browser. 3.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Attach sketches to new planes (Redefine) Concept Procedure Attach a sketch to a different plane (Redefine) Use Redefine in a part or an assembly file to move an existing sketch to a different planar face or work plane than the one on which it originated. Right-click and select Redefine.

The model is sliced at the sketch plane. 2. right-click and select Slice Graphics or click Finish Sketch to end the sketch. Rotate the model so that the portion you want to slice away faces you. To reactivate an existing sketch. double-click a sketch icon in the browser. you can temporarily slice away the portion of the model facing you to reveal the sketch plane. For an active sketch. . 1. Click Model tab Sketch panel Create 2D Sketch and select a planar face or work plane on which to sketch. To restore the sliced graphics. Its boundaries are shown in wireframe. Use sketch commands on the Sketch tab to create geometry on the sketch plane. 5. 3.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Slice graphics to reveal sketch planes Concept Procedure Slice graphics The plane you want to sketch on is often obscured by geometry or hidden inside a part model. Right-click and select Slice Graphics or press F7 (the shortcut key for Slice Graphics). 4.

Two Point rectangle A rectangle created by clicking two points (diagonal corners) to set length and width. A three-point rectangle can have any alignment. then click the command for the Rectangle type.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Plan and create sketches Concept Procedure Quick Reference Rectangles Creates rectangles defined by diagonal corners or three points. Access: On the Sketch tab. The third point sets the length of the adjacent side. click the down arrow below the Rectangle command. . Two Point rectangles are aligned with the sketch coordinate system. Three Point rectangle A rectangle whose length and width is created by specifying three points. Draw panel. First and second points set the length and direction of the first side.

Input or modify the sketch block name. Input or modify the sketch block description. 1.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Sketch blocks Concept Procedure Quick Reference Block properties Modifies the sketch block Insert Point. Access: The dialog is accessed when editing a sketch block. name or description. Select Visibility to display the insert point. Insert Point Block Name Description Click Select to modify the sketch block insert point. . Select a sketch block. Right-click and select Block Properties. Note Geometry cannot be selected and you must right-click off geometry to see the Block Properties option. right-click and choose Edit Block. 2. Available when editing a sketch block.

If not selected. geometric constraints. Select the check box to apply endpoint constraints automatically or clear the check box to constrain endpoints manually. Select the check box to fully constrain the sketch automatically or clear the check box to constrain the sketch manually. and select Paste Options. Specifies preferences for units. Specify Units changes the scale using new units. Import File Units Constrain End Points Apply geometric constraints AutoCAD Blocks to Inventor Blocks . Paste Options is available only if AutoCAD data is on the clipboard. AutoCAD block is pasted as primitive geometry. Select to paste AutoCAD block as an Inventor sketch block. Detected Units uses the units specified in the AutoCAD file. and blocks. endpoint constraints. Specifies if the copied data uses original units or specified units.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Work with sketches Concept Procedure Quick Reference Paste Options Pastes copied AutoCAD data from the clipboard to an Autodesk Inventor 2D sketch. Access: On the ribbon. Right-click in the sketch. click Model tab Sketch panel Create 2D Sketch. Click the arrow to select from the list.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Linetype of sketch geometry Concept Procedure Change the linetypes of sketch geometry Use the Construction command to change the linetype of sketch geometry. Click the icon before or after you create geometry. Change linetype before creating sketch geometry Change linetype after creating sketch geometry .

00. click Load at the bottom of the Select Line Type dialog box. Displays the line color of the selected sketch geometry and provides a pull-down list of available color selections so that you can change the setting. For example. The Other option at the bottom of the pull-down list opens the Select Line Type dialog box. For more information. Short line segments that cannot display one full line type pattern are displayed as continuous. When the check box is selected. The default scale is 1. The default line color is the color scheme set in the Applications Options dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Sketch properties Concept Procedure Quick Reference Geometry Properties The Geometry Properties dialog box displays or changes the line color. Note To load an AutoCAD . The default line type is Continuous. enabling you to add other line types to the selection list. two repetitions of the pattern in the line type definition are displayed for each unit. The smaller the scale.05.lin file. with a setting of . You can use a smaller line type scale for lines that are too short to display even one dash sequence. Access: Right-click selected geometry in the graphics area and select Properties from the context menu. enables you to view or change the line type scale. Line Color Line Type Scale . and line weight of selected sketch geometry. line type scale. enabling you to choose another basic color or create a custom color to add to the selection list. Displays the line type of the selected geometry and provides a pull-down list of available line type selections so that you can change the setting. the more repetitions of the pattern are generated per unit. Colors tab. see Load Line Type (LIN file). The Select option from the pull-down list opens the Color dialog box . line type.

To specify how line weights display on the screen. whichever unit is set in the Document Settings dialog box. . Units tab. The default line weight is 0.25 mm.Sketch tab.Line Weight Displays the line weight of the selected geometry and provides a pull-down list of available line thicknesses. The line weight value represents the actual thickness of the line on paper.010 in or 0. see Document settings .

right-click and select Setup Curvature Display from the context menu. and shorter spines indicate lower curvature. . Comb Density Specifies the spacing between spines. circle. Longer spines indicate areas of higher curvature. The curvature comb plot shows curvature with a series of connected spines radiating outward from the curve. Access: Select one or more sketched curves (spline.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches > Splines Concept Procedure Quick Reference Curvature Settings Provides a visual analysis of the curvature and overall smoothness. The relative length of the curve is equal to the curvature of the curve at the point where the spine originates. or ellipse) in the graphics window that have curvature displayed. Comb Scale Specifies the scale (length) of the spines. Definition Sets appearance of analysis results along each curve and edge of the selected geometry.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Sketch points
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Import Points: File Open Options Options to connect imported points can be set. Choose to import points without connections, import points connected with lines, or import points connected with a spline. For 3D sketches in which the points are connected by lines, tangent corner bends can be created automatically if Auto-bend with 3D line creation is selected on the Tools tab Options panel Application Options Sketch tab.

Access:

Ribbon: Sketch tab Insert panel dialog box, click Options.

Points

. In the Open

Select the appropriate connectivity option and click OK. Click Cancel to exit without saving the change. Create points Create lines Create spline Import points only. Import points and connect them with lines. Import points and connect them with a spline.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Use text in part sketches
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Geometry-Text Use Geometry-Text to create and align text to sketch geometry. Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Draw panel Geometry Text

Geometry Text Orientation and Format Font attributes Zoom buttons

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 2D sketches >

Images in sketches
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Image properties Rotates or mirrors artwork added to a sketch and sets transparency mask. Access: Right-click an image, and then select Properties. Rotates image left or right or mirrors image vertically or horizontally. Select Use Mask check box to make the image transparent. Transparency color is the color of the lower right pixel of the image. Clear the check box to make the image opaque.

Orientation Transparency

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

3D sketches
Topics in this section 3D sketch environment

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > 3D sketches >

3D sketch environment
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Silhouette Curve

Creates an associative 3D curve along the outer boundary of a body as defined by the direction vector. Visualize a beam of light cast on the object along the direction vector. The silhouette curve is generated where the light drops off and the shadow begins. A primary use of the silhouette curve command is to determine a natural parting line. Access: Body Direction Ribbon: 3D Sketch tab Silhouette Curve Draw panel

Selects the solid body to receive the curve geometry. Selects the work plane, planar face, edge, or axis to define the vector direction.

Note To break the associativity, expand the 3d Sketch in the browser. Select the

Silhouette Curve nested under the sketch, and select Break Link from the context menu.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Dimensions
Topics in this section Parametric dimensions Part dimension tolerances and properties

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Dimensions >

Parametric dimensions
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Dimension properties - Document settings tab Changes settings that originate on the Units tab and Default Tolerances tab of the Document Settings dialog box. Settings affect all dimensions in the current document. Access: In the browser, right-click a feature and select Edit Sketch or Show Dimensions. Right-click a dimension, select Dimension Properties, and click the Document Settings tab. Or, right-click in a sketch and select Dimension Display.

Modeling Dimension Display Linear Dimension Display Precision Angular Dimension Display Precision Use Standard Tolerancing Values Export Standard Tolerance Values

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Dimensions >

Part dimension tolerances and properties
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Dimension properties - Dimension settings tab Overrides an individual dimension setting or tolerance type and immediately updates the values on the screen. Access: In the browser, right-click a feature and select Edit Sketch or Show Dimensions. Right-click a dimension, select Dimension Properties, and click the Dimension Settings tab.

Settings Tolerance Evaluated size

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Constraints
Topics in this section Introducing constraints Plan constraints Constrain sketches

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Constraints >

Introducing constraints

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Constraints >

Plan constraints
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Constraint Options Selects constraints and reference geometry available for inference. Access: In a sketch when no command is active, select Constraint Options from the right-click context menu.

Selects the constraints to be inferred. Selects (scopes) the geometry to which the constraints are inferred. The scoped geometry is shaded differently after the dialog box is closed, unless all geometry is selected. Selection for Constraint Inference Select All Clear All Places a check mark in each active check box. Removes all check marks. No constraints are inferred. Horizontal. The horizontal constraint is inferred. Vertical. The vertical constraint is inferred. Parallel. The parallel constraint is inferred to scoped geometry. Perpendicular. The perpendicular constraint is inferred to scoped geometry.. Intersection. The coincident constraint is inferred at the intersection of scoped curves. Midpoint. The coincident constraint is inferred at the midpoint of scoped lines. On Curve. The coincident constraint is inferred on scoped curves.

Tangent. The tangent constraint is inferred to scoped geometry. Coincident. The coincident constraint is inferred to scoped points.
Note The status of the Constraint Inference command overrides the selections

in the Constraint Options dialog box. If Constraint Inference is not selected, all check boxes in the Options dialog box are unavailable. Scope for Constraint Inference All Geometry Select Infer constraints to all active sketch geometry. Select the sketch geometry to which constraints are inferred.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Constraints >

Constrain sketches
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Tangent constraint

The tangent constraint causes two curves to be tangent to one another, even if they do not physically share a point (in a 2D sketch). Tangency is commonly used to constrain an arc to a line. A tangent constraint is required to specify how to end a spline that is tangent to other geometry. In a 3D sketch, a tangent constraint can be applied to a 3D spline that shares an endpoint with other geometry in the 3D sketch, including a model edge.

Access:

Ribbon: Sketch tab

Constrain panel

Tangent

Autodesk Inventor > Parts >

Work geometry and work features
Topics in this section Work feature fundamentals Work planes Work axes Work points 3D Move/Rotate command Adaptive work features Reference geometry Reference planes User Coordinate System (UCS)

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features >

Work feature fundamentals
Concept Procedure

Set visibility of work features

Parts and assembly files contain a default set of work features (planes, axes, and the origin center point) which can be displayed or hidden. In 3D sketch, part and assembly files, you can define work plane, work axes and points. When a part is used in an assembly, its visible work features are visible in the assembly. To work in an uncluttered view, turn off all or some of the work features. To set visibility using the context menu To set work feature visibility in the browser To set visibility using the View menu

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features > Work planes Concept Procedure Quick Reference Work planes In a part. In an assembly. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Work Features panel Plane Tip To understand geometric dependencies. offset from existing faces. a work plane is constrained relative to an existing component. you can create a work plane between two planar faces on separate components. or rotated around an axis or edge. Note Optionally. if necessary. Click a grip handle on one of the workplane corners and drag to resize. For example. right-click a work feature in the browser or the graphics window. you can right-click a work point to highlight the geometry from which it was created. Each work plane has its own internal coordinate system. a work plane is an infinite construction plane that is parametrically attached to a feature. The order in which geometry is selected determines the origin and positive directions of the coordinate system axes. such as a work axis and a work plane. 3-point work plane . In an assembly. A work plane can be used as a sketch plane and dimensioned or constrained to other features or components. In a part. The Work Plane command terminates as soon as the work plane is created. Work planes can be placed at any orientation in space. resize a workplane. Right-click a workplane and clear the check mark from Auto-resize. a work plane can be created in-line while you are using another work feature command. and then select Show Inputs.

.Select: Any three points (endpoints. Work plane through two coplanar edges Select: Two coplanar edges. Positive Y axis is perpendicular to the positive X axis through the third point. Work plane tangent to face through edge Select: A curved face and a linear edge. The positive Y axis is defined from the X axis to the edge. intersections. Result: Positive X axis is directed from first point to second point. Result: The X axis is defined by the line of tangency to the face. in either order. midpoints. Result: The positive X axis is oriented from the intersection of the plane and axis to the point. Work plane normal to axis through point Select: A linear edge or axis and a point. work points). Specify the direction of the positive Y axis. in either order.

Result: The work plane coordinate system is derived from the plane selected.Result: The positive X axis is oriented along the first selected edge. Enter the angle in the edit box and click the check mark to reset at the new angle. in either order. Work plane at angle to face or plane Select: A part face or plane and any edge or line parallel to face. Work plane offset from face Select: A planar face. Result: Creates a work plane angled 90 degrees from the part face or plane. Enter a value in the edit box to specify the offset distance. Click the edge of the face and drag in the direction of the offset. Result: Creates a work plane parallel to the selected face at the specified offset distance. Work plane tangent to curved face and parallel to plane . Work plane parallel to plane through point Select: A planar face or work plane and any point.

Result: The new work plane is normal to the curve and passes through the point. This method can also be used to create a work plane tangent to a face or plane that is normal to a plane. Result: The new work plane is tangent to the cylinder edge. Work plane normal to a curve at a point on the curve Select: A nonlinear edge or sketch curve (arc. or work point on the curve. ellipse. Result: The new work plane coordinate system is derived from the selected plane. edge midpoint. circle. Work plane tangent to a cylinder Select: A construction line with ends coincident with the cylinder axis and edge and the tangent point on the cylinder edge. .plane Select: A curved face and a planar face or work plane. sketch point. or spline) and a vertex. in either order.

Work plane bisecting two parallel planes Select: Two parallel planar faces or work planes. . Result: The new work plane is oriented to the coordinate system and has the same outward normal of the first selected plane.

right-click a work feature in the browser or the graphics window. such as a work axis and a work plane. resize a work axis. a work axis can be created in-line while using another work feature command. you can right-click a work point to highlight the geometry from which it was created. Tip To understand geometric dependencies. A work axis is a construction line of infinite length that is parametrically attached to a part. if necessary. Note If appropriate. Right-click a work axis and clear the check mark from Auto-resize. In an assembly. A sketch line. . Access: Ribbon: Model tab Work Features panel Axis In a part. and then select Show Inputs. Click a grip handle on one of the work axis ends and drag to resize.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features > Work axes Concept Procedure Quick Reference Work axis You can create a work axis on the following types of geometry: A linear edge. A 3D sketch line. The Work Axis command terminates as soon as the work point is created. a work axis is constrained relative to an existing component. For example. A line and plane to create a work axis coincident with the line projected onto the plane along the normal of the plane.

with its positive direction oriented in the direction from the first point to the second point. midpoints. Work axis through two points Select: Two endpoints. intersections. . Result: A work axis is created coincident with the intersection of the planes. Result: A work axis is created through the selected points. Work axis perpendicular to a plane through a point Select: A planar face or work plane and a point.Work axis through a revolved face or feature Select: A revolved face or feature. You cannot select midpoints in an assembly. Result: The work axis created is coincident with the face or feature axis. Work axis along two intersecting planes Select: Two nonparallel work planes or planar faces. or work points.

Work axis coincident with the line endpoint projected onto the plane along the normal to the plane Select: A line projected onto a plane on the normal to the plane.Result: The work axis created is perpendicular to the selected plane. Result: The work axis created is collinear with the selected linear edge. Result: The work axis created is collinear with the selected sketch line. Work axis along a sketch line Select: A sketch line. Result: The work axis created is collinear with the selected 3D sketch line. . Work axis along a 3D sketch line Select: A 3D sketch line. through the point. Work axis along a linear edge Select: A linear edge.

.Result: The work axis created is coincident with the line endpoint projected onto the plane.

The Point command terminates as soon as the work point is created. . construction geometry. In an assembly file. When Loop Select Mode is active. click Model Work Features and then click Point or Grounded Point. In a part file. Work points can be placed on holes and cuts in part faces. model surfaces. click Model Work Features Point.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features > Work points Concept Procedure Quick Reference Work points A work point is a parametric construction point that can be placed on part geometry. and then select Show Inputs. Access: In a 3D sketch. Tip To understand geometric dependencies. construction surfaces. a work point cannot be created on the midpoint of a line. and base surfaces. or in 3D space. In a part. In an assembly. For example. click Model Work Features and then click Point or Grounded Point. such as a work axis and a work plane. right-click a work feature in the browser or the graphics window. you can place a work point on any closed loop. an ungrounded work point can be created in-line while using another work feature command. you can right-click a work point to highlight the geometry from which it was created.

Work point on a 2D or 3D sketch point Select a sketch point in either a 2D or 3D sketch. .Work point at intersection of three planes Select three work planes or planar faces. Work point on a midpoint Select a midpoint of an edge. and work axes. Work point at the intersection of two lines Select any combination of two lines including linear edges. 2D or 3D sketch lines. Work point on a vertex Select any endpoint of a line or edge.

Work point on intersection of a plane. . work axis. Work point on intersection of a plane and curve Select a planar face or work plane and a sketch curve (arc. circle. or spline). Work point on intersection of a surface and line Select a surface and a sketch line. ellipse. straight edge. Work point on a grounded work point Select a grounded work point. or work axis. or line Select a planar face or work plane and a work axis or line.

Click the triad to show dialog box. Express values as numeric values. and then click a vertex. When a plane on the triad is selected. drag or enter values in the selected plane. Movement is controlled by the selected area of the triad. When a triad axis is selected. axial move or rotate. select Model tab Work Features panel Grounded Point. When the triad sphere is selected. right-click and select Triad Move. you cannot drag the triad because it is not in the active view plane. Select triad segment Values are relative to the selected geometry. or work point. or entering values along X. parameters. In the graphics window. or expressions. drag or enter an angle. Y. and select Move Feature. Y. or Z axes. free movement. sketch point. Y. right-click a feature. edge midpoint.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features > 3D Move/Rotate command Concept Quick Reference 3D Move or Rotate Interactively positions grounded work points by dragging the triad in a planar move. Access: On the ribbon. After you enter coordinates in the dialog box. Y. drag or enter a value in the corresponding axis area. Move along X. or Z axis Rotate around X. Move in plane . and Z axes. or Z axis Unrestricted movement When a triad arrowhead is selected. drag in the active view plane or enter values in X. In the Part browser.

Y. or sketch point to reposition. Redefine alignment or position Activates the X. and click an edge. or sketch line. work axis. You can enter new coordinates to redefine the triad alignment or position. Move the 3D triad: Click a triad axis.Move triad only Select to move the triad only. either by clicking with the cursor or to apply entered coordinates. edge midpoint. Clear the check mark to move the triad and the work point or feature together. Click a triad plane. and Z edit boxes. Undo reverses the last placed point and moves the triad to the previous position. Show Me how to create a grounded work point Show Me how to redefine the alignment or position of the 3D Move/Rotate tool . and click a face or work plane. Click the triad sphere. and click a vertex. The triad moves to the newly entered coordinates. A grounded work point is placed each time you click Apply. The work point or feature position is unchanged. Apply places a grounded work point at the position of the triad. work point.

Create in-line work features. planes. Click Options to access the Application Options dialog box. and axes) to position a part created in-place in an assembly. . and then select Create Axis or Create Plane. click the Point command. right-click. Convert a nonadaptive work feature to an adaptive work feature Use geometry on another component as the origin of a work feature Note Optionally. Click the Part tab.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features > Adaptive work features Concept Procedure Create adaptive work features Use adaptive work features to model relationships between geometric features and assembly components. For example. Continue to right-click and create work features until the work point is created. use these tips to create adaptive work features: Hide work features when they are consumed by another work feature. Select the Auto-hide In-line Work Features option. Use adaptive work features as construction geometry (points.

For example. vertices. You can use reference geometry in a profile or path sketch or to constrain other sketch geometry. or work features of another sketch onto the active sketch plane. Reference geometry refers to (is associated with) previously created geometry. How is reference geometry created? What is the difference between sketched curves and reference geometry? What happens to reference geometry if the feature on which it depends is edited or deleted? .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features > Reference geometry Reference geometry is sketch curves or points created by projecting the model edges. you can use a reference edge as one segment of a profile or as the termination point for other sketch curves.

. Note Click the Sketch command. Display reference planes to help you construct features with precision. right-click in the graphics window and click Home View. hover over an edge to show the Move symbol. 3. click the plus sign beside Origin. In the browser. 2. then drag an edge. Optionally. Select a reference plane to display. hover over a corner to show the Resize symbol. To view reference planes. To position sketches relative to the part origin.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features > Reference planes Concept Procedure Display a reference plane Each new file has default work planes that intersect at the origin of the xyz coordinates. click Sketch Draw and use the Project Geometry command to project the center point onto the sketch plane. and then click a reference plane to set it as the sketch plane. do one of the following: To resize a reference plane. then drag a corner. To move a reference plane. A hidden center point exists at the intersection of the reference planes. 1. then right-click and select Visibility from the menu.

and a center point). click Tools Document Settings Modeling tab in the dialog box. Select the default 2D sketch plane. UCS (User Coordinate System) is a collection of work features (three workplanes. when UCS triad is selected as an input. UCS name is generated from this prefix and a numeric index. Select the visibility of UCS objects. Settings apply to newly inserted UCS. Naming prefix Default plane Sets the UCS prefix. Access: In a part or assembly document. three axes. But unlike Origin.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Work geometry and work features > User Coordinate System (UCS) Concept Procedure Quick Reference UCS Settings Set the UCS preferences such as UCS prefix in the browser or the UCS visibility in the graphics window. Affects behavior of 2D Sketch. there can be multiple UCS in a document. and Look At commands. and you can place and orient them differently. Visibility . Click Settings in the User Coordinate System area.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview Topics in this section Part modeling environment Multi-body parts Part browser Part templates Work with parts .

. Open a part file. On the ribbon. you can continue working without incorporating edits to geometry until you click Update. You must be working in a part file: 1. click Manage tab Update panel Rebuild All. If the Defer Update option is selected (on Assembly tab of the Application Options dialog box). 2. Autodesk Inventor regenerates the entire file.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview > Part modeling environment Concept Procedure Rebuild all part geometry To be certain you have incorporated edits to all geometry in a part file. the Update command regenerates only the geometry that has significant edits held in memory. By contrast. use Rebuild All. even if some geometry did not require an update.

and calculate the mass for each body. import a finished industrial design surface set and use stitch to create a solid model. define a separate color. . When you complete the design. You can control visibility.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview > Multi-body parts Concept Procedure Create multi-body parts A multi-body part is a top down workflow which allows you to create and position multiple solid bodies within a single part document. A top down workflow eliminates the need for complex file relationships and projecting edges between parts. Add features. Create a model representing the exterior shape of the finished part or. such as fillets and shell. To create a multi-body part: 1. as required to complete the exterior of the part. This technique is especially useful for designing plastic parts. you can export the individual solid bodies as part files directly into an assembly. 2.

Use Combine to perform a Join. 4. Use the Make Part or Make Component command to save the individual solids as derived part files linked to the master part design. grills. 9. Use sketch based modeling commands such as Extrude and Revolve to create new bodies in place. 7. . lips. or surfaces to split the part into separate bodies. Note Different bodies can share the same feature such as a fillet or a hole. or Intersect operation between solids. Use Move Bodies to accurately position the bodies in the part file. Add additional features such as holes. 8. Use Derive to insert components into the part file as bodies. 6. 5. and bosses to each body as required. Cut. 2D sketche geometry.3. Use work planes.

click item to select. Access: In a part file. and provides alternate access to functions in the context menu. filters contents. then right-click to display the context menu. manages access to feature and sketch editing.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview > Part browser Concept Quick Reference Part browser Shows and hides selected features. Filters Context menu options .

Define commonly used parameters or link to a spreadsheet of parameters. using an existing template. 6.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview > Part templates Concept Procedure Create part templates 1. change the grid setting and the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate the average part size. A part file automatically becomes a template when it is saved to the Templates folder. Set the properties for the file. sketches. 5. If needed. Save the file in the Autodesk\Autodesk Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a subfolder of Templates. Create any work features. rename it to save the original file. Create a part. 3.ipt name.ipt in the Templates folder is the default part template. Set the default units of measurement. 7. Note The file standard. 2. or geometry to include in every new part file. 4. and then save the new file with the standard. . To replace the default template.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part modeling overview > Work with parts Use these tips to help create parts and troubleshoot design issues: Copy one or more parts in an assembly Replay the steps used to create a part Create two parts from a split part Select geometry in the browser to realign the model view Create a thin part with a decal to span assembly components .

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features Topics in this section Features and feature termination Create features Placed features Adaptive features. parts. and subassemblies Shared sketches and features Deleted features Mirrored features Arrange features in patterns .

Extrude and Revolve features Hole features Feature Color . right-click. and select Properties. Access: Click the feature in the browser.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Features and feature termination Concept Procedure Quick Reference Feature properties Controls the adaptive status of individual properties for sketched features and overrides the part color for specified features.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features Concept Procedure Bend a part Create a boundary patch feature Create a chamfer feature Create a coil feature Create an extruded feature Add draft to part faces Create a fillet feature Create a hole feature Modify hole dimensions Create a loft feature Create a revolved feature Create ribs and webs Create a shell feature Create a sweep feature Measure 2D open paths in sweeps Thread a hole or cylindrical shaft Edit the thread data spreadsheet Add a new thread type or clearance hole type .

Flips the side of the part to bend. and the angle defines the position of the two sides. Allows creation of a Bend Part feature by specifying a value for Angle and a value for Radius. you can specify the side of the part to bend. The Radius defines the size of the bend curve between the two sides. Access: Bend Line Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Bend Part The tangency line at which the existing part transitions into the bend feature's deformation area. The line about which the feature hinges or folds. or arc length. The Radius defines the size of the bend curve between the two sides. After you define the tangency location of the bend using a bend line. radius. Flips the direction of the bend up or down. Allows creation of a Bend Part feature by specifying a value for Arc Length and a value for Angle. the direction of the bend.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Bend features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Bend Part Use Bend Part to bend a portion of a part. Selecting one of the available combinations from the drop-down list alters the dialog box fields to allow appropriate inputs. The Arc Length defines the length of the curve. and the Arc Length defines the length of the curve. The Bend Part feature is defined by using one of three input combinations. and its angle. Allows creation of a Bend Part feature by specifying a value for Arc Length and a value for Radius. Radius + Angle Radius + Arc Length Arc Length + Angle Side Direction . and the angle defines the position of the two sides.

use the Bend Minimum option to specify which portions are to be bent.Bend Minimum When the Bend Line intersects multiple portions of the part body. .

Contact (G0) Tangent (G1) Condition Note You cannot apply tangent boundary conditions to selected sketches or edges that have two adjacent faces. Click the arrow to select an edge condition.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Boundary patch features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Boundary Patch Creates a boundary patch feature by generating a planar or 3D surface within the specified boundary. a chain of tangent continuous edges. all selected surface edges that are tangent or continuous with the previous item are merged. Note Because continuous edges must have the same edge condition. . It also specifies the edge condition to apply to each edge of the boundary patch. you can select the next boundary. Once the boundary selection represents a closed region. or a mixture of both to specify a closed region. Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Boundary Patch Boundary Specifies the boundary of the patch. Select a closed 2D sketch. Lists the name for the selected edge and the number of edges in the selection set.

For chamfers created in the assembly environment. Access: Method Edges and Faces Distance and Angle Edge Chain and Setback Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Chamfer . All chamfers created in a single operation are one feature.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Chamfer features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Chamfer Adds a chamfer on one or more part edges. You specify the corner appearance and select edges individually or as part of a chain. the geometry selected can be from multiple parts.

Used to create coil springs and threads on cylindrical surfaces.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Coil features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Coil Creates a helix-based feature or body. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Coil Coil shape Coil size Coil ends .

extrusion extent. Feature shape is controlled by sketch shape. extrusions are often used to cut through parts. and taper angle. In assemblies. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Extrude Selection Output Operation Extents Match Shape More tab .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Extruded features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Extrude Creates a feature or body by adding depth to a sketched profile.

Fixed Edge creates draft about one or multiple tangent contiguous fixed edges per face. edge. or axis to select. a vector displays normal to a highlighted face or along a highlighted edge. Note Press Ctrl and click near the edge of a selected face or edge to remove from the selection set. The pull direction is normal to the selected face or plane. Click Flip Direction to reverse pull direction. the draft can both add and remove material. . The draft angle is calculated from a fixed or tangent edge. Pull Direction or Fixed Plane is set by the draft type. Result creates additional faces. Creates draft about a fixed plane. Fixed Plane selects a planar face or a workplane and determines the pull direction. work plane. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Draft Draft Type selects Fixed Edge or Fixed Plane draft. Select edges separately to angle each separately.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Face draft features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Face draft Applies draft to specified faces of a feature. Fixed plane specifies the planar face or work plane from which the selected faces are drafted and sets the pull direction perpendicular to the plane. Pull direction indicates direction in which a mold is pulled from a part. or a work plane. a fixed face of an existing feature. When the vector displays. Depending on the position of the fixed plane. click a planar face. Selections set pull direction or fixed plane and faces or edges to draft. The planar part face or work plane determines which selected faces are drafted. As you move the cursor in the graphics window.

Click the top edge to fix it and move the bottom edge with the taper. Draft Angle Sets the angle of the draft. Faces selects the faces or edges to which draft is applied. Click the bottom edge to fix it and move the top edge with the taper. . Click again to select an edge of a selected face.Flip Direction reverses the pull-direction arrow. As you move the cursor over a face. a symbol indicates the fixed edge for the draft and how the draft is applied. Enter a positive or negative angle or choose a calculation method from the list.

Full round fillets can be used to cap or round exterior part features. You can create constant-radius and variable-radius fillets. tangent (G1) or smooth (G2) continuity can be applied to adjacent faces. For edge fillets. . such as ribs. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Fillet Edge fillets Adds fillets or rounds to one or more edges of a part. fillets of different sizes.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Fillet features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Fillet feature Adds fillets or rounds to one or more edges of a part. or between three adjacent face sets. Face Full round fillets Adds variable-radius fillets or rounds that are tangent to three adjacent faces. All fillets and rounds created in a single operation become a single feature. which need not share an edge. between two face sets. Constant tab Variable tab Setbacks Face fillets Adds fillets or rounds between two selected face sets. The center face set is replaced by the variable-radius fillet. and fillets of different continuity (Tangent or Smooth G2) in a single operation.

.Full round (More) Preview provides a preview of the fillet based on the current selections.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Hole features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Hole Dimensions Displays and sets hole dimensions. Key in the value or click the arrow to do one of the following: Select a value. Show Dimensions. Sets the value for the hole depth. Use the Measure command. Counterbore Diameter Hole Depth Counterbore Depth . Hole Diameter Sets the value for the hole diameter. Sets the value for the counterbore or countersink diameter. Access: Right-click the hole feature in the model browser and select Show Dimensions. Set tolerances in the Tolerance dialog box. Double-click the dimension. Sets the value for the counterbore or spot face depth.

the position can only be controlled by editing the value in the dialog box. without altering the area loft. Access: On the Model tab. you can place a dimension halfway (8 inches). or right-click the point created by Area Loft. Absolute Distance Driving Section Driven Section Driving sections allow control of section position and size. and the location of placed sections. Sections are placed with respect to the length of centerline. Proportional Distance Dimensions are relative along the length of the centerline. Driven sections provide feedback on section size. For example. Double-click an existing point created by the Area Loft command. Driven Sections allow control only of position.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Loft features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Section Dimensions Use the Section Dimensions dialog box to control the area/scale of placed and selected sections. and select Edit from the context menu. Create panel. if the centerline is 16 inches. After initial section placement. click Loft. Section Position Specifies the position of the placed section. Dimensions are placed along the absolute distance of the centerline. .

Dimensions are relative along the length of the centerline. Section Size Allows 2 methods of sizing placed sections Area Scales section to match specified area value. Scales section to match specified scale factor.control only of position. Scale Factor .

Access: Shape Output Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Revolve Operation Extents Match Shape Infer iMate .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Revolved features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Revolve Creates a feature or body by revolving one or more sketched profiles around an axis. profiles must be closed loops. Except for surfaces.

the profile is projected a specified distance to define its depth. the profile is projected to the next face. Profile In a single sketch. thin-walled support shapes) using an open profile. By selecting multiple intersecting or nonintersecting sketch geometry in a profile.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Ribs and webs Concept Procedure Quick Reference Ribs and webs Creates ribs (closed. If appropriate. . selects an open profile to define the shape of a rib or web or selects multiple intersecting or nonintersecting profiles to define a rib or web network. you can create a rib network. For webs. For ribs. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Rib Shape Specifies the profile geometry and sets the direction. Direction Controls the direction of the rib or web. the profile can be extended until it intersects geometry. thin-walled support shapes) and webs (open. Hover the cursor over the profile to specify whether the rib extends parallel or perpendicular to the sketch geometry.

Extents Specifies the termination for the rib or web. for ribs and webs (normal to the sketch plane). Extend profile By default. Options Specifies if the profile extends to a face. Finite sets a specific distance for the rib or web termination. . or draft. a symbol in the graphics window shows the fixed edge and direction of taper. To Next terminates the rib or web on the next face.Thickness Specifies the width of the rib or web. if necessary. The taper extends equally in both directions. Enter a value in the box. the profile extends to intersect a face. If taper angle is specified. Taper Sets taper angle. Clear the check box to prevent the profile from extending. Flip applies the thickness on either side of the profile or extends equally on both sides of the profile.

Selected faces can be removed to form a shell opening.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Shell features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Shell Removes material from a part interior. creating a hollow cavity with walls of a specified thickness. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Shell Shell tab More tab (More) .

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Sweep features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sweep Creates a feature or new solid body by sweeping one or more sketch profiles along a selected path. a profile and a path. If using multiple profiles. Hold Ctrl to cancel the selection of . use the Loft command. An additional curve or surface can be selected as a guide rail or guide surface to control profile scale and twist. on intersecting planes. they must exist in the same sketch. Note If multiple profiles in different sketches are required. but must pierce the profile plane. Use open profiles to create only surface sweep features. Use closed profiles to create either solid or surface sweep features. A sweep feature requires a minimum of two unconsumed sketches. Access: Shape Profile Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Sweep Selects one or more profiles of a sketch to sweep along the selected path. The path can be an open or closed loop.

Not available for closed paths. Taper Sets taper angle for sweeps normal to the sketch plane (not available for Parallel). Not available in a part file with only one solid body. Path Selects the trajectory or path along which the profile is swept. All sweep sections maintain the original profile relationship to the path. The path can be an open or closed loop. inner loops have the opposite sign. The guide rail controls scale and twist of the swept profile. Nested Profiles the sign (positive or negative ) of the taper angle is applied to the outer loop of nested profiles. Orientation Path holds the swept profile constant to the sweep path. guide rail sweeps require the selection of an additional curve or rail to control profile scale and twist. Guide Rail selects a guide curve or rail that controls the scaling and twist of the swept . The taper is shown in the solid sweep preview. Positive Angle taper angle increases the section area as the sweep moves away from the start point. Negative Angle taper angle decreases the section area as the sweep moves away from the start point. Path & Guide Rail Creates a sweep feature by sweeping a profile along a path. Hold Ctrl to cancel the selection of profiles. but must pierce the profile plane. Solids Type Specifies the type of sweep to create.features. In a multi-body part file. In addition to the path. Path Creates a sweep feature by sweeping a profile along a path. Parallel holds the swept profile parallel to the original profile. selects the participating solid bodies. Guide Surface sweeps require the additional selection of a surface to control profile twist.

Path & Guide Surface Creates a sweep feature by sweeping a profile along a path and guide surface. Not available in the assembly environment. Profile Scaling specifies how the swept section scales to meet the guide rail. Join Adds the volume created by the sweep feature to another feature or body. None keeps the profile at a constant shape and size as the sweep progresses. This option is not available in the assembly environment. the path should be on or near the guide surface. Surface Operation Specifies whether the sweep joins. but required for all other sweep features. Not available for base features. . For best results. or intersects with another feature or creates a new solid body. the rail controls only profile twist.controls the scaling and twist of the swept profile. The guide rail must pierce the profile plane. The guide surface controls twist of the swept profile. X & Y scales the profile in both the X and Y directions as the sweep progresses. cuts. Solid Creates a solid feature from an open or closed profile. Guide Surface selects a surface whose normal controls the twist of the swept profile about the path. Creates a surface feature from an open or closed profile. X scales the profile in the X direction as the sweep progresses. Using this option. Can be used as a construction surface on which other features terminate or used as a split tool to create a split part. Open profile is not available for base features. Output Specifies if the sweep feature is a solid or surface. Cut Removes the volume created by the sweep feature from another feature or body.

Select to create a new body in a part file with existing solid bodies. provide all the needed input in the dialog box. . and then enable the Preview again. This is the default selection if the sweep is the first solid feature in a part file.Intersect Creates a new feature from the shared volume of the sweep feature and another feature or body. If Preview is enabled and no preview appears in the graphics window. New solid Creates a new solid body. clear the Preview check box. Material not included in the shared volume is deleted. Not available in the assembly environment. Optimize for Single Selection Automatically advances to the next selector once a single selection is made. Preview Provides a solid preview of the sweep based on the current selections. A body can share features with other bodies. Tip To save computation time for complex sweeps. Clear the check box when making multiple selections. Each body is an independent collection of features separate from other bodies. there is a good chance the sweep feature was not created.

Thread data originates on a spreadsheet that you can customize by adding thread types and sizes. or bolts. thread length. Specifies thread location. type. offset. direction. and pitch. class. studs. nominal size.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Thread features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Threads Creates threads in holes or on shafts. Access: Location Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Thread Specification .

5.xls Microsoft Excel file. Each worksheet in the spreadsheet corresponds to a different thread type.xls Microsoft Excel file. Save the file. . Rename the worksheet name (thread type name) and custom thread type name (cell B1/C1). The Clearance. To add a clearance type: We recommend that you use similar rules to add a new clearance type in the Clearance. However. 2.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Create features > Thread data spreadsheet Concept Procedure Add a new thread type or clearance hole type The Thread. Close Autodesk Inventor. Excel is required to add a new thread or clearance type. located in the same folder as the Thread. Note Changes to the Excel file are refreshed on startup. To add a thread type: 1.xls file.xls file has only one format. manages clearance data. Edit cells A1 and D1. The Application Options and/or project settings can affect the spreadsheet file's location. The Clearance. 3.xls file. and add data rows as required. located in the Design Data folder. and open the Thread. Microsoft Excel is not required to create threaded or clearance holes within Autodesk Inventor. provides data for hole and thread commands. Thread types are designated as either Parallel Thread Types or Taper Thread Types. 6.xls file. Copy an existing worksheet of the same type (parallel or taper). Delete most or all of the data rows (row 4 and below). 4.

hole. The standard placed features are shell. optionally with thread. Removes material from an outside edge and can add material to an inside edge. When you create these features. Creates a mirror image across a plane. Hole: Thread: Shell: Rectangular Pattern: Circular Pattern: Mirror Feature: Dialog boxes define values for placed features. face draft. Places a specified hole in a part. Produces a hollow part with a wall thickness you define. Breaks sharp edges. located on the Model tab: Fillet: Chamfer: Places a fillet or round on selected edges. and thread. . chamfer. fillet.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Placed features Placed features are common engineering features that do not require a sketch when you create them with Autodesk Inventor. Creates a circular pattern of features. Creates regular and tapered external and internal threads on cylindrical or conical faces. such as the Hole dialog box in the following illustration. you usually provide only the location and a few dimensions. Creates a rectangular pattern of features. These are some of the commands for placed features.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Adaptive features. the underconstrained features of the adaptive part or subassembly resize to satisfy assembly constraints. and then select Done. and then click to place an occurrence of the component. 1. Right-click. and then click Open. As degrees of freedom are removed. and then select Adaptive. You can need to see the same subassembly with its components in multiple positions in an assembly. 6. 3. start by selecting a part or subassembly whose features are set to be adaptive. Right-click again. 2. If so. Select the location. In an assembly file. 4. turn off adaptive status and then turn on flexible status . 5. . Underconstrained features resize when you constrain them to a fixed assembly component. Click Assemble tab Component panel Place to choose the component to place. Browse to the folder that contains the component. Note A component cannot be both adaptive and flexible at the same time. The Flexible option can now be selected. and subassemblies Concept Procedure Place adaptive components in assemblies You can use an existing part or subassembly to satisfy assembly requirements. select it. Click the Constraint command to add assembly constraints. Position the component relative to other fixed assembly components. parts. The selected component is attached to the cursor. Right-click the adaptive subassembly in the assembly browser and clear the check mark beside Adaptive.

Note The end-of-part marker cannot be rolled back between consumed features without sharing. .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Shared sketches and features Concept Procedure Control surface and work feature consumption For parts. This technique is helpful if you create several work planes. and then select Consume Inputs from the context menu. If you do not want work features and surface features to be consumed. clear the check mark. surface features and work features are automatically consumed by default to communicate feature dependencies. To change the default consumption behavior for all features. right-click the feature in the browser. select the Options to access the Application Options dialog box. each offset from the previous work plane (such as creating sketches for lofted features). such as between an extruded feature and its consumed sketch. Part tab and clear the Auto-Consume Work Features & Surface Features check box. Because automatic consumption can result in unwanted deep nesting of browser nodes. you can change the consumption behavior for all features or for individual features. To override automatic consumption on a per-feature basis.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Deleted features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Delete feature Deletes one or more selected features from the graphics window or the browser. . Use Redefine to re-associate the sketch to another planer face or work plane in the assembly. If applicable. such as chamfers and fillets) In-line work features when you delete a work feature Nested work features when you delete a 3D sketch Colors on the dialog box correspond to the highlight color of the selected geometry in the graphics window. sketched features. consumed sketches and features dependent sketches and features dependent work features Note Grounded work planes are automatically created when you retain a dependent sketch. Access: Right-click and select Delete. Additionally Delete Note If you do not delete the dependent sketches and features. you can also delete consumed sketches and work or surface features. An alert symbol is placed next to the affected sketch and feature entries in the browser. select one or more check boxes to delete geometry with the feature. or dependent work features. The following features are automatically deleted: Dependent placed features (those features without sketches. the retained sketches and features enter the sick state. You can constrain the work planes in the part environment or use the Reattach Sketch command to move the sketches onto other work planes. In the Additionally Delete box. dependent 2D and 3D sketches.

and surface features to mirror. work features. A mirrored feature is a reverse copy of the selected feature. single sheet metal flange and contour flange features defined using multiple edges cannot be mirrored. shell) cannot be mirrored. all rounds. they are automatically selected. use the Mirror the Entire Solid option to mirror a body including features which cannot be mirrored individually. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Pattern panel Mirror Mirror individual features Features Selects solid features.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Mirrored features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Mirrored features Any work plane or planar face can serve as the plane of symmetry to mirror selected features. For parts. Note Certain exceptions exist: in assemblies. The pattern of the body can also include work features and surface features. assembly work features cannot be mirrored. Features based on the results of an intersect operation cannot be mirrored. only sketched features can be mirrored. Mirror Plane . If selected features have dependent features. Features that operate on the entire body (all fillets. Selects a work plane or planar face across which selected features are mirrored. In an assembly. only sketched features can be mirrored.

Mirror the entire solid Include Work\Surface Features Mirror Plane In a part. Selects a work plane or planar face across which selected work features. Removes the original body. selects one or more work or surface features to mirror.Solid In a multi-body part. Use Mirror Component on the Assemble tab. selects the solid body to receive the mirror. and the solid are mirrored. Only the mirrored occurrence remains in the part file. Not available in a single body part file. surface features. Remove Original (More) . You can use this option to model a left-hand and right-hand version of a part. Not available in an assembly.

including their dependent fillets and chamfers. Assembly work features cannot be patterned. All occurrences of a new body in a pattern are individual bodies. splines. The bodies are listed under the pattern feature icon in the browser.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part features > Arrange features in patterns Concept Procedure Quick Reference Rectangular pattern Duplicates one or more features or bodies and arranges the resulting occurrences by a specific count and spacing in a rectangular pattern or along a linear path in one or both directions. or trimmed ellipses. In an assembly. only sketched assembly features can be patterned. Rows and columns can be lines. . but individual occurrences are listed under the pattern feature icon in the browser. Weld features cannot be patterned. You can suppress or restore all occurrences or individual occurrences. arc. and surface features. work features. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Pattern panel Rectangular Pattern individual features Use this option to pattern individual solid features. All occurrences of a feature in a pattern are one feature.

Solid If there are multiple solid bodies in the file. Not available in an assembly. Use this option to pattern the solid as a single unified body. The pattern can also include work features and surface features. work features. Include Work/Surface Features selects one or more work or surface features to pattern. Direction 1 Direction 2 (More) . Create new bodies Creates a pattern consisting of multiple individual solid bodies. Join Attaches the pattern to the selected solid body. Finish features such as fillets and chamfers can be included in a pattern only if their parent feature is also selected. the Solid selection arrow is available. Selects the solid body to receive the pattern. Pattern a solid Use this option to pattern a solid body. Selecting multiple features for duplication in a pattern increases calculation time. and surface features to include in the pattern. Only one body can be selected. Solid is available if the part file contains more than one solid body.Features selects one or more solid features. including features that you cannot pattern individually. Select the body to include in the pattern.

You create and position multiple solid bodies within a single part document. A top-down workflow eliminates the need for complex file relationships and projecting edges between parts. For example. The plastic part commands in Inventor are rules-based tools designed to create complex plastic part features automatically. and calculate the mass for each body. you can export the individual bodies as part files directly into an assembly. Topics in this section Boss features Lip features .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features A multi-body part is a top-down workflow. This technique is especially useful for designing plastic parts. You can control visibility. define a separate color. When you complete the design. Note The plastic part commands are not exclusively for plastic parts. the Rule Fillet command can create fillets on any type of feature based on specified design rules.

Rest features Grill features Snap fit features Rule-based fillet features .

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features > Boss features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Boss . Access: Ribbon: Model tab the Ribs tab. and click Number of stiffening ribs indicates the number of ribs surrounding each Boss. Rib thickness Rib draft Shoulder length .Ribs tab Stiffening ribs are optional. all controls to input the Ribs parameters become active. Plastic Part panel Boss . If the Stiffening Ribs check mark is on.

Shoulder top offset Shoulder radius Shoulder flare angle Rib Fillet options Rib fillet radius on the edges of the rib. .

Flip is active when the Placement is On Point. Use to reverse the direction of the first rib reference axis. the rib start angle is determined by a projected line on a plane that is normal to the Boss direction.Rib blend radius at the intersection between the ribs and the boss. . When Placement is On Point. Start angle is the first rib inclination angle with respect to the sketch X axis (when Placement is On Sketch). Start Direction the selector is active when the Placement is On Point. Use this selector to define the reference direction of the first rib.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Lip Lip/Groove toggle. Determines the type of feature to be either Lip or Groove. Shape Lip Groove .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features > Lip features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Lip Creates a Lip or Groove feature on the thin wall of a part.

The face is then joined to the body by walls of the same thickness. The Rest feature creates a thinwalled face that cuts across a thin-walled target body. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Rest Shape tab More tab .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features > Rest features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Rest Creates a Rest feature using a closed sketch.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features > Grill features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Grill Creates a Grill feature using the various patterns included in one or more 2D sketches. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Grill Boundary Island Ribs Spars Draft .

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Snap Fit Style specification Cantilever Snap Fit Hook style Cantilever Snap Fit Loop style Shape tab Beam tab (Cantilever Snap Hook style) Hook tab (Cantilever Snap Hook style) Clip tab (Cantilever Snap Loop style) Catch tab (Cantilever Snap Loop style) .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features > Snap fit features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Snap fit Creates a Snap fit feature using points of 2D sketches or 3D work points and direction elements.

each row contains one rule and the related source selection set. For example. “all the edges that a given feature generates when intersecting with the body” so such edges are discovered at feature build/update time. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Plastic Part panel Rule Fillet The user interface is organized as a table. The rules have a source selection of entities (features and faces). Source Selection indicator Selection list Radius Rule Convexity options .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Plastic Features > Rule-based fillet features Concept Procedure Quick Reference Rule-based fillet Creates constant radius fillets to the edges matched by rules. Identify edges based on interaction statements.

(More) .

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts Topics in this section iFeature environment iFeature fundamentals Sketches in iFeatures Advanced iFeature placement Add Placement Help to iFeatures iPart Fundamentals iParts in Assemblies .

The specifications correspond exactly to options in the Threads.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts > iFeature environment Concept Procedure Quick Reference Extract iFeature . Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Extract iFeature For iFeatures that contain thread features or threaded holes. Threads definition tree Selected thread variables iFeature table . Add the thread variables to the table that you want to vary. use the Threads tab to specify the thread type in the table. Multiple versions are maintained in an embedded spreadsheet.xls spreadsheet and the Thread feature dialog box. and then set the specifications for each row.Threads tab The Extract iFeature command converts an iFeature to a table-driven iFeature.

Note Feature parameters can also be edited when the feature is placed. size. they can be also edited.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts > iFeature fundamentals Concept Procedure Quick Reference Edit iFeatures Edits parameter names. If the selected feature has geometrically dependent features. and instructions for placement of iFeatures. Environment: Part Access: Ribbon: iFeature tab iFeature panel Edit iFeature Selected Features Size Parameters Position Geometry .

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts > Sketches in iFeatures An iFeature is a sketch or one or more features that can be saved and reused in other designs. You can position an iFeature when placing it in a part file by selecting any sketched line or point. How are iFeature sketches used to specify point position? How are iFeature sketches used as layouts? . and then use the sketch points to position geometry or use the sketch as a layout when creating other features. Create an iFeature from a sketch.

Table-driven iFeatures are identified by a table icon in the left pane of the dialog box. Environment: Part Access: Select Position Size Ribbon: Manage tab Insert panel Insert iFeature Precise position . You can select from listed key parameters to specify a specific instance of the iFeature. position. and size. When you place the iFeature.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts > Advanced iFeature placement Concept Procedure Quick Reference Insert iFeatures Places an iFeature in a part file on a work plane or a planar face. you can modify its orientation. as needed.

If a document is associated with an iFeature. To add a document as placement help To add a Web page as placement help To use placement help when inserting an iFeature . nested under the 3rd Party icon. HTML file. or spreadsheet. You select the document in the browser and designate it as Placement Help. an Information button appears in the Insert iFeature dialog box when you place the iFeature.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts > Add Placement Help to iFeatures Concept Procedure Embed or link a document in an iFeature You can link or embed a document in an iFeature to assist you in placing the iFeature in a part The linked or embedded document. such as a Word document. is shown in the browser as an icon.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts > iPart Fundamentals Concept Procedure Quick Reference Specify Range Specifies a range of values for selected cells or columns when using the iPart Author. or no upper bound). This value must be less than the default or maximum. Default Maximum . enter a value to represent the bottom end of the range. Environment: Part Access Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Create iPart In the table. or no lower bound). default. and then select Specify Range for Column. This value must be greater than the minimum and less than the maximum. Sets minimum. Right-click again. enter a value to represent the top end of the range. and then select Custom Parameter Column. This value must be greater than the default or minimum. If less than or equal. right-click a column. Shows the current value of the parameter. When the iPart is placed. you can enter values within that range. Minimum Click the arrow to select the limit (less than or equal. Click the arrow to select the limit (less than or equal. If less than or equal. and maximum values for a Custom Parameter column.

Parts published from a Custom iPart Factory contain at least one Custom Parameter. Standard iParts cannot be modified. Custom iParts have designated parameters or properties that have values specified at placement time. iAssembly members can be parts.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > iFeatures and iParts > iParts in Assemblies Concept Procedure Quick Reference iPart and iAssembly Placement Places a standard or custom iPart member or an iAssembly member in an assembly. Click to continue to place instances and then right-click and select Done. Click in the graphics window to place the member. iParts. For Custom iParts. enter designated values. Environment: Parts and Assemblies Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Place Browse to the folder where the iPart or iAssembly is located and click Open. or assemblies. Keys tab Tree tab Table tab . Parts published from a Standard iPart Factory have predefined values. You can modify a custom iPart by adding features. In the dialog box. click the Table tab and select the version.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies Topics in this section Split faces. trim and split solids Body properties Combine solid bodies Move Bodies Replace part faces Delete Face Thicken faces and create offset surfaces Finishes and decals on part faces Shape description Construction surfaces .

Note The Trim Solid and Split Solid options are disabled upon selection of 3D curve as a split tool. Access: Method Select Faces Remove Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Split . Also allows selection of 3D curves to split faces. Split Face allows faces on both sides of the split to have draft applied. trims the entire part and removes one of the resulting sides. trim and split solids Concept Procedure Quick Reference Split face or part Splits part faces. or splits a solid into two bodies.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Split faces.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Body properties Concept Procedure Quick Reference Surface body properties Name: Displays the names of the selected bodies. Clear the check box to leave individual color overrides intact. . Strip Overrides: Select the check box to remove color overrides from individual faces contained in the selection. Body Color Style: Select the dropdown list to assign a unique color to the selected bodies.

Access: Select Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Combine Operation . A join adds the volume of the toolbodies to the base. A cut removes the volume of the toolbodies from the base.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Combine solid bodies Concept Procedure Quick Reference Combine solid bodies Joins one or more solid bodies by combining their volume. Intersect modifies the base solid from the shared volume of the selected bodies.

Reverses the positive drag direction. Rotate Axis . Move along ray. or part bodies created using normal modeling commands. or Z offset value. Enter the linear offset value. Activate the value entry box and then select the move preview to free drag the selection. Activate the value entry box and then select the rotational preview to free drag the selection. The bodies may be imported derived components. Free Drag Enter the precise X. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Modify panel Move Bodies Move type Selects Free Drag. Specifies the rotational edge or axis.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Move Bodies Concept Procedure Quick Reference Moving bodies Spatially moves solid bodies any direction in a multi-body part file. Rotate Enter the precise rotational value. Move along ray Direction Specifies the edge or axis to define the linear move direction. or Rotate function. Bodies Selects the individual part bodies to move. Y. Activate a value entry box and then select the move preview to free drag the selection.

Reverses the positive rotation direction. .

The part must completely intersect the new face. .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Replace part faces Concept Procedure Quick Reference Replace faces Replaces one or more part faces with a different face.

the new face is trimmed to match the part face. set of adjacent faces. If necessary. a quilt.Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Replace Face Existing Faces New Faces Selects a single face. or one or more work planes to replace existing faces. Selects a surface. or set of nonadjacent faces to replace. The part extends to intersect the new faces. .

Automatic Face Chain Automatically selects all faces that are continuously tangent to the selected face. . Clear the check box to select individual faces.

or void and automatically converts the part to a surface. . lump. The operation replaces the part icon with a surface icon and adds a Delete Face feature icon in the browser hierarchy.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Delete Face Concept Procedure Quick Reference Delete face or lump Deletes a part face.

depending on selection of individual face or lump. Specifies all faces of the lump are to be deleted.Access: Faces Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Delete Face Selects one or more faces to delete. Specifies that one or more individual faces are to be deleted. Select individual face Select lump .

attempts to heal gaps by extending adjacent faces until they intersect.Heal When individual faces are deleted. Not available for a lump. .

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Thicken/Offset Thicken/Offset tab More tab . or creates a new solid.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Thicken faces and create offset surfaces Concept Procedure Quick Reference Thicken faces and offset surfaces Adds or removes thickness to faces of a part or a quilt. creates an offset surface from a part face or surface.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Finishes and decals on part faces Concept Procedure Emboss a part face Change a face color Use decals on part faces .

Face Color Style .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Finishes and decals on part faces > Finishes on part faces Concept Procedure Quick Reference Face color Specifies the color of selected part faces. all instances update with a changed face color. Access: Click one or more faces in the graphics window. right-click. Changed face color overrides only the base color of features with an applied texture. the feature color for selected faces. In a feature pattern. the face color is applied only to the selected instance. not all instances of the feature. In an assembly with multiple instances of a part. Sets color for the selected face. if applicable. Click the down arrow to list available colors. Overrides the part color and. and then select Properties.

Images can be bitmaps. and warranty seals. Word documents. or Excel spreadsheets.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Finishes and decals on part faces > Creating and using decals Concept Procedure Quick Reference Decal Creates a decal feature by applying an image to a part face to represent manufacturing requirements such as labels. The decal may be applied in a recessed area to provide clearance for another component in an assembly or to prevent damage in packaging. brand name art. logos. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Create panel Decal .

xls files. Image may be resized but retains its aspect ratio. the printable area is selected and retains its native formatting. Selects a face on which to apply the decal. Specifies if the image is wrapped on one or more curved faces. Use dimensions and constraints to position the image on the sketch. or . Face Wrap to Face Chain Faces . In . such as over an edge. Clear the check box to project the image onto one or more faces without wrapping.xls format.Image Selects an image in .doc. Applies the decal to adjacent faces.doc and . .bmp.

Optionally.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Shape description Concept Procedure Quick Reference Extend surface Makes surfaces larger in one or more directions by specifying a distance or a termination plane. Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Extend Edges selects and highlights each face edge of a single surface or quilt for extension. those edges are not automatically added to the extend feature. Note If the boundary of a selected face has additional edges on update. Edge chaining stops when an edge that is not tangent continuous to the selected edge is detected. (More) Extents . Distance default method. Determines the method for ending the extension and sets its depth. Extends edges at a specified distance. Enter a value or drag the direction arrow to extend the surface dynamically. Edge Chain Automatically extends a selected edge to include all edges that are tangent continuous to the selected edge. clear the check box to terminate to the entire body rather than just the selected face. once the termination face is selected. To selects an ending face (of a solid or surface body) or work plane on which to terminate the extension. Click the arrow to select an extent method from the list.

Access: Ribbon: Model tab Surface panel Stitch Selects parametric surfaces to stitch together into a quilt or solid body. The stitch command has a tolerance control that provides an upper limit and helps Autodesk Inventor determine the proper edges to be used for stitching. the stitched surface remains a surface. Select Set as Tolerance. display the minimum gap in Red (meaning that the gap is within tolerance but not fixed). . Maximum Tolerance. Select or enter a value for the maximum allowable tolerance between free edges. Free edge pairs which partially exceed the maximum tolerance. Select a row item and right-click on it to display the context menu.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part faces and bodies > Construction surfaces Concept Procedure Quick Reference Stitch surfaces (Part environment) Stitches surfaces together to form a quilt or solid. Creates a stitch feature that can be edited later. Find Remaining Free Edges. Free edges without pairs display no gap value. Surface edges must be adjacent to stitch successfully. to zoom in on the edge. Free edge pairs display the value of the maximum gap between them. Also used to analyze whether surfaces are suitable for stitching. If not selected. a stitched surface with a valid closed volume is solidified. Displays the free edges that remain after stitching and the maximum gap between them. Stitch tab Surfaces. Surfaces are highlighted in the graphics window as they are selected. If selected. Maintain as surface. Select Find in Window. Selects individual or all surfaces to stitch together into a quilt or analyze. to quickly change the maximum tolerance used in stitching.

Black edges are stitched to an adjacent surface. Note This option has an impact on performance. and are not stitched to an adjacent surface. this option shows near tangent conditions. Maintain as surface Apply Select to maintain closed volume as surfaces.surface remains a surface. When checked. this option identifies surface edges by color to show results of analysis. . Magenta edges have some discontinuity to the adjacent surface (are nearly tangent). If not selected. Red edges are free edges on a surface. a closed volume that results from the stitch operation becomes a solid. These edges can cause failures in subsequent design operations such as creating a shell. Identifies surfaces that have gaps or tolerance errors. When checked. Analyze tab Analyzes selected surfaces and marks surface edges with condition to indicate suitability for stitching into a quilt. Show Edge Conditions. Stitches selected surfaces into a quilt. Show Near Tangent.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Solid modeling Topics in this section Solid modeling environment .

Extending or contracting a base solid does not add a new feature. extends or contracts a base solid along an axis. and select Edit Solid to activate the solids environment. The base solid is resized perpendicular to a selected plane. Then click Edit Base Solid tab Plane Extend or Contract Distance Modify panel Extend/Contract Body.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Solid modeling > Solid modeling environment Concept Procedure Quick Reference Extend or contract body In the solids environment. Access: Right-click the component in the browser. .

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part Analysis Topics in this section Analyses .

and analyzes whether the part exceeds the maximum wall thickness or is less than the minimum wall thickness. similar to Slice Graphics in 2D sketches. Simple Advanced Note If the referenced section plane or planes are moved in a future computation. the update occurs the next time the analysis is visible and active. A corresponding set of cross section graphics is displayed in the graphics window. including wall thickness analysis and area physical property calculations. . Simple provides a cutaway view of the part at a single section plane. The first saved analysis is named CrossSection1 by default. Access: Ribbon: Inspect tab Analysis panel Section Sets or modifies the name of the analysis.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Part Analysis > Analyses Concept Procedure Quick Reference Cross Section Analysis Provides basic or detailed information about the interior of solid parts. the analysis updates immediately if it is visible. If it is not visible. Advanced provides more detailed information about any number of section planes.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data Topics in this section Overview of the Construction Environment Import and use IGES data Import and use STEP data Quality Check of translated data Data groups in the construction environment Surfaces in the construction environment Boundary patches in the construction environment Trim boundaries Stitched surfaces Copy and Move geometry Colors on Parts and Surfaces .

Displays the number of surface entities. Displays the number of surfaces or solids found by the quality check command. Displays the number of solid entities. Depending on the import option. If the IGES or STEP data does not have a layer or group attribute. Note If the imported model does not include a specific data type. Displays the number of wireframe entities. Note To increase system performance in the Part modeling environment. Composites are copied to a Group of the same name. an associated subgroup is not created.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Overview of the Construction Environment Concept Procedure Quick Reference Construction environment browser Use the construction environment browser to display information on imported data in Autodesk Inventor. the data is placed in the default group. Construction folder Group Surfaces Solids Wires Diagnostics . you can edit and repair surfaces or solids (non-parametrically) for use in part modeling. the construction environment browser is displayed in the model browser. You can check the quality of the data. Access: When surfaces and solids are copied to the construction environment. Faces and base surfaces are copied to a new Group. turn off the construction environment folder to prevent the data from being loaded into memory. generates either a group for each layer or each group. Using commands on the Construction tab.

its name may differ from the name of the CAD system which generated the STEP file. To avoid confusion.Note By default. When a STEP file is imported into Autodesk Inventor. Autodesk Inventor applies the part name (file name of the inserted part) to browser file nodes. whereas other CAD systems may apply the part number property. See Assembly Tools for more information about Rename Browser Nodes. use Rename Browser Nodes to specify the browser node naming scheme. .

select Manage tab Insert panel Import. Select the check box to save the assembly and part files in Autodesk Inventor format during the import process. To place into an Autodesk Inventor assembly. 1. Set the Files of type to IGES or STEP. Click Options. Access: To translate to a new Autodesk Inventor file. Save Options . 2. Save Components during Load. select Open. Sets the location for the part and assembly files created from the import operation. as well as a list of the parts and assemblies that were created in Autodesk Inventor.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Import and use IGES data Concept Procedure Quick Reference Import STEP or IGES Options Specifies the import criteria for imported STEP or IGES files. If you choose to Select Save Locations. This workflow is not available for STEP files. select Assemble tab Component panel Place. If Save in Workspace is selected. Component Destination Folder. some import options are not available. This setting is not available when the Import command is used. Specifies the data types to import and how data are grouped in Autodesk Inventor. Choose where to save the components from the drop down menu. A translation report is generated that includes information on the imported data and its quality. Select the IGES or STEP file. To import into an Autodesk Inventor part file. Unavailable options are grayed out. this folder is defined in the Edit Projects panel. the Component Destination Folder and Place Top-level Assembly in Separate Folder become available. 3. Note If you choose to translate a file using the Import command.

Entity Types to Import Solids. Water tight stitched shells are imported as solid bodies. This setting is not available when the Import command is used. Multiple Solid Part to import the assembly as individual solid bodies in the part environment. Single Composite Feature to import the surfaces as a single composite in the part environment. Select to import solid bodies and water tight stitched shells as individual solid bodies. Select to import the assembly as a single part. Data Organization Import Assembly as Single Part. Note Specify file destinations that are included in the active project or add the paths to the project to assure that referenced files resolve when you open a file. Select to import wires. Select to save the top-level assembly file to a location different than the part files. Composites are created for each level. . this folder is defined in the Edit Projects panel. Points. Create Surfaces As. Multiple Composite Features to import the surfaces as multiple composites in the part environment. as defined by the Create From selection. Wires. Choose from: Individual Surface Bodies to import each surface as a single surface body in the part environment. or group. Choose from: Single Composite Feature to import the assembly as a single composite feature in the part environment. Select to import points.Place Top-level Assembly in Separate Folder. Select the surface types to create during the import. Surfaces. Select to import surface bodies. layer. If Save in Workspace is selected.

Add Prefix to Group Names. Specify Levels (Layers) or Groups from which to create Multiple Composite Features or Multiple Construction Groups. if the source file has a group Surfaces1 and you define INV_ as the prefix to add. If the surfaces are stitched into a single quilt or body. For example. Select to separate a multi-solid part into individual solid bodies. the surfaces remain in the Construction . Available when the Create Surface As selection is Multiple Composite Features or Multiple Construction Groups. layer. the translated group becomes INV_Surfaces1. Auto Stitch and Promote. Create From. Select to perform a quality check of the imported data. Converts the imported geometry and parameter values to the selected units. Autodesk Inventor attempts to stitch surfaces into a quilt or solid. Available when the Create Surface As selection is Multiple Composite Features or Multiple Construction Groups. the resulting quilt or body is promoted to the Part environment. as defined by the Create From selection. When selected. Import Multiple Solid Parts as Assembly. Select to add a prefix to the source file group names. Select a Group Name under which to place the imported data. Group Name to Place Data. The group name is shown in the browser. Otherwise. the composite is marked with in the browser and the remaining bodies are not checked. Multiple Construction Groups to import the surfaces as multiple groups in the construction environment. Each body is an individual part in an assembly. Check Parts during Load.Single Construction Group to import the surfaces as a single group in the construction environment. Note This option may significantly increase the amount of time required to translate a file. Units Post Processes Import Units. If a bad data is found. Construction groups are created for each level. or group.

.Otherwise. If selected. See Assembly Tools for more information about the Rename Browser Nodes command. its name might differ from the name of the CAD system which generated the STEP file. To avoid confusion. When a STEP file is imported into Autodesk Inventor. Autodesk Inventor applies the part name (file name of the inserted part) to browser file nodes. use the Rename Browser Nodes command to specify the browser node naming scheme. Enable Advanced Healing. Note By default. the surfaces remain in the Construction environment. Other CAD systems might apply the part number property. slight alterations in the surface geometry are allowed to stitch the surfaces.

select Assemble tab Component panel Place. 1. A translation report is generated that includes information on the imported data and its quality. some import options are not available. Click Options. Note If you choose to translate a file using the Import command. Access: To translate to a new Autodesk Inventor file. Sets the location for the part and assembly files created from the import operation. Select the check box to save the assembly and part files in Autodesk Inventor format during the import process. Select the IGES or STEP file. Specifies the data types to import and how data are grouped in Autodesk Inventor. 2. select Manage tab Insert panel Import. If Save in Workspace is selected. If you choose to Select Save Locations. as well as a list of the parts and assemblies that were created in Autodesk Inventor. Choose where to save the components from the drop down menu. Unavailable options are grayed out. To import into an Autodesk Inventor part file. This workflow is not available for STEP files. select Open. the Component Destination Folder and Place Top-level Assembly in Separate Folder become available. This setting is not available when the Import command is used.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Import and use STEP data Concept Procedure Quick Reference Import STEP or IGES Options Specifies the import criteria for imported STEP or IGES files. 3. Save Components during Load. Save Options . To place into an Autodesk Inventor assembly. this folder is defined in the Edit Projects panel. Set the Files of type to IGES or STEP. Component Destination Folder.

Wires. Entity Types to Import Solids. Select to import wires. Create Surfaces As. Note Specify file destinations that are included in the active project or add the paths to the project to assure that referenced files resolve when you open a file. . Multiple Composite Features to import the surfaces as multiple composites in the part environment. Composites are created for each level. layer. as defined by the Create From selection. Water tight stitched shells are imported as solid bodies. Choose from: Individual Surface Bodies to import each surface as a single surface body in the part environment. This setting is not available when the Import command is used. Points. Surfaces. Single Composite Feature to import the surfaces as a single composite in the part environment. Select to save the top-level assembly file to a location different than the part files. Choose from: Single Composite Feature to import the assembly as a single composite feature in the part environment. Select to import points. Multiple Solid Part to import the assembly as individual solid bodies in the part environment. Data Organization Import Assembly as Single Part. Select to import solid bodies and water tight stitched shells as individual solid bodies. Select to import surface bodies. this folder is defined in the Edit Projects panel. Select to import the assembly as a single part. If Save in Workspace is selected.Place Top-level Assembly in Separate Folder. Select the surface types to create during the import. or group.

Group Name to Place Data. Each body is an individual part in an assembly. Select a Group Name under which to place the imported data. if the source file has a group Surfaces1 and you define INV_ as the prefix to add. Select to perform a quality check of the imported data. as defined by the Create From selection. When selected. Available when the Create Surface As selection is Multiple Composite Features or Multiple Construction Groups. the translated group becomes INV_Surfaces1. layer. Construction groups are created for each level. For example. Note This option may significantly increase the amount of time required to translate a file. Check Parts during Load. Auto Stitch and Promote. Units Post Processes Import Units. the surfaces remain in the Construction .Single Construction Group to import the surfaces as a single group in the construction environment. Select to separate a multi-solid part into individual solid bodies. Select to add a prefix to the source file group names. The group name is shown in the browser. Converts the imported geometry and parameter values to the selected units. Create From. the composite is marked with in the browser and the remaining bodies are not checked. the resulting quilt or body is promoted to the Part environment. Multiple Construction Groups to import the surfaces as multiple groups in the construction environment. Import Multiple Solid Parts as Assembly. Otherwise. If a bad data is found. Add Prefix to Group Names. Autodesk Inventor attempts to stitch surfaces into a quilt or solid. Available when the Create Surface As selection is Multiple Composite Features or Multiple Construction Groups. or group. Specify Levels (Layers) or Groups from which to create Multiple Composite Features or Multiple Construction Groups. If the surfaces are stitched into a single quilt or body.

When a STEP file is imported into Autodesk Inventor. If selected. Other CAD systems might apply the part number property. its name might differ from the name of the CAD system which generated the STEP file. See Assembly Tools for more information about the Rename Browser Nodes command. . Autodesk Inventor applies the part name (file name of the inserted part) to browser file nodes. Enable Advanced Healing. use the Rename Browser Nodes command to specify the browser node naming scheme. slight alterations in the surface geometry are allowed to stitch the surfaces.Otherwise. Note By default. the surfaces remain in the Construction environment. To avoid confusion.

Selected solids or surfaces are checked. or wireframe with an error to locate it in the graphics window. Right-click a group node in the browser. Right-click on a body. and select Quality Check. and select Find in Browser. Right-click and select Quality Check. . Reports errors found and suggests repairs. click and drag a window to select solids or surfaces. To start. and click Select All on the context menu. Known Issues categorizes analyzed data into groups in browser hierarchies: Topology. All data in the construction folder is checked. click Construction tab Manage panel Quality Check. Analyzes data types separately or all at once. do one of the following. Select data in the graphics window. Only data in the group node is checked. error issues are grouped. Right-click the construction folder. Wireframes are not checked. Note "Data" refers to solids and surfaces. Geometry. double-click the Construction folder to enter the construction environment. and Modeling Uncertainty. Within each group. and then click Examine: On the ribbon. surface. Topology errors Geometry Analysis lists bodies or surfaces with geometry errors and groups them by error type. Analysis can be stopped and restarted without repeating examination of already analyzed data. and bodies with errors are nested in the groups. Access: In the part browser. In the graphics window. Right-click a body.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Quality Check of translated data Concept Procedure Quick Reference Quality Check Analyzes translated data and provides diagnostic information. Topology Analysis lists bodies or surfaces with topology errors and groups them by error type. and select Quality Check. Right-click in the graphics window.

Help message summarizes the error or state of the data. using a maximum allowable tolerance between faces.Geometry errors Modeling Uncertainty lists bodies or surfaces with errors. Refit Face selects and repairs problem faces by attempting to refit them. . Click for more help describes the data error in more detail. Examine starts analysis on the selected data. Problem Diagnosis/Description provides detailed information about a selected body listed in the Known Issues pane. Suggests how to repair the problem data. but the system cannot determine the exact error type. Enabled only when the system detects geometry and modeling uncertainty issues.

For nodes such as groups or subgroups. right-click a node under the Construction folder. select the check box to remove color overrides from individual entities contained in the node. and select Properties. such as bodies and faces. Clear the check box to leave individual color overrides intact.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Data groups in the construction environment Concept Procedure Quick Reference Group Properties Access: In the Construction browser. . Color Style Strip overrides Accept the default or click the arrow to select a different color style. Sets properties for data in the Construction folder.

Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Reverse Normal Select individual face Specifies an individual face to be reversed.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Surfaces in the construction environment Concept Procedure Quick Reference Reverse Normal Reverse the normal direction of a face or lump in the construction environment. . A red arrow indicates what the system determines as a backward direction. Note A temporary arrow is displayed in the graphics screen. a green arrow indicates what the system determines as the proper direction. For a closed shell (solid). showing the current normal direction. Select lump Specifies all faces of a lump to be reversed.

. Note Because continuous edges must have the same edge condition. you can select the next boundary. Free Condition (G0) Tangent (G1) Condition Note You cannot apply tangent boundary conditions to selected edges that have two adjacent faces. Access: Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Boundary Patch Boundary Specifies the boundary of the patch. Once the boundary selection represents a closed region. Lists the name for the selected edge and the number of edges in the selection set. Click the arrow to select an edge condition. It also specifies the edge condition to apply to each edge of the boundary patch. all selected surface edges that are tangent or continuous with the previous item are merged.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Boundary patches in the construction environment Concept Procedure Quick Reference Boundary Patch Creates a boundary patch feature by generating a planar or 3D surface within the specified boundary. Select a chain of tangent continuous edges to specify a closed region.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Trim boundaries Concept Procedure Quick Reference Extract Loop Extracts one or more loops by untrimming a surface. The number of loops selected is displayed. Access: Loop Delete Wires Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Extract Loop Select single or multiple loops in the graphics window. When extracted. and attempting to repair poor quality trimming curves. leaving the wires intact. . It is unselected by default. Select the check box to delete wires after extracting a loop. loops are changed to wires.

Access: Select Selects one or more faces to unstitch from a single surface or solid. according to data type. Ribbon: Construction tab Surface panel Unstitch . The unstitched faces are then placed in folders in the browser.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Stitched surfaces Concept Procedure Quick Reference Unstitch Unstitch selected faces from a body.

Promote Wires . Access: In the construction environment under the Construction folder. Promotes and moves construction environment wire data to 3D sketches.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Copy and Move geometry Concept Procedure Quick Reference Promote wires Promotes construction environment wire data and moves it to 3D sketches. select a Wire subgroup node from the browser. then right-click and select Promote Wires.

surfaces. or wires To enhance the appearance and visibility of solids. Change colors in the construction environment Change colors on parametric surfaces . This can be useful in making a feature or body more visible for communicating design intent.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Construction Environment and Importing Data > Colors on Parts and Surfaces Concept Procedure Change color of solids. you can change their color. surfaces. and wires.

Unique template files allow the creation of sheet metal parts with predefined attributes including: material. corner relief. gap values. Flat patterns rich with manufacturing information can be created and documented on drawings containing tables of holes. punch representations and unfolding rules. Flat patterns can be exported to industry standard formats for CNC manufacturing. bend radius.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts Sheet metal design is an extension of the part modeling environment. Sheet metal-specific commands streamline working on both the folded and unfolded model. punches and bends. Topics in this section Templates for sheet metal parts Sheet Metal Defaults Sheet Metal Fasteners Sheet Metal Features Sheet Metal Flat Patterns Bend Tables for sheet metal materials Custom Unfold Equations Export part and sheet metal faces. bend relief. flat patterns Sheet Metal Tips . Sheet metal fasteners are available through the Bolted Connection Component Generator or through Content Center when sheet metal parts are used within assembly models.

4. Setup panel Sheet Metal 3. the Sheet Metal Rule defined in the template is automatically applied to the new sheet metal part. change the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate the average sheet metal size. You can create your own sheet metal templates with settings defined as Sheet Metal rules and add them to the templates provided by Autodesk Inventor 1. Save the file in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a subfolder of Templates. 5. If needed. Set any iProperties for the template file that you want to be inherited by any files created from the template. and drawings. click Sheet Metal tab Defaults. 6. using an existing template. remove sheet metal. To replace the default template. On the ribbon. all new sheet metal files are created by Autodesk Inventor using a template.ipt and replace it with a template that has the same name. A sheet metal file automatically becomes a template when it is saved to the Templates folder. or Unfolding Rule as needed.ipt in the Templates folder is the default sheet metal template. When you use a sheet metal template to create a part. the Material Style defined in the part will override the Material Style defined in the Sheet Metal Rule of the sheet metal template. Optionally override the Material Style. If you use a part template and then convert the model to sheet metal.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Templates for sheet metal parts Concept Procedure Create templates for sheet metal parts Like parts. assemblies. Create a sheet metal part. Thickness. 2. . Note The file sheet metal.

and Corner Relief options and alternative flat pattern representations for punches. Thickness . the field is active and allows a thickness value to be manually input. Bend. Thickness. and rules for the active sheet metal part. Thickness. the Style and Standard Editor must be used to edit shared styles. Use Thickness from Rule . List contains all sheet metal rules within the style library if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to All Styles. List Parameters or by selecting from a list of recently entered values. thickness. List contains all sheet metal rules within the local file if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to Local. Note If the active part is a sheet metal iPart factory and the iPart table was .Value field which reflects the thickness.drop-down listing of all sheet metal rules. Bend. While each of these options can be modified (to differ from the active style) when creating or editing a sheet metal feature. Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal Defaults Sheet Metal Rule .check box which enables/disables the Thickness value field. Corner.Provides access to the Sheet Metal Rule edit panel in the Style and Standard Editor and allows the selections and values which are used to define Material Style. Sheet metal rules contain the selections and values which are used to define Material Style. The active sheet metal style defines: Unfold. When the Use Thickness from Rule check box is not checked. and Flat Pattern options. When the Use Thickness from Rule check box is checked the field is inactive and reports the thickness specified in the selected Sheet Metal Rule. Fly-out provides ability to obtain thickness value through Measure. Bend.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Defaults Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet Metal Default The Sheet Metal Default dialog box specifies material style. Corner and Flat Pattern options. Edit Sheet Metal Rule . Show Dimensions.

bend table-driven bends.created with Thickness as a column in the table the Use Thickness from Rule check box is disabled on this dialog box. and bend table tolerance options within the sheet metal style. Unfolding Rule . List contains all materials within the style library if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to All Styles. Cancel .Click to close the dialog box and ignore any changes that were made while the dialog box was open. Apply . . Sheet metal unfolding rules define: linear unfolding method vs.Drop-down listing of all material styles. Edit Material Style . KFactor values and bend table tolerance options to edit.Click to accept all style changes made and dismiss the dialog box. Edit Unfolding Rule .Click to apply any style changes that were made while keeping the dialog box open for further changes. OK . List drop-down contains all unfolding rules within the style library if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to All Styles. List contains all materials within the local file if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to Local. List contains all unfolding rules within the local file if the filter setting in the Style and Standard Editor is set to Local.drop-down listing of all sheet metal unfolding rules.Provides access to the Material edit panel in the Style and Standard Editor and allows the material properties to be edited.Provides access to the Unfold Rule edit panel in the Style and Standard Editor and allows the selections and values which are used to define: linear unfolding method vs. bend table-driven bends. Material Style . Note Any changes that are made to a style from the style library must be saved to the style library if they are to be available to other users of that style. KFactor values.

. you can add sheet metal fasteners using one of two methods: Use sheet metal fasteners in a bolted connection Place sheet metal fasteners from content center Note If you do not see a PEM category in your list of component categories in Content Center.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Fasteners Concept Procedure Use Sheet Metal Fasteners in Assemblies From within an assembly which contains sheet metal components. you may need to configure your Project file by adding the Inventor PEM library. Additional information on setting up and using the Content Center can be found here.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features Concept Procedure Add bends to sheet metal faces Create sheet metal contour flanges Bend Edit Reset All Bends Corner Edit Reset All Corners Create Contour Roll as Base Feature Create Contour Roll Mirror and Pattern a Contour Roll Add Unfold features to a Contour Roll Add corner chamfers to sheet metal faces Add corner rounds to sheet metal faces Add corner seams between sheet metal faces Rip Corner Seams on Converted Part Edges Create cuts in sheet metal faces Create sheet metal faces Create sheet metal flanges Create symmetrical flanges Bend Edit Reset All Bends Corner Edit Reset All Corners .

Fold sheet metal faces Hem sheet metal faces Create Lofted Flange for Die Formed Output Create Lofted Flange for Press Brake Output Bend Zone Edit Bend Edit Punch shapes into sheet metal faces Create sheet metal Punch tools Create a single point Rip Create a point to point Rip Create a face extents Rip Unfold Sheet Metal Features Unfold Rolled Sheet Metal Features Unfold Sketch with Sheet Metal Feature Refold Sheet Metal Features Refold Rolled Sheet Metal Features Refold Sketch with Sheet Metal Feature .

and Contour Flange sheet metal feature dialog boxes. Extend Bend Aligned to Side Faces Extends material along the faces on the side of the edges connected by the bend instead of perpendicularly to the bend axis. Access: Located on the Shape tab of the: Face. . In the following images. Note the area of the flat pattern on either side of the bend zone. Bend. Useful when side edges of face are not perpendicular. the same bend is created using each option.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Bends Concept Procedure Quick Reference Bend Extension Determines how bends extend material between edges of participating faces. The first image shows the bend extension aligned to the side face.

.Extend Bend Perpendicular to Side Faces Extends material perpendicularly to the side face. Note the area of the flat pattern on either side of the bend zone and compare with the same area on the flat pattern shown previously. The image following image shows the same bend as in the previous illustration created using the bend extension perpendicular to the side face. This option is the default when the dialog box is initialized.

Overlap Relief . Access: Click the Corner Seam Edit glyph in the graphics window over the corner you wish to modify.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Contour Flanges Concept Procedure Quick Reference Corner Edit Use the Corner Seam Edit glyph to select a single corner to edit from among a group of corners that are being created as part of a multi-edge flange or contour flange feature (during the feature preview) or following selecting Edit Corners from the context menu of a previously created flange or contour flange feature.

Used to select rotation axis. .Click to offset the material thickness to the other side of the selected profile.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Contour Roll Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal contour roll Creates a rolled sheet metal feature from an open profile. Note Rotation axis geometry must be contained within the sketch containing the profile geometry. Flip Side . Access Shape Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Create panel Contour Roll Used to select profile geometry.

Unfolding Unrolling Unroll Method Drop-down selection list allowing the selection of the method used to unroll the . When active.Click to offset the material thickness equally to both sides of the selected profile.Flip Side . When active. A Rolled Angle value of 360 degrees can be used for profiles with a single.Click to offset the material thickness to the other side of the selected profile. Defaults to 90 degrees. click to sweep the Contour Roll in the direction opposite of the previewed direction. Click to sweep the Contour Roll equally both clockwise and counter-clockwise from the selected profile. Rolled Angle Rolled Angle Data entry field. Both Sides . Note angle value may not equal 360 degrees for multi-segment profiles. click to sweep the Contour Roll in the direction opposite of the previewed direction. straight line. Allows the value of the angular sweep of the rolled section to be input.

These methods all derive a Developed Length by multiplying the Rolled Angle by a Neutral Radius.selection of the method used to unroll the Contour Roll feature. Defaults to the system parameter: BendRadius. Centroid Cylinder . 5. 4. Custom Cylinder . Allows input of the value of the bend radius.Allows entry of an explicit value which drives the developed length of the flattened rolled segment. Data entry field.Method used for single-segment linear profiles. Neutral Radius Unrolled Length Bend Radius .The default method: an axis parallel to the revolute axis is passed through the evaluated Centroid location providing input to define a neutral cylindrical surface. 2. 3. Informational display. Informational display. Developed Length . Unfold Rule Drop-down selection list allowing the selection of an Unfold Rule that differs from the Unfold Rule specified in the active Sheet Metal Rule. Neutral Radius . They differ by the type of input provided: 1. KFactor . linear profile is selected. Displays the length value of the unrolled Contour Roll feature. Displays the value of the neutral radius used when deriving a developed length using a rolled angle. Note This data entry field is disabled when a single.Allows a parametrically determined value for the neutral radius (when multi-segment profiles are considered).Allows selection of a sketched line which defines the surface of the cylindrical neutral surface.

Help Preview Click to open the Help page. Click the check box to enable or disable the preview display of the Contour Roll before creation. OK Cancel Apply . Click OK to accept the input. create the Contour Roll. The dialog box remains displayed allowing additional Contour Roll creation. Click Cancel to reject any input and dismiss the dialog box. create the Contour Roll and dismiss the dialog box. Click Apply to accept the input.

All chamfers created in a single operation are one feature.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Corner Chamfers Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal corner chamfers Adds a chamfer on one or more sheet metal corners. You specify the corner appearance and select corners individually. Access Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Corner Chamfer Method Corners and Edges Distance and Angle .

Access Corner Radius Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Corner Round Defines a set of sheet metal corners for fillets or rounds. Corner selects or removes single corners. except the corners that result from intersections between the feature and other sheet metal faces. Specifies the radius for a selected set of corners. All fillets and rounds created in a single operation are one feature. Changes the method for adding or removing corners from a corner set. and then enter a new value. Feature selects or removes all corners of a feature. You can create fillets or rounds of different sizes in a single operation. Click to add a new set. Click to change a radius. Select Mode .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Corner Rounds Concept Procedure Quick Reference Corner round feature Adds fillets or rounds to one or more corners of a sheet metal part.

Round A corner relief shape defined in the flat by a circular cut out centered on the intersection of the bend lines. or Corner Seam dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Corner Seams Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal corner options Overrides default parameters that define how corners are relieved when a folded model is unfolded. Note Not all options described are available or valid for each feature that shares this tab. Flange. Change these parameters for individual features using the Corner Options tab. Use this option to define the Default corner relief when two bends intersect. . The Default settings are specified in the Sheet Metal Styles dialog box. Square A corner relief shape defined in the flat by a square cut out centered on the intersection of the bend lines. Access: Click the Corner tab on the Contour Flange.

Characterized by minimum relief allowing a subsequent weld operation to close the corner. . Trim to Bend A corner relief shape defined in the flat by a polygonal cut out bounded by the bending zone lines. Linear Weld A corner relief shape defined in the flat by a V-shaped cut out defined from the intersection of the inner bend zone lines to the outer bend zone intersection of the line with the flange edges.Tear A corner relief shape defined in the flat by extending the flange edges to their intersection. Characterized by no relief which allows material failure (tearing) across the bend zone in the folded model.

Note The folded model does not display the selected relief option. Use this option to define the Default corner relief to display in the flat pattern when three bends intersect. Full Round A corner relief shape defined in the flat by extending the flange edges to their intersection and then placing a fillet tangent to the bend zone tangency lines. Radius are likely larger than what is produced using the Round with Radius option. . No Replacement As indicated. Characterized in the folded model by a gap between the flanges that is equidistant along the length of the relief suitable for subsequent arc welding. Intersection A corner relief shape defined in the flat by extending and intersecting the flange edges. no replacement of the "as modeled" geometry is made in the flat pattern.Arc Weld A corner relief shape defined in the flat by curves tangent to the flange edges along the outside edge of the bend zone which converge to a flat gap equal to the Miter Gap value.

Disabled . Round with Radius A corner relief shape defined in the flat by extending the flange edges to their intersection.Allows you to input a value to change the size of an automatically .A contour flange loop applied with the auto-miter option enabled.Allows you to input a value to change the size of the Corner Relief of the selected feature from the default which is defined in the Sheet Metal Style using the named parameter: CornerReliefSize. and then placing a tangent fillet of the size specified. Apply Auto-Mitering . Radius likely smaller than what is produced by the Full Round option.A contour flange loop applied with the auto-miter option disabled. Relief Size . Available on Flange and Contour Flange dialog box (not available on Corner tab of Corner Seam dialog box) Enabled .Enables automatic material extension between adjacent flange edges during creation or edit of at least two flange edges during a single operation where bend angle is greater than 90 degrees.with Radius option. Miter Gap .

. These radio buttons are active when a choice must be made between the type of corner being specified. 2 Bend/3 Bend Corner . the value displayed defaults to the system named parameter: GapSize which is defined in the Sheet Metal Style.applied gap between flanges when the Auto-Miter option is enabled. When enabled.Indicates which type of corner relief applies to the selected geometry. They are inactive and serve as an indicator of the type of corner selected at all other times.

Multiple profiles Position the cursor over the profile and click to select. To cancel the selection. Cut Across Bend . Single profile Automatically selects profile and previews the cut. and then click one or more profiles. click Profile. press Ctrl and click the profile. Extents . If there are multiple profiles and none are selected.Check to remove material by wrapping the profile across faces and one or more sheet metal bends. If there are multiple profiles and none are selected. Access: Shape Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Cut Profile Selects a profile to remove material. The shape of the cut feature is controlled by the sketched profile. click Profile and then click one or more profiles. The material to remove is previewed in the graphics window. The material to remove is previewed in the graphics window.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Cuts Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal cut Removes material from a sheet metal face.

In an assembly.Uses the distance defined by two points or an edge for the thickness of the cut. the face or plane can be on another part. May be specified as an absolute depth value. When the Cut Across Bend option is selected the cut is applied to the faces and bends located under the sketch while the part is in a flattened state. To Next Cut terminates on the next plane or face. Thickness value field .Allows the thickness of the cut to be specified: Thickness . Thickness/"n" . All Extrudes the profile through all features and sketches in the specified direction. You can terminate the cut on the selected face. or on a face that extends beyond the termination plane. the faces or planes can be on other parts. Thickness/2 results in a cut that was half the depth of the material thickness. The cut is perpendicular to the sketch plane. Select the direction of the cut or extrude the cut equally in both directions. Establishes the depth and direction of the cut. From .Allows the selection of the type of extent: Distance Default method.A partial depth cut can be specified by using the Thickness parameter in an equation. Measure . To Selects an ending face or plane on which to terminate the cut. When the Cut Across Bend option is selected the cut is applied to the faces and bends located under the sketch while the part is in a flattened state.To Selects beginning and ending faces or planes on which to terminate the extrusion. The cut depth is through the material. . The cut depth is equal to the value specified by the equation. In an assembly. Selects the direction for the cut.Extent Type drop-down select field .Default cut depth is equal to the Thickness parameter of the sheet metal material and results in a through cut.

OK Click OK to create (or modify) a bend using the parameters and options specified and close the dialog box. Offset Flips the direction of the cut from the default setting. Results in no material removal when the sketch is created on a sheet metal face.Displays the dimensions for a selected feature. Removes material from the plane of the selected sketch towards the material thickness of the part. The default direction selected. Useful when the cut sketch is created on a reference plane.Show Dimensions . Defines the cut sketch as being the mid-plane of the cut thickness. Can be useful when the cut sketch is created on an appropriately positioned reference plane. Click Cancel to discard any edits made to parameters or options and close the dialog box. Cancel .Displays a list of defined parameters in the file which can be selected as the thickness for the cut. List Parameters . Uses the distance determined by a selected dimension as the thickness for the cut.

Unfold Rule .Drop-down selection field that allows the selection of any previously defined Unfold rule. click the Unfold Options tab on the feature creation dialog box. The Sheet Metal Unfold rule can be changed for an entire part using Sheet Metal Defaults on Sheet Metal tab Setup panel Sheet Metal Defaults. Access: While creating a Sheet Metal feature. The Unfold rule can be overridden for the feature being created by changing the style selection on this dialog box tab.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Faces Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal unfold options The default Sheet Metal Unfold rule is set for the part in the Sheet Metal Rule. .

use Identical termination instead of Adjust to Model where possible. but not the original base feature. You can get different results using the Identical compared to Adjust to Model termination method. Some special considerations for sheet metal features in patterns include: Fold features usually extend along an entire edge and may not be good candidates for patterns. For example: You can create rectangular. . experiment with termination methods and the number of pattern instances to determine the best approach. Only Identical termination method is available for: Face features. You can suppress one or more individual occurrences of a feature in a pattern to flow around an irregular shape. circular. and mirror patterns. can be patterned only when the parent feature is included. Compare results when using Identical and Adjust to Model methods. such as corner rounds. and bends. For faster computation. corner seams.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Feature Patterns Sheet metal features behave much the same as solid features in patterns. corner chamfers. Secondary (child) features. with or without associated bends Flanges Contour flanges Hems When you are not certain of the results. Cut across bend features pattern results differ depending on the bend geometry and termination method. for example. A sheet metal cut (without the cut across bend option) is like an extruded cut. Patterns of multi-edge flanges are not supported.

Show Me how to create a circular pattern of sheet metal features Show Me how to create an incremental circular pattern .

Access: Click the Corner Seam Edit glyph in the graphics window over the corner you wish to modify.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Flanges Concept Procedure Quick Reference Corner Edit Use the Corner Seam Edit glyph to select a single corner to edit from among a group of corners that are being created as part of a multi-edge flange or contour flange feature (during the feature preview) or following selecting Edit Corners from the context menu of a previously created flange or contour flange feature. Overlap Relief .

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Folds Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal fold Bends an existing sheet metal face by folding it along a sketched line that terminates at face edges. Click Cancel to discard any edits made to parameters or options and close the dialog box. Cancel Apply . Access: Shape Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Create panel Fold Unfold Options Bend OK Click OK to create (or modify) a fold using the parameters and options specified and dismiss the dialog box. Click Apply to create a fold using the parameters and options specified and keep the dialog box displayed allowing additional contour folds to be created.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Hems Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal hem Creates a folded hem along sheet metal edges to strengthen the part. You can create single. double. Click Cancel to disregard any edits made to parameters or options and dismiss the dialog box. and teardrop hems. rolled. or eliminate sharp edges. Access: Shape Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Create panel Hem Unfold Options Bend OK Click OK to create (or modify) a hem using the parameters and options specified and dismiss the dialog box. Click Apply to create a hem using the parameters and options specified and keep the dialog box displayed allowing additional hems to be created. Cancel Apply (More) .

Check Box Bend Radius Check Box Unfold Rule Help Button OK Enables the editing of the Bend Radius field. Click “?” to open this page of the on-line help. Within the graphics window. Access: Select Edit Bends from the context menu of the Bend childfeature of a Lofted Flange. select the Bend Zone Edit glyph then select an individual Bend Edit glyph on a specific bend within the bend zone. . Allows input of a value to modify the bend radius of the selected bend. Allows the selection of an alternative Unfold Rule for the selected bend. Click to apply the modified facet control type and value to the selected bend zone and close the dialog box. Enables the editing of the Unfold Rule.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Lofted Flange Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal bend edit Allows editing of the bend radius and unfold rule for individual bends within a selected bend zone of a lofted flange.

At least one hole center must exist on the selected sheet metal face.Creates the Sheet Metal Punch iFeature on the face of the part.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Punch Tools Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal punch tool placement reference Punches a 3D shape into a sheet metal face. . select a punch in the Punch Tool Directory and click Open for the Punch Tool dialog box. Cancel . The iFeature designed to be used with the Punch tool must be a 3D solid based on a sketch with a single hole center. Access: Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Punch Tool Then. Preview Geometry Size Finish .Discards all input and closes the Punch Tool dialog box.

Access: Rip Type Ribbon: Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Rip Drop-down selection list containing the following selections: Single Point . Sketch Point . Face Extents . Defaults to value of system parameter: GapSize.This selection tool is labeled Sketch Point when the Rip Type is . Note Value entry field available for Single Point and Point to Point rip types. Value entry field.Allows the definition of a Rip feature through the selection of a face to rip and two sketched points along edges of the face. Gap Value Shape Rip Face .Allows the definition of a Rip feature by selection of a model face to remove.Allows the definition of a Rip feature through the selection of a face to e rip and a single sketched point along an edge of the face.Selection tool used to choose the model face to which the Rip feature is applied.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Rip Concept Procedure Quick Reference Rip definition reference Dialog box displayed during the creation and edit of Rip features. Point to Point . Allows the input of a gap value.

Note This selection tool is not visible when Rip Type chosen is Single Point or Face Extents. Both Sides . offsets the Rip gap to the opposite side of the selected point. Help OK Opens this page. create the Rip feature and dismiss the dialog box.labeled Sketch Point when the Rip Type is Single Point. offsets the Rip gap to the opposite side of the selected point.Offsets the Rip gap to both sides of the selected point.Selection tool used to choose the end point of the Rip feature when the Rip Type chosen is Point to Point.This selection tool is labeled Start Point when the Rip Type is Point to Point. Gap Offset Direction (available for Single Point and Point to Point rip types) Flip Side . End Point . . Flip Side . Accepts the input. Start Point . It is used to choose the sketch point that defines the location of the first point of the rip Note This selection tool is not visible when the Rip Type chosen is Face Extents.When active during the graphic preview. It is used to choose the sketch point that definse the location of the rip.When active during the graphic preview.

The dialog box remains displayed allowing additional Rip feature creation.Cancel Apply Discards any input and closes the dialog box. Accepts the input and creates the Rip feature. .

Access: On the ribbon. . and a set of buttons along the bottom. click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Unfold or click Sheet Metal tab Modify panel Refold Unfold or Refold Reference (A) Use this selection tool to choose the face or reference plane that to use to define the reference to which bends or rolls are unfolded or refolded. When entering the workflow. this tool is active by default.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Features > Unfold/Refold Feature Pair Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal unfold/refold reference The dialog box displayed during either the Unfold and Refold workflow differs only in the labeling of the functions as either Unfold or Refold. Geometry that can be selected using this tool is labeled B in the illustration to the right on the dialog box. The dialog box contains three selection sections. This reference covers both dialog boxes. This reference is labeled A in the illustration to the right on the dialog box. a contextual illustration. Use this selection tool to select all bend or roll features to unfold or refold. Unfold or Refold Geometry (B) Use this selection tool to select individual bend or roll features to unfold or refold. Geometry that can be selected using this tool is labeled B in the illustration to the right on the dialog box. This tool is disabled until a reference is selected.

No flat faces Unfold . Discard any edits made to parameters or options and dismiss the dialog box.Enable or disable the preview of the fold or unfold result.Flat faces present Refold . Unfold .Flat faces present Unfold . The original sketch (or parent) remains in the folded position. Check this option to see both the original (folded position) sketch as well as the unfolded copy of the sketch. Sketches (C) Use this selection tool to select unconsumed sketches to unfold or refold. Cancel .When sketches are unfolded.is labeled B in the illustration to the right on the dialog box. Parent is visible . This tool is disabled until unfold or refold geometry is selected. OK Create (or modify) an Unfold or Refold using the selections specified and dismiss the dialog box.No flat faces Refold . Dialog Image Panel The Unfold or Refold dialog box displays an image that changes depending on the available geometry.Contour roll Refold . Sketch geometry that can be selected using this tool is labeled C in the illustration to the right on the dialog box.Contour roll Enable/disable feature preview . This tool is disabled until a reference is selected. a copy of the sketch is created and displayed on the flattened face.

Apply Create (or modify) an Unfold or Refold using the selections specified and leave the dialog box displayed for further interaction. .

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns Concept Procedure Create flat patterns in sheet metal Export flat patterns Reorient flat patterns in sheet metal Switch between folded and flat pattern environments Review flat pattern extents Update flat pattern extent Directed Reorder Sequential Reorder Individual Override Remove all Overrides Create Flat Pattern Cosmetic Centerline .

These values are later available from within the drawing environment through the Format Text dialog box. Button is inactive when the values are up to date.Dismisses the dialog box.Displays the length of the flat pattern.Displays the width of the flat pattern. Update .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns > Create Flat Pattern Concept Procedure Quick Reference Flat pattern extents Informational dialog reports the length and width of the sheet metal flat pattern.Updates the values in the width and length field when a migrated file has not had the flat pattern width and length values updated. Close . Length . Width . Access: With the Flat Pattern browser node selected. You can select the Sheet Metal Properties category type and subsequently select FLAT PATTERN EXTENTS LENGTH or FLAT PATTERN EXTENTS WIDTH to obtain these values. . click Extents.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns > Bend Order Annotation Concept Procedure Quick Reference Bend Order Edit Used to edit the Bend Order sequence. Enabled when the override is a number that exists in the Bend Number Check Box Bend Number Unique Number . Enables the Bend Number input field. Allows input of sequence number override and allows override value to be unique or duplicate. Access: Ribbon: Flat Pattern tab Manage panel Bend Order Annotation. Specifies that the Bend Number is unique within the bend order sequence. and then click a displayed Bend Order glyph. Enter numeric value to override displayed bend order sequence value.

Accept the input. When Unique Number is selected.number that exists in the sequence. Disabled and checked if the override is already in the sequence and there is more than one bend with the same number. Disabled and checked if the override is not in the sequence. update the displayed bend order sequence. Open this page. Help OK . and close the dialog box. Enabled when the override is a number that exists in the sequence. Duplicate Number Specifies that the Bend Number is duplicated within the bend order sequence. the remaining sequence numbers is incremented. the remaining sequence numbers is unaffected. When Duplicate Number is selected.

2.The resulting cosmetic centerlines provide press brake attributes. Manufacturing Information Information Type Choices include: 1. bend direction. None .Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Flat Patterns > Cosmetic Centerline Concept Procedure Quick Reference Flat Pattern Cosmetic Centerline Convert flat pattern sketch line geometry to Cosmetic Centerlines that carry manufacturing attributes including bend extent lines.No attribution is required on the resulting cosmetic centerlines. Access: Ribbon: Flat Pattern tab Create panel Cosmetic Centerline Sketched Bend Lines Selection tool used to select sketched lines that are used to create cosmetic centerlines. . Press Brake . and bend angle.

Check box for Bend Angle Bend Angle Check box for Radius Radius Displayed when Information Type is Crease. create the cosmetic centerlines. and close the dialog box. Unfold Rule Help OK Cancel Apply . Defaults to the Bend Radius specified in the active sheet metal rule. Accept the input and create the cosmetic centerlines. Allows input of a radius value. Accept the input. Data entry field.The resulting cosmetic centerlines represent stiffening creases. Drop-down selection field which allows selection of existing Unfold Rules. Open this page. Change the up/down attribute associated with the cosmetic centerline. but leave the dialog box open to allow additional cosmetic centerline creation. Allows the radius attribute to be specified. Defaults to Default_KFactor. Allows an Unfold Rule to be associated with the cosmetic centerline. Allows input of a bend angle value. Displayed when Information Type is Crease.3. Allows a bend angle attribute to be specified. Discard any input and close the dialog box. Data entry field. Crease . Displayed when Information Type is Press Brake.

. ft. and correction values . R = bending radii . m. mm.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Bend Tables for sheet metal materials Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal bend table example Note Resize the window as needed to see the entire table. . cm. . S = sheet thickness . . '/' = special character . T2 = tolerance for equal min and max bending radius R .' = remark character . micron.----------------------------------------------------------------------. in. A = opening angle . U = units of tolerance. All bend radius columns must contain values. . bend radius. Use an ASCII file editor to customize the values to your specific conditions. '*' = start of a new table . T1 = Tolerance (+/-) for sheet thickness S (valid for the whole file) . Notations used in tables: . thickness. '. . or yd . . .

. . using the appropriate x values in the table. The T2 tolerance is used at the minimum and maximum .----------------------------------------------------------------------. opening angles A in the tables. . T3 = tolerance for equal min and max opening angle A . interpolation using the appropriate X values in the table. The correction value X is applied as follows: . the resultant . . (A = length of side A (outside measurement of bending zone)) . the . The T3 tolerance is used at the minimum and maximum . correction value X is determined by linear interpolation .----------------------------------------------------------------------. that fall between two values existing in the table. between two values existing in the table. . bending radii R in the tables. For model bend radii that fall . (L = unfolded length in flat pattern) .L = A+ B-x . . . Angle A expressed in degrees. (B = length of side B (outside measurement of bending zone)) . . For model opening angles . .. . resultant correction value X is determined by linear .

.072419 0.000000 25. bend radius and correction values /Ucm .050000 .000000 0.141429 0.010000 /T30.010000 . /T10.132067 .000000 0.075755 0.000000 15.029508 0. /R .000000 5.154319 0.121398 0. *** TABLE 1 .089863 0.000000 20.000000 0.046881 0.000000 bending radii 0.UNITS for tolerance. . .sheet thickness /S0.correction value x -----------------0.110057 0.049384 0. .000000 0.000000 1.053004 0.104168 0.000100 /T20.100510 0.TOLERANCES valid for the whole file .. .023024 0.080765 0. /A /A /A /A /A /A opening angle 0.026252 0.135353 0.500000 2. thickness.024359 0.----------------------------------------------------------------------.000000 10.000000 -------------------.059349 0.500000 1.

170086 0.253600 0.000000 60.351613 0.189014 0.475279 0.212779 0.460932 0.000000 50.313537 0.175462 0.304289 0.543377 .225899 0.000000 0.000000 45.405180 0.209200 0.429132 0.000000 55./A /A /A /A /A /A /A 30.257602 0.300062 0.000000 40.265428 0.000000 35.378726 0.254063 0.308101 0.362380 0.354475 0.209526 0.409660 0.505980 0.168059 0.454742 0.

radius. Value entry field to define the upper bounding limit. Drop-down selection that includes range variables to define: angle. Open this page. double-click a Bounding Condition cell on the dialog box. Edit using drop-down selections in top row. less than or equal. Drop-down selection that includes the equality operators: less than.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Custom Unfold Equations Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet metal custom unfold equation bounding conditions edit dialog box Allows edit of the bounding condition associated with a specific custom unfold equation. less than or equal. thickness. Indicates range type and equalities. equal. Help OK Cancel . Accept the bounding condition and close the dialog box. Top Row Lower Equality Operator Range Type Upper Equality Operator Bottom Row Lower Limit Range Equality Upper Limit Value entry field to define the lower bounding limit. Discard any edits to the bounding condition and close the dialog box. equal. Drop-down selection that includes the equality operators: less than. Access: When the Unfold Method selected on the Style and Standard dialog box is Custom Equation.

and so on. This option is helpful for certain types of manufacturing equipment which require a polyline for direct consumption of . Click Options in the Save Copy As dialog box to customize the file version being exported. FlatPattern. all data are classified and exported to appropriate layers. the loops on all faces are exported. or assembly environments.dwg file format.dwg file types. flat patterns With a single model face (or flat pattern) selected. Use Export Face As to export all loops on a single planar face. You can export the entire flat pattern by selecting Save Copy As from the flat pattern browser node context menu while the flat pattern is displayed. countersunk holes show the correct inner diameter.Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Export part and sheet metal faces. For example. Save Copy As produces the most complete and accurate representation of the flat pattern. For .sat. The Save Copy As command is recommended if there is no polyline requirement for the exported flat pattern. The command is available within the part. Export Face As is available for both the flat pattern and the folded part.dxf and . There are two controlling . All geometry is moved to a location where coordinates have positive values and the outer profile is converted into a polyline. sheet metal. and . . In the sheet metal environment.xml files. additional options are available to customize post-process routines using an xml script. The face loops can be exported to either .dwg file formats.dxf and .dxf or . Use Save Copy As to export sheet metal flat patterns to . you can use Export Face As (from the context menu) to export to several different file formats. The loop data is processed during the publishing routine. FaceLoops.dxf.xml is used by the Save Copy As command when exporting from the flat pattern. Export Face As is available while working on the flat pattern of a sheet metal part to export the entire flat pattern when the creation of a polyline is required.dwg data.xml is used by the .

xml file. Vista: Users/Public/Documents/Autodesk/Inventor(version)/Design Data/DWGDXF folder. . depending on your particular workflow requirements. The . Before you export. you may want to set up the flat pattern export options in the relevant .Export As Face command.xml files by default are stored in the: Windows XP: Program Files/Autodesk/Inventor(version)/Design Data/DWG-DXF folder.

Autodesk Inventor > Parts > Sheet Metal Parts > Sheet Metal Tips Sheet metal parts are different from regular parts Decide how to create sheet metal parts Create stamped features in a sheet metal part Use industry standard material styles Use the Parameters command to change parameter names and values Plan how to show features in flat patterns Creating a flat pattern of a rolled part Features with elliptical or spline profile geometry .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies Topics in this section Build assemblies Bills of materials Representations Functional design overview Component Generators Calculators Content Center Build structural frames with Frame Generator Weldments .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies Topics in this section Fundamentals Top-down design Components Constraints Modifications Features Productivity Tools Physical Properties .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals Topics in this section Assembly modeling environment Work smart in assemblies Strategies for productivity in assemblies Dependencies in assemblies Templates for assemblies Assembly browser Adjust the browser hierarchy Improve workflow with user-defined folders Assembly coordinate system Model in assembly section views Cross-part sketches in assemblies Resolve a file search .

Rename Browser Nodes Add Part Add Assembly Save and Replace Component Ground and Root Component Component Derive Place at Component Origin Alpha Sort Components . click the Assembly Tools tab. click the Assembly Tools tab. Vista: Run Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Inventor [revision]\SDK\Tools\Users\AssemblyTools\setup. On the ribbon.exe. On the ribbon.exe.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals > Assembly modeling environment Concept Quick Reference Assembly tools Access: Windows XP: Run Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor [revision]\SDK\Tools\Users\AssemblyTools\setup.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals > Work smart in assemblies Concept Procedure Enhance performance and capacity Performance and capacity tips A note on performance and capacity File migration Application Options tips Projects: general best practices Assembly selection filters and Design View representations Autodesk Inventor 3 GB feature Additional capacity tips .

Design View representations . click the Procedure tab to go to a step-by-step procedure. a part. so that each instance can be in a unique position. Flexible assemblies Each flexible assembly instance solves separately. see assemblies with components in different positions. a component and all components constrained to it. you can manipulate component size and position. select components based on certain criteria. Derived parts and assemblies Capture design intent using selected sketches. Collision and contact Detect collision when driving constraints and facilitate contact between components. Click a link below to learn more about how and when to use these commands. see assemblies in various views. Adaptive components All instances of an adaptive assembly adapt size and position relative to constrained objects. Move components Move an unconstrained component. In each topic. Constrain components automatically Use iMates to constrain frequently used components together in an assembly. or multiple assembly components as the base component in a new part or assembly. and make components visible or invisible. or simulate mechanical motion by driving constraints.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals > Strategies for productivity in assemblies Using Autodesk Inventor. Component selection sets Select a group of components based on specific criteria.

Save multiple Design View representations within an assembly to preserve different display configurations. Oftentimes. enabled state. Retrieve later for further analysis or modification. . Take advantage of the three system-supplied Level of Detail representations when appropriate. and color overrides. including component visibility. starting with nothing loaded (such as All Components Suppressed) and then loading only the components of interest is more efficient than loading the entire assembly. Positional representations Capture kinematic "snapshots" of assemblies to evaluate various assembly positions and conduct motion studies. Level of Detail representations Specify which components are loaded into memory. Create several representations to load different components of the assembly for different tasks.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Dependencies in assemblies
The assembly browser is a hierarchical structure that shows component relationships and dependencies. Component relationships are defined by assembly constraints that control position and size and determine how adaptive components change. How does position in the browser affect component behavior? What affects component position? What affects component size? How are adaptive components controlled? Can dependencies be derived from equations?

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Templates for assemblies
Concept Procedure

Create templates for assemblies All new assembly files are created with a template. You can create your own templates and add them to the templates provided by Autodesk Inventor. 1. Create an assembly, using an existing template. 2. Set the default units of measurement. 3. If needed, change the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate the average assembly size. 4. Set the properties for the file. 5. Save the file in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a subfolder of Templates. An assembly file automatically becomes a template when it is saved to the Templates folder.
Note The file standard.iam in the Templates folder is the default assembly

template. To replace the default template, remove standard.iam and replace it with a template that has the same name.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Assembly browser
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Assembly browser Graphically illustrates assembly hierarchy. Shows and hides selected components, filters, and arranges contents, manages access to component and constraint editing, and provides alternate access to functions from the context menu. Controls assembly feature roll back and participation of components in each feature. Access: In an assembly file, click item to select, and then right-click to display context menu.

Browser filters Representations Browser views Find Context menu options

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Adjust the browser hierarchy
Concept Procedure

Restructure assemblies You can move one or more existing components, including component patterns, within an assembly or from one assembly to another assembly. You must have read and write privileges to the origin and target assembly files. A component does not move relative to other components in the graphics window, even when you change its position in the assembly browser. Constraints between components that originate from the same parent assembly or subassembly are retained. Restructure an assembly by dragging a component Restructure an assembly using Promote and Demote

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Improve workflow with user-defined folders
Concept Procedure

Create and use folders Create browser folders and use them based on your design needs. You can choose to populate your assembly browser with folders before you have placed a single component. Then, as you place components and create features, you move the browser nodes into the appropriate folders. Alternatively, you can completely design your assembly, then define your folders and move browser nodes into them. Use these techniques, or a combination thereof, to order and simplify your assembly browser. You have two methods available to create your browser folders. You can create empty folders, or pre-select browser nodes and add them to new folders. Create new folder Add to new folder Select folder items Edit folders: drag and drop behavior Delete folder Tips

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Assembly coordinate system
The assembly coordinate system describes component position in an assembly along three axes: the X axis (the horizontal reference), the Y axis (the vertical reference), and the Z axis (the depth reference). Where is the origin of the assembly coordinate system? What is the location of the first placed component? Can a part have an absolute position?

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Model in assembly section views
Concept Procedure

Create assembly section views

Create a section view to visualize portions of an assembly within chambers or obscured by components. While the assembly is sectioned, use part and assembly commands to create or modify parts in the assembly context. To begin, open an assembly file containing one or more components. 1. If appropriate, specify if you want to section standard parts in the assembly. Click All Parts check box. Options Assembly tab. Select the Section

2. Set visibility for components. Select the component in the graphics window or the browser, then: To hide components, right-click and clear the check mark beside Visibility. To show components in wireframe for context, right-click and clear the check mark beside Enabled. 3. On the View tab, Appearance panel, click one of the Section View commands, then select any planar or work plane to define the cutting plane.

Creates Quarter section view. Creates Half section view.

Creates Three-Quarter section view. Sets assembly to no section view.
Note From Quarter section and Three-quarter section views, you

can right-click and select the opposite view. 4. Right-click and select Flip, if necessary, to display the desired view of the section. 5. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Create. When prompted to select a sketch plane, select the plane used to define the section. 6. If desired, click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Cut Edges to project edges of a part cut by the section plane onto the sketch plane. 7. Use sketch and feature commands to create new geometry.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Cross-part sketches in assemblies
Concept Procedure

Break links from referenced sketches When creating a part in an assembly, you can project edges, loops, and faces from one part into the sketch of the new part feature. By default, the resulting geometry is a cross-part sketch. The Cross Part Geometry Projection option on the Assembly tab of the Application Options dialog box makes the projected geometry associative to the parent part by default. If you later want to make the associative part independent of its parent part in the assembly, you can break the associative link. To begin, open the assembly containing the part with the link you want to break: 1. In the browser, expand the assembly hierarchy, right-click the part you want to make independent, and then select Edit. 2. Expand the feature containing the reference sketch. Right-click the Reference sketch symbol , and then select Break Link. The Reference sketch symbol is removed from the browser. The sketch geometry changes from reference geometry to normal geometry. You can add dimensions and constraints as needed.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Fundamentals >

Resolve a file search
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Resolve Link Provides a method to specify the current location of a file that is not found automatically when you open an Autodesk Inventor assembly. Access: The Resolve Link dialog box opens if the automatic search for a referenced file fails when the referencing file is opened. The automatic search fails to find a file if: Paths to referenced files are not specified in the active project. The referenced file or a folder that contained it was renamed, moved, or deleted, and no longer exists within any of the storage locations defined by the active project. The file was moved from one library to another. The file was moved from one subfolder to another within a storage location or a library. The file was moved from one subfolder to another within a storage location. Look in Displays the active path. To change the path, click the arrow and navigate to the desired folder. Shows each file location and its subfolders defined in the project. Click a file location to make it active. The contents of the location are listed in the main window of the dialog box. Click a file to see a preview. The name of the file that is being referenced, or the file name selected in the main window of the dialog box. Filters the file list of files to include only files of a specific type. Click the arrow to display the list, and then click to select a file type.

Locations

File name

File of type

Open Find Skip

Opens the selected file. Opens the Find dialog box so that you can define searches to find files. Discontinues search for the specified file. The assembly, drawing, or presentation opens without the referenced file. A skipped file is marked with a red question mark in the assembly browser and is not shown in the graphic window. You can select an unresolved file and delete it or replace it. Note You cannot create a drawing view or assembly presentation or open a drawing or presentation of an assembly with skipped components. Discontinues search for all files with unresolved links. The assembly opens without the referenced components.

Skip All

Unresolved Reference File Name Relative Path The name of the referenced component file that is not found. The subdirectory where files are being searched, relative to each storage location defined in the active project. The name of the library from which the searched component is referenced. Available only if the missing component is referenced from a library. The name of the file that is being opened and that contains the component reference that is not found. The name of the library where the source file is found. Available only if the source file is a library. Ends the top level Open operation.

Library Name

File containing the reference Library Cancel (More) Search for other unresolved references using the

Check to activate the search for other unresolved references using the information you enter in the Substitution Rule section. Remove the check mark if you do not want to search for other unresolved references using the information you

using the following rule. Substitution Rule Leading portion of the Referenced relative Path to replace Replacement Path Replacement Library

unresolved references using the information you enter. Use this section if you can enter path information to locate missing components. The portion of the existing referenced relative path to replace to find the missing referenced component.

Enter the path to a location where the missing referenced component can be found. Enter the name of the library where the missing referenced library component can be found. Available only if the missing component is referenced from a library.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Top-down design
Topics in this section Top-down, bottom-up, middle-out design Layout Sketch blocks in layouts Make part and make components

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Top-down, bottom-up, middle-out design
Concept Procedure

Skeletal Modeling Skeletal Modeling (a type of Top-down Design) is a technique that facilitates centralized design criteria and creates components that reference those criteria. Although many variations of this technique exist, the basic workflows are as follows.
Note Use the common origin workflow to derive shape and position to your new

components. Use the position independent workflow to derive shape only. With position independent components, changes to the position of sketch geometry in your layout do not require component revisions. Also use the position independent workflow with sketch blocks to create kinematic layouts; Make Components translates sketch constraints to equivalent assembly constraints to achieve the kinematic behavior. Common origin Position independent

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Layout
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Make layout Creates a layout part in an assembly. Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab New Layout Name Template New File Location Component panel Make Layout

Input name of your new part file.

Select or browse to the part template from which the new file is created. Input or browse to the save location for the new file.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Sketch blocks in layouts
Use sketch blocks in your layout to represent components. Once a sketch block is created, you can easily add instances of the block to your layout. For components used in multiple locations, it provides a quick, associative method for adding them to the design. Any changes to the block definition are propagated to all block instances. A powerful use of sketch blocks is the creation of flexible, nested blocks. This type of block allows you to simulate assembly and subassembly kinematics in your layout. You can evaluate your design and change the design before you make components. You can also evaluate the impact of any changes in your design. If changes to the sketch block definition are made, the block instances are updated.
Note Sketch blocks can be constrained to other sketch blocks, as well as

projected and primitive geometry. However, only sketch constraints between blocks are translated during the Make Components workflow. Learn more about sketch blocks.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Top-down design >

Make part and make components
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Make part Creates a part file and derives the selected objects from the source part into the new part. Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Ribbon: Sketch tab Layout panel Layout panel Make Part Make Part

Derive style

Derives a single, merged body without seams between planar faces.

Derives a single solid body with seams between planar faces. Individual component colors of planar faces are preserved. Derives a single part that retains each component as an individual solid body. For example, an assembly with 20 parts derives to a part with 20 solid bodies.

Derives a single composite surface feature. The composite retains the seams between planar faces and preserves unique part colors. Status Includes the selected objects in the derive operation. Some child objects are included and some excluded. Excludes the selected objects from the derive operation.

Part information

Part name. Enter the name of your new part. Template. Select or browse to the part template from which the new part is created. New file location. Enter or browse to the location where the new part is saved. Use to select a part that exists, if appropriate. Default BOM structure. Select the bill of materials structure for the new part.

Place part in target assembly

Select to place the new part into an assembly. If this option is selected, the Make Part process will: Create a target assembly and insert your new part. The part is grounded at the assembly origin. Open the target assembly as the active window. The new part and target assembly are not automatically saved to disk. You save both when the target assembly is saved. If this option is cleared, the Make Part process will: Create a part file. Open the part file as the active window. The part file is not automatically saved. Save the new file. Target assembly name. Enter the name of your new assembly. Template. Select or browse to the assembly template from which the new assembly is created. New file location. Enter or browse to the location where the new assembly is saved. Use to select an assembly that exists, if appropriate. Default BOM structure. Select the bill of materials structure for the new assembly.

Assembly information

Show all objects Scale factor

Select to show all derivable objects regardless of their Export status. Select or enter a scale factor to apply to the derived objects. The default value is 1.0.

Note Selected sketch block definitions and their

instances are scaled. The scale factor is appended to the block name to indicate the block was scaled. Mirror assembly Select to mirror the assembly. Specify the XY, XZ, or YZ origin work plane as the mirror plane. Note Sketch block instances of selected block definitions are mirrored. However, the block definitions are not mirrored. Click OK to execute Make Part and close the dialog box. The target part and target assembly are not saved to disk. You save both when the target assembly is closed. Click Apply to execute Make Part and keep open the dialog box. The target part and target assembly are saved to disk but neither are opened. The source part window remains open and the Make Part command remains active so you can continue to select different objects and create more parts.

OK

Apply

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies >

Components
Topics in this section Assembly components Choose the first assembly component Place components in assemblies Adjust visibility of components Create parts in assemblies iAssemblies iAssembly auto-capture Assembly components in patterns Copied assembly components Mirrored assembly components Occurrence properties in components Use colors to distinguish components

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Assembly components
Concept Procedure Quick Reference

Place or Replace Component Specifies one or more files to place as a component in an assembly.
Note You can open multiple files that are in sequence by holding down the SHIFT

key. You can also select multiple files that are not in sequence by holding down the CTRL key. Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Place In an assembly file, right-click an assembly in the browser and select Component Replace Component. If you have Vault installed and are placing (or replacing) a file in the vault, click Open from Vault located under Quick Launch for immediate access to your vaulted files. Shows path of the active directory. The main window shows a list of the subfolders and files in the selected path. Double-click a subfolder to show the files it contains, or click a file to select it. You can also double-click the file to open it. Specifies the file to open, enter a file name, or select a file from the listed files. Filters file list to include only files of a specific type. Click the arrow to show list, and then highlight to select a file type. Displays the active project. Places the selected file into the active assembly. Cancels the file open operation and closes the dialog box. Opens the Find Files dialog box so you can search for files based on file properties.

Quick Launch

Look in File list

File name Files of type

Project File Open Cancel Find

search for files based on file properties. Options Interactively place with iMates Opens an options dialog box so that you can set the options for the selected file. Inserts components with matching iMates in an assembly. You can place multiple instances of the component. When placing members of an iPart or iAssembly factory, iMates are matched according to how they are specified in the factory. One member may include iMates with no offset value, while another can be offset a specified amount. Inserts component and simultaneously solves all accepted iMate matches. Terminates command after each insertion.

Automatically generate iMates on place

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components >

Choose the first assembly component
Concept Procedure

Place the first assembly component To begin creating an assembly, choose a fundamental part or subassembly such as a frame or base plate as the first component. When the first component is placed in the assembly, its origin is coincident and aligned with the assembly coordinate origin. All degrees of freedom are removed from the first component.

1. To create a file, on the Quick Access toolbar, click New, select an assembly template, and click OK. 2. On the ribbon, click Assemble tab Component panel Place to place the first component. 3. Go to the folder that contains the component, select the component, and click Open. Alternately, if Vault is installed and you open a file in the vault, click Open from Vault located under Quick Launch for immediate access to your vaulted files. 4. Click to continue placing occurrences of the component as needed, right-click, and then select Done. If you must relocate the grounded component, use one of the following methods. To restore degrees of freedom to the component To enter precise displacement coordinates

New File Location Default BOM Structure Virtual Component Constrain sketch plane to selected face . Note You can override the structure to be Reference at the component instance level.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > Place components in assemblies Concept Procedure Quick Reference Create in-place component Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Create New Component Name Template Specifies file name for the new component. If you prefer. Select the check box to create a virtual component. Sets the template used to create the file. The option is not available if the new component is the first one in the assembly. Sets the default BOM structure for the component. Note A virtual component is a component that requires no modeling of geometry and no file. a mate constraint is created between the selected part face and the sketch plane. Click the button next to the Template list box to display the Open Template dialog box. clear the check box to prevent the automatic constraint. To find the part when the assembly is opened. Sets the location of the new file. specify its directory by a path in the project used for the assembly. By default.

Double-click an invisible component in the browser to edit it. Invisible components are not visible for selection in the graphics window.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > Adjust visibility of components Concept Procedure Quick Reference Component visibility and enabled status Sets component visibility in graphics on or off and sets component enabled status (selectability) on or off. The component is still loaded into memory. Select an invisible component from the browser. By default. and select either Visibility or Enabled. Enabled components are loaded in an assembly file. Visibility status determines whether a component occurrence appears in the graphics window. but its graphics are useful for a frame of reference. Show Me Note It is possible to turn off component visibility but have the component still be enabled. The component appears in the graphics window according to the Enabled layout settings in the Application Options. . the component appears semi-transparent. The assembly calculates faster because the data structure of not enabled components is not present. and the status changes to visible automatically. Occurrence tab. Adjust the visibility or enabled status from either the context menu or the Properties dialog box. right-click. Visible and enabled components can be selected in the graphics window. Access: Select the component. This technique is useful for quickly removing a needed component from view. Visible but not enabled components cannot be selected in the graphics window. and then right-click to change its status. Enabled status determines whether a component occurrence can be selected. Display tab. They are displayed in background style. while only the graphic portion of not enabled components are loaded.

a message warns you that someone has edited a file while you had it open.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > Create parts in assemblies Concept Procedure Quick Reference Multiple components with older versions When you save a file or first edit a component. or presentation file that contains reserved components Replaces changes made to the file by the other person. Access: Save or edit an assembly. and the date it changed. drawing. the name of the person who changed it. Click to show list of components. OK More .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > iAssemblies Concept Procedure Quick Reference iAssembly Author Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Create iAssembly Author overview iAssembly tabs .

it is created. New columns are not created for modifications to items that are not already in the table. If a column for a modified item is not yet in the table. edits to items that are already configured adjust all cells in the column to match the new value.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > iAssembly auto-capture When editing an iPart or iAssembly factory. with the new value set for the active row and the original value set for all other rows. . you can use conventional modeling commands to make edits that affect the table. Other members are not updated with the change. For Edit Member Scope. This technique efficiently creates a factory without requiring the table editor or Excel to make modifications. model edits that can be configured modify the active row of the table. the modification only changes the cell in the current row. Note Use caution when applying a global change to all factory members. For Edit Factory Scope. You could inadvertently change a required value that works in the current member but causes errors in another member. If the item is already configured in the table. Use the Edit Scope selector to switch the modeling scope between Edit Member (the active row) and Edit Factory (all rows).

Patterns may be made associative to a part feature pattern so that changes to the pattern add to or subtract components in the assembly pattern.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > Assembly components in patterns Concept Procedure Quick Reference Pattern components Duplicates one or more components and arranges the resulting occurrences in a circular or rectangular pattern. Constraints or iMates are retained whenever possible if they are included in a pattern. Individual or all occurrences can have visibility turned on or off. Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Pattern Component Associative tab Rectangular tab Circular tab . Rectangular and circular patterns can use patterned features on a part to set number and spacing.

Excludes the component from the copy operation. If the copy status of the parent changes. Creates a copy of the component. creation of a new instance. create an instance of. You can switch between the two dialog boxes. Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Copy The Copy command has two dialog boxes: Copy Components: Status. Provides the following command buttons. For more information about the File Names dialog box. which enables you to select components and set copy status. You can copy. see the Mirror/Copy Components: File Names reference. Copy Components: File Name. Status symbols Indicates the status of components selected for copy.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > Copied assembly components Concept Procedure Quick Reference Copy Components: Status The Copy command creates copies of the selected components. or exclude the components that you select in the Copy Components: Status dialog box. Creates an instance of the component. Each copied component is saved in a new file. which enables you to designate the file name. enabling you to change the status on multiple selected components at the same time. which is not associative to the source file. all children are reset to the same status automatically. In addition to Status commands . or exclusion. The Copy Components: Status dialog box contains these elements: Components Select the components in the graphics window or the browser to include all child components in the copy operation.

see the Mirror/Copy Components: File Names reference. or exclusion. Reuse Standard Content and Factory Parts Next Restricts library components and iParts from being copied. . For more information about Copy Components: File Names. Instances of library parts and iParts are created instead and are resident in the current assembly file. click an individual symbol to change its status. In addition to using the status command buttons at the top of the dialog box.Status symbols creation of a new instance. Indicates that a subassembly contains components with different statuses. Opens the Copy Components: File Names dialog box.

click the file location. manually renamed files have a yellow background. or Copy Components: File Names dialog box specifies names for part and assembly files created with the Mirror or Copy command. and then type the path or browse for the desired folder. Source Path is the default and means that the file is saved at the same location as the original component. Copied Components: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Copy When the components to copy are selected. Names created automatically have a white background. Right-click to change the setting to Workspace or User Path. Click a name to edit. Name New Name Lists all components created by the mirror (or copy) operation. and select Find to search in listed file names. click OK in the Copy Components dialog box to open the Copy Components: File Names dialog box. Access: Mirrored Components: Ribbon: Assemble tab Component panel Mirror When the components to mirror are selected.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > Mirrored assembly components Concept Procedure Quick Reference Mirror/Copy Components: File Names The Mirror Components: File Names. Right-click in the New Name column. If a name exists. or select Replace to find and replace a string in listed file names. Repeated components are shown only once. To specify the User Path. Lists names of new files. Specifies where the new file is saved. new file names are enumerated sequentially until a unique name is defined. Indicates if the new file name is valid. click Next in the Mirror Components dialog box to open the Mirror Components: File Names dialog box. and name conflicts are shown File Location Status .

where you can select components. Select Increment to name numbered files incrementally. however the entire assembly must be like the source assembly. but is a valid name for the selected components. . it is overwritten. Specifies the destination of the mirrored or copied components. If you previously manually changed a name. and name conflicts are shown with a red background. Insert in Assembly Open in New Window The default option places all new components as peer objects in the top-level assembly. Reusing parts has no restrictions. and does not exist in the file location. New File Reuse Existing Indicates the new file name is valid. Opens a new window with the new assembly containing all mirrored components. Component Destination Return to Selection Returns to the Mirror Components dialog box. Name Conflict Naming Scheme Renames selected components in the Name column with a specified Prefix or Suffix (the default suffix is _MIR for mirrored components and _CPY for copied components) after you click Apply.files have a yellow background. Indicates that the file name exists in the file location (for assemblies) or that there is another instance of the same source assembly with the same name. Indicates that the file name is already used in the file location. Assembly components can be reused. Click Revert to return to previous version of name.

Specifies whether the component is visible. and then click the Occurrence tab. and offset from parent assembly origin. enabled. Sets occurrence name. color style. right-click a part or subassembly. or displays degrees of freedom. select iProperties.Occurrence tab Controls characteristics for an individual occurrence of a component in an assembly. Access: In the browser. adaptive. grounded. Name Properties Current Offset from Parent Assembly Origin .Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > Occurrence properties in components Concept Procedure Quick Reference iProperties .

Select the component in the browser or the graphics window. If you create a design view representation. instead of using the color associated with the material specified for the component. 2. but you can use color to make a complex assembly easier to interpret. Scroll through the color list and click to select one. The color is applied to the component. 1. For example. Display components from a different vendor in a second color. On the Quick Access toolbar.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Components > Use colors to distinguish components Concept Procedure Apply colors to components All components are displayed in the As Material color style. 3. the color preference is saved with that view. you can display all components created by one vendor in one color. Changing a component color in an assembly affects only that occurrence. It does not change the material color in Occurrence Properties. click the down arrow on the Color box. .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints Topics in this section Introducing constraints Assembly constraints overview Degrees of freedom in assemblies Assembly constraint errors and recovery Component collision and contact iMates .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > Introducing constraints .

Constrain. Second UCS Selects the second UCS. First UCS Selects the first UCS. and then reselect.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > Assembly constraints overview Concept Procedure Quick Reference Assembly constraints . Use when UCSs are in close proximity or partially obscure one another. To select different first UCS. click First UCS. Clear the check box to restore feature priority selection mode. You can select UCS in part or assembly file. Show Preview Select the check box to preview the constraint to apply. created between the corresponding pairs of YZ.Constraint Set tab Constraint Set enables you to constrain two UCSs together. and then Selections Selects two UCSs to constrain together. Pick Part First Limits the selectable UCS to a single component. and XY planes. Constraint set UCS to UCS results in three Mate constraints. . Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Position panel click the Constraint Set tab. XZ.

right-click. Drag the component to the new location. . 1. Right-click the component. 2. and then clear the Grounded check mark. Grounded components are identified by a pushpin icon in the browser. Select the grounded component in the graphics window or the browser. Any components constrained to the grounded component also move.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > Degrees of freedom in assemblies Concept Procedure Restore degrees of freedom to grounded components You can restore degrees of freedom to a grounded (base) component and reposition it. 3. and select Grounded to fix the location.

In an assembly. including isolation. You can progressively isolate components by starting at a high-level assembly. click the components you want to isolate in the graphics window or the browser. Right-click a component in the browser and select Isolate Constraint. Note Use Isolate to identify constraint errors. 1. use Isolate as a treatment to find the constraint. but unlike Undo. All components are made invisible except the two participants in the constraint. and work down the browser tree. Right-click in the graphics window or the browser.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > Assembly constraint errors and recovery Concept Procedure Isolate assembly components Use Isolate to turn off visibility of all components except the components you selected. All unselected components are set to Invisible status. Component visibility is turned back on to the state before they were isolated. and then select Undo Isolate. Undo "backs up" through the last-performed operations in reverse order. isolating to smaller sets of components. . operations performed in the isolated state remain intact. and then select Isolate. For example: When the Design Doctor displays. Undo Isolate is available only after you isolate components. Right-click. 2. Use Undo Isolate instead of Undo to restore components to the pre-isolation state.

2. Activate the Contact Solver. In the Interactive Contact box. and move the components or drive constraints to simulate the action. Open an assembly with components you must evaluate for contact. and designate components to include in the contact set. 1. On the ribbon. Apply constraints to position the components as intended. Contact Solver Off to turn off solver analysis. click Tools tab panel Document Settings Modeling tab. Options . All Components to analyze all components in the assembly for contact. select: Contact Set Only to limit participation in contact analysis to the selected components.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > Component collision and contact Concept Procedure Detect contact between assembly components The contact solver isolates selected components in a contact set so you can determine if the components behave in a mechanical motion as expected.

. interference. Note If you prefer. This option switches the setting on the Document Settings Modeling tab on and off. select Inspect tab Interference panel Activate Contact Solver. adjust the component positions and repeat the analysis. Reference components are analyzed regardless of visibility or enabled status. and select Properties. Click Apply to continue selecting options or OK to close the dialog box. 3. Move the components or drive constraints through the intended motion. 4. and then click OK. clear the check mark on Visibility or Enabled to remove the components from analysis for contact. Not available if Contact Solve Off is selected. On the Occurrence tab. right-click one or more components and select Contact Set to include them in the contact set. or collision. right-click one or more components. If you prefer. If necessary.Surface Complexity to specify the level of performance according to surface complexity. In the browser. Note On the context menu. select the Contact Set option. Correctly positioned components should complete the motion as intended.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates Concept Procedure Create an iPart factory Create iMates Modify an iMate Place components that have matching iMates Control iMate visibility .

You can iFeature iFeature iFeature changes also create a table-driven iPart and use it to create a table-driven if the entire part is going to be used as an iFeature. you define the parameters and properties that must change for each part. . Save the part file if you want to preserve a copy of the original iPart. Use the Extract command to save the iPart as an iFeature. materials. use the iFeature Author to make to the table. Note There is no link between the original iPart and the iFeature.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates > Use iMates in iParts and iAssemblies Concept Procedure Create an iPart factory A good candidate for an iPart factory is a basic part you use often in different sizes. or mounting configurations. Once the table-driven is saved to the catalog location. When you transform a part to an iPart factory.

In previous versions. you can add or edit members in an embedded Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. click Options in the iPart Author dialog box to set up a different naming scheme. Now. Each member name is incremented. each table row is a member of the iPart. Optionally. Set up part parameters Create a standard iPart Create a custom iPart Generate new member files . You can create a standard iPart factory or a custom iPart factory. Note Add the file locations to the active project because iPart members are stored according to your search paths in the active project. you define individual members of the iPart factory by specifying its values. a Member column in the iPart table generates a default file name based on the factory name.In the iPart Author table. or enter a new name in the member cell. If you prefer. legacy iParts concatenated Key values to create a file name. For standard iParts.

revolve. Access: In the browser. and circular extruded part and assembly features. Note Inferred iMate definitions are placed only on closed loops.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates > iMate fundamentals Concept Procedure Quick Reference Infer (Feature) iMates Creates iMates on hole. and then select Infer iMates. If you leave the Name field blank. the name is automatically assigned according to the constraint type. Enter a name to apply to all inferred iMate definitions. right-click a feature. Name .

iMates are identified by symbols that show the type and state of the iMate. Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel iMate Assembly tab Motion tab Name and Match List . Multiple iMates can be defined on a single part. and can be renamed to correspond with a matching constraint in other parts.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Constraints > iMates > Name and match iMates Concept Quick Reference Create iMate Defines constraint pairs called iMates to specify how parts connect when inserted in an assembly.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications Topics in this section Edit assemblies Move and rotate assembly components Replace assembly components Delete assembly components .

click Tools tab Options panel Application Options. When deferring updates. Click Update to regenerate only the active part or subassembly and its dependent children. placing a constraint. Global Update is the default choice. You can trigger Update automatically or set an option to defer updates while you continue to work. On the ribbon. Select the appropriate option: Click Global Update when one or more components have significant changes. To defer updates: 1. and then select the Defer Update check box to defer updates until you click Update in the active file. or editing a constraint). . part positions will not change until you use the Update command. All components. 2. update. The Update command dims to show the file is fully up-to-date. Click the Assembly tab. 3.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications > Edit assemblies Concept Procedure Update part and assembly files The Update command incorporates changes to parts or assembly components that are held in memory from the current editing session. When significant changes have been made to a part file or assembly component (for example. editing a part in the assembly. 2. To manually apply edits to a part file or to one or all components of the current assembly: 1. Click the arrow beside the Update command on the Quick Access toolbar. The Update command changes to indicate whether an assembly is fully up to date. The graphics window and browser update to show the changes. Clear the check box to update automatically. including the toplevel assembly.

The Back icon is always included so that you can back out of your selections and deselect the geometry while keeping the command active. Moved to a position defined by the selected snap point.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications > Move and rotate assembly components Concept Procedure Quick Reference Grip Snap Move Options Bar Provides a set of icons that represent the possible options available to define the behavior of the geometric entity you selected. Move option selections and results Point as first selection. the move option icons are displayed when you select the geometry you want to use as the basis of a move or rotation. Moved to a position defined by the cursor on the selected line. point line . Access: With the Grip Snap command active. followed by: Move Option Selection Free Drag Second Selection none Third Selection Result for selection set: Repositioned so the origin is coincident with the selected point in space.

plane Moved to a position defined by the cursor on the selected plane. Reference Geometry Displacement point line Free Rotate none Reference Geometry Rotate point Line (linear edge. implicit ray) as first selection. Moved (as applied to the point originally selected as the origin of the selection set) by the direction and magnitude derived from the 2 points selected. work axis. Moved (as applied to the point originally selected as the origin of the selection set) by the direction and magnitude derived from the lines definition. followed by: Move Option Selection Free Drag Second Selection none Third Selection Result for selection set: Repositioned so the cursor pick point origin on the edge is coincident with the selected point in space. The selected point in space defines the termination point for the rotation whip. moved to a position defined point line . Moved to a position defined by the selected snap point. centerline. point Rotated about an axis defined by the 2 points selected (Cross Product) The angle of rotation is taken from the same 2 points (Dot Product). Rotated about its origin point in all 3 planes. Based upon the pick point.

You can enter an offset value. Moved to a position defined by the intersection of the endpoint of the line (select other to toggle) and an intersection plane. Move Along Ray none Moved to a position defined by the selected point in space along the ray of displacement. Rotated about an axis defined by the selected line. The selected point in space defines the input for the rotation angle. plane Reference Geometry Displacement Along Ray point line Free Rotate none point Reference Geometry Rotate point line Line . Rotated about an axis defined by the selected line. Rotated about an axis defined by the selected line.moved to a position defined by a selected pick point on the line. Point Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the 2 points selected along the ray of displacement. The selected snap point defines the input for the rotation angle. The angle of rotation is derived from selected points. Collinearity is established. You can enter an offset value. Point Rotated about an axis defined by the selected line. Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the lines definition along the ray of displacement.

Repositioned so the cursor pick point origin on the curve is coincident with the selected point on the line/edge. point Moved by the direction and magnitude derived from the 2 points selected. point line/edge plane/surface Reference Geometry Displacement point . You can enter an offset value. You can enter an offset value. followed by: Move Option Selection Free Drag Second Selection none Third Selection Result for selection set: Repositioned so the cursor pick point origin on the curve is coincident with the selected point in space. Curve (spline edge) as first selection. The angle of rotation is derived from selected lines (must be parallel to axis of rotation). Repositioned so the cursor pick point origin on the curve is coincident with the selected snap point. plane Plane Rotated about an axis defined by the selected line.defined by the selected line. Repositioned so the cursor pick point origin on the curve is coincident with the selected point on the face or surface. The angle of rotation is derived from the normal of the selected planes (must not intersect the axis of rotation).

line Moved by the direction and magnitude derived from the definition of the line. Moved to a position defined by selected point in space along the ray of displacement. point line circular/arc edge analytic/NURB surface Move Along Ray none . Repositioned so the cursor pick point origin on the edge is coincident with the selected point on the surface. Repositioned so the cursor pick point origin on the edge is coincident with the selected snap point.Vector (circular edge. Circle . An insert is established and flip is used to change between inside and outside. Repositioned so the origin edge is coplanar with the selected circular/arc edge and the respective centerlines/vectors are collinear. followed by: Move Option Selection Free Drag Second Selection none Third Selection Result for selection set: Repositioned so the cursor pick point origin on the edge is coincident with the selected point in space. arc edge) as first selection. Repositioned so the cursor pick point origin on the edge is coincident with the selected point on the line.

point Rotated about an axis defined by the circle-vector centerline. The angle of rotation is derived from the selected lines (must be parallel to axis of rotation). You can enter an offset value. You can enter a value for the offset. The angle of rotation is derived from the selected snap point. A selected point in space defines the input for the rotation angle. Rotated about an axis defined by the circle-vector centerline. Rotated about an axis defined by the circle-vector centerline. The angle of Reference Geometry Displacement Along Ray point line Free Rotate none point Reference Geometry Rotate point line line plane plane . The angle of rotation is derived from the selected points. You can enter an offset value. Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the lines definition along the ray of displacement. point Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the 2 points selected along the ray of displacement.plane Moved to a position defined by the intersection of the endpoint of the line (select other to toggle) and an intersection plane. Rotated about an axis defined by the circle-vector centerline. Rotated about an axis defined by the circle-vector centerline.

The angle of rotation is derived from the normal of the selected planes (must not intersect the axis of rotation). moved to a position defined by the selected snap point. and you can use flip to change between mate and flush. Plane (planar face. work plane) as first selection. You can enter an offset value. moved to a position defined by the selected pick point on the plane. Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the plane is coincident with the selected point on the line/edge. point line plane Move Planar none . Based upon the cursor pick point. Based upon the cursor pick point. in Grip Snap followed by: Move Option Selection Free Drag Second Selection none Third Selection Result for selection set: Positioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the plane is coincident with the selected point in space.centerline. Repositioned (within the restricted plane defined by the initial selection) so that the cursor pick point origin on the plane is coincident with the selected relative point in space. A coplanar condition is established.

conical. Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the lines definition along the ray of displacement. spherical. Moved to a position defined by the selected point in space along the ray of displacement. line Analytical Surface (Cylindrical. line Move Along Normal none Reference Geometry Displacement Along Normal point Point Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the 2 points selected along the ray of displacement. toroidal face) as first selection: Move Option Selection Free Drag Second Selection none Third Selection Result for selection set: Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the analytical surface is coincident with the selected point in space. point line/edge . Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the definition of the line within the plane of displacement. Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the analytical surface is coincident with the selected point on the line or edge. Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the analytical surface is coincident with the selected snap point.Reference Geometry Displacement Within Plane point Point Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the 2 points selected within the plane of displacement.

and you can use flip to change between inside and outside. Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the analytical surface is coincident with the selected point on the NURB surface. cylindrical.line or edge. face/plane Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the analytical surface is coincident with the selected point on the face or plane. point Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the 2 points selected within the plane of displacement. Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on point . Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the analytical surface is coincident with the selected point on the destination surface. spherical. A tangency is established. Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the definition of the line within the plane of displacement. conical & toroidal surfaces NURB surface Reference Geometry Displacement point line NURB Surface (non-uniform rational B-spline surface) as first selection: Move Option Selection Free Drag Second Selection none Third Selection Result for selection set: Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the surface is coincident with the selected point in space.

line/edge Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the surface is coincident with the selected point on the line or edge. Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the definition of the line within the plane of displacement. point Moved the magnitude of the component derived from the 2 points selected within the plane of displacement. plane/surface Reference Geometry Displacement point line Move option icons and behavior descriptions Entity Selected Icon Tool tip description of behavior Point Free Drag Move point using reference geometry Rotate about point Rotate about point using reference geometry . Repositioned so that the cursor pick point origin on the surface is coincident with the selected point on the face or surface.cursor pick point origin on the surface is coincident with the selected snap point.

Line Free Drag Drag Along Ray Move along ray using reference geometry Rotate about line Rotate about line using reference geometry Plane Free Drag Drag Planar Move planar using reference geometry Drag along normal Move along normal using reference geometry Curve Free Drag Move point using reference geometry CircleVector Free Drag .

Drag along axis Move along axis using reference geometry Rotate about axis Rotate about axis using reference geometry. Analytic Surface Free Drag Move point using reference geometry NURB Surface Free Drag Move point using reference geometry .

apply assembly constraints as needed to remove degrees of freedom. On the Assemble tab. In that case. You can select a different member of the factory or create a new member using the Place iPart or Place iAssembly dialog box. Component panel. click the down arrow on the Replace command. select the component to replace. constraints are retained. The new component or multiple occurrences are placed in the same location as the original components.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications > Replace assembly components Concept Procedure Replace assembly components You can replace one assembly component with another component or replace all occurrences of the component in the current assembly. In the browser or the graphics window. go to the folder that contains the component. A message notifies you that constraints and iMates will be retained. select the component. and then click a component to replace. 3. 1. Click Replace All. some constraints may not survive and must be reapplied. the Open dialog box browses to the factory file of the member. The origin of the replacement component is coincident with the origin of the replaced component. Click OK to continue or Cancel to discontinue replacing a component. and then click Open. if possible. and then choose one of the following: Click Replace. If some constraints were not retained. 2. . In the Open dialog box. unless the replacement part has a different shape. and then click the component to replace all occurrences in the current assembly. Note When you replace a component with a member of an iAssembly or iPart. 4. If possible.

To delete a part created in place. Note To delete a component nested within a subassembly. You can then select and delete its components.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Modifications > Delete assembly components Concept Procedure Delete assembly components When you delete components created in place or placed directly in an open assembly. The component is deleted from the current assembly. Press CTRL-X to cut the component from the assembly and move it to the Clipboard. you might need to reapply constraints or recreate features. Select a component in the graphics window or the browser. but can be pasted into another file. double-click the top-level assembly in the browser to activate the assembly. . Right-click and select Delete. double-click the subassembly in the graphics window or browser to open its file. and then choose one of the following actions: Press the Delete key.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features Topics in this section Assembly features 3D sweep features Sketches in assemblies .

3. drag the EOF symbol up the feature tree. Click and drag the EOF symbol up the tree to any location within the list of assembly features. 4. . 1. When rolled back. 2.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features > Assembly features Concept Procedure Roll back the state of assembly features To roll back the state of assembly features in the assembly. Repeat for each feature to roll back. When you drag the EOF symbol back down the tree within the list of assembly features. Click and drag the EOF symbol back down the tree to add features back in. those features are added back into the model. in the browser. anything under the EOF node is temporarily not included in the model. Open an assembly file that contains one or more assembly features.

Step 3: Create construction geometry to define a path for the spring Part 1 Step 4: Create construction geometry to define a path for the spring Part 2 . Begin by drawing construction lines based on the dimensions of the coil.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features > 3D sweep features Concept Procedure Create profiles for coil springs Follow these steps to create a coil with 12 revolutions. including: Spline 2D and 3D sketch Revolve Extrude Sweep Circular pattern Step 1: Create a planar spline to represent one revolution of the spring Step 2: Create a circle to represent the diameter of the spring. Several of the basic tools in Autodesk Inventor are used to create the 3D coil.

Step 5: Prepare for the Sweep command by creating a path for the spring Step 6: Prepare for the Sweep command by creating a profile for the spring Step 7: Sweep one revolution of the spring Step 8: Pattern the Sweep feature to complete the spring .

and weldments. holes. The following describes the characteristics of sketches created in an assembly file. such as cuts. Your design purpose determines which type of sketch you create: Create a sketch in a part file to create features that belong to a part. Create a sketch in an assembly file to create features that affect multiple parts.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Features > Sketches in assemblies Sketches in assemblies can be created in a part file or an assembly file. Projected geometry Sketches consumed by features Constraint behavior Shared sketches .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools Topics in this section Rename Browser Nodes Add Part Add Assembly Save and Replace Component Ground and Root Component Component Derive Place at Component Origin Alpha Sort Components Degree of Freedom Analysis Update Substitutes Create Substitutes Link Levels of Detail .

A numerical sequence identification number replaces the occurrence identification number. Terminates the command and closes the dialog box. Default . A numerical sequence identification number replaces the occurrence identification number.Resets any component browser node that was renamed manually to display using the file name of the component. By default the Part Number iProperty is initially populated with the Filename string. This command requires no component selection and acts upon all components within the assembly. this option is most useful after you set the Part Number property for each component. Apply Close . Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Nodes Productivity panel Rename Browser New Name Provides a selection list of three types of naming schemes for component browser nodes: Filename .Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Rename Browser Nodes Concept Procedure Quick Reference Rename Browser Nodes This command provides the means to identify all component nodes within an assembly using one of three naming schemes.Replaces the default or Filename with the Part Number defined in the component iProperties. Part Number . Applies the selected browser node naming scheme to all component nodes within the assembly. Components that do not have a defined Part Number attribute report <Missing Data> as the browser node name. Therefore.Returns the component browser node name and occurrence identification to the default file name.

Go to the folder one level above the current folder. . Defaults to the last folder used for a Save by Autodesk Inventor. Access Save in: Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Add Part Provides a selection list of folders. to create an empty part file. Create and name a new folder within the current folder. Create Component.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Add Part Concept Procedure Quick Reference Create Part This command provides a streamlined version of the Inventor default command. You name and save a part file you create using the Create Part dialog box. Provides the following options to redisplay the folder contents: Thumbnails Tiles Icons List Details Vertical Shortcut Panel Provides a view of recently used documents. Go to the last folder visited.

Provides a view of the My Documents folder. Defaults to the Inventor part (IPT) file type. Creates and saves the new empty part within the assembly. and a selection list of previously named files. Filename: Save as type: Save Cancel Provides the means to name the file you create. Provides a view of My Network Places locations. Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder.Provides a view of files stored on the desktop. Single selection of IPT is available in the selection list. Terminates the command and closes the dialog box. .

. Access Save in: Ribbon: Assemble tab Productivity panel Add Assembly Provides a selection list of folders. You name and save the assembly you create using the Create Assembly dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Add Assembly Concept Procedure Quick Reference Create Assembly This command provides a streamlined version of the Inventor default command Create Component. Go to the last folder visited. to create an empty assembly file. Defaults to the last folder used for a Save by Autodesk Inventor. Create and name a new folder within the current folder. Go to the folder one level above the current folder. Provides the following options to redisplay the folder contents: Thumbnails Tiles Icons List Details Vertical Shortcut Panel Provides a view of recently used documents.

Filename: Save as type: Save Cancel Provides the means to name the file you create.Provides a view of files stored on the desktop. Terminates the command and closes the dialog box. Provides a view of the My Documents folder. and a selection list of previously named files. Single selection of IAM is available in the selection list. Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder. Defaults to the Inventor assembly (IAM) file type. . Provides a view of My Network Places locations. Creates and saves the new empty subassembly within your assembly.

Provides the following options to redisplay the folder contents: Thumbnails Tiles Icons List Details Vertical Shortcut Panel Provides a view of recently used documents. Create and name a new folder within the current folder. Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Component Productivity panel Save and Replace Save in: Provides a selection list of folders.. Go to the folder one level above the current folder. . Go to the last folder visited. Defaults to the folder of the parent assembly.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Save and Replace Component Concept Procedure Quick Reference Create Part This command displays the dialog box during the save portion of the Save and replace component workflow.

Provides a view of files stored on the desktop. . and place the new copied part within your assembly. Filename: Save as type: Save Cancel Provides the means to name the file you create. Single selection of IPT is available in the selection list. Terminates the command and closes the dialog box. saves. Provides a view of the My Documents folder. Provides a view of My Network Places locations. and provides a selection list of previously named files. Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder. Creates. Defaults to the Inventor part (IPT) file type.

. The selected component is moved and grounded within the assembly and repositioned within the assembly browser structure. Ground the selected component.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Ground and Root Component Concept Procedure Ground and Root Component This command provides the means to select an existing component within an assembly structure and in a single operation: Move and align the origin of the selected component to the origin of the assembly. 1. Note If the selected component has existing assembly constraints that prevent it from being moved to and aligned with the assembly origin. additional conflicting constraints are applied. Productivity panel Ground and 2. click Assemble tab Root Component. Click to select the component to move and ground. Reposition the selected component as the first browser node in the assembly browser. On the ribbon. Your assembly displays a red Recover indication. The component is grounded and repositioned within the assembly browser node structure.

Access Ribbon: Assemble tab Derive Productivity panel Component Save in: Provides a selection list of folders. Defaults to the last folder used for a Save by Autodesk Inventor. Provides the following options to redisplay the folder contents: Thumbnails Tiles Icons List Details Vertical Shortcut Panel Provides a view of recently used documents. You use the Create Part (or Create Assembly) dialog box to name and save the new part (or assembly) file.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Component Derive Concept Procedure Quick Reference Create Part This command provides a streamlined Derive Component workflow. Create and name a new folder within the current folder. Go to the last folder visited. . Go to the folder one level above the current folder.

Filename: Save as type: Save Cancel Provides the means to name the file you create. Provides a view of My Network Places locations. and opens the new derived part or assembly for edit.Provides a view of files stored on the desktop. . Provides a view of the My Computer (root) folder. Creates. Terminates the Component derive tool and closes the dialog box. saves. Defaults to Inventor part (IPT) file type. Single selection of IPT is available in the selection list. and a selection list of previously named files. Provides a view of the My Documents folder.

4. . Click Open to place the component and close the dialog box. On the ribbon. and constrain a new component aligned to and coincident with the origin of a selected component within an existing assembly. In the Open dialog box. 3. place.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Place at Component Origin Concept Procedure Place at Component Origin Select. click Assemble tab Component Origin. 1. select the component to place. Productivity panel Place at 2. The component you select is placed and constrained in the assembly with its origin aligned to and coincident with the origin of the component you initially selected within the assembly. Click to select an existing component within your assembly.

To sort the components. click Assemble tab Component. . Productivity panel Alpha Sort The browser components display alphabetically.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Alpha Sort Components Concept Procedure Alpha Sort Components This command sorts the contents of the assembly browser alphabetically.

Provides the means to select and animate graphically the degrees of freedom of a component. Closes the dialog box. Degrees of Freedom Animate Freedom Cancel . Displays in a three-column table a list of components and translational and rotational degrees of freedom. Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Freedom Analysis Productivity panel Degree of Refresh List Updates the list of components when the active assembly is switched to another (already open) active assembly.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Degree of Freedom Analysis Concept Procedure Quick Reference Degree of Freedom Analysis This command displays a dialog box that lists the number of translational and rotational degrees of freedom for all the occurrences in the active assembly.

and the substitute parts update.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Update Substitutes Concept Procedure Update Substitutes From within your active assembly: 1. Note Refresh the view of your assembly to see the updated substitute parts. click Assemble tab Substitutes. 2. The informational dialog box closes. 3. On the ribbon. Productivity panel Update A dialog box reports how many substitutes must be updated. Click OK to continue the update. .

To enter a specific file name for the substitute part. Assembly Name column . Substitute Part Name column . and for naming the resulting substitute parts.The substitute part file is created in the same location as the source subassembly.Each cell in this column contains a default name for the substitute part file to be created. double-click slowly in the cell. File Location column . Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Substitutes Productivity panel Create Threecolumn table The Create Substitute dialog box displays a threecolumn table with a row for each first-level subassembly in the active assembly. The default name is the name of the subassembly and either a prefix or suffix.The substitute part is created in the folder specified by a path you enter.The substitute part is created in the workspace specified by the Project file. Workspace . . Right-click to specify the preferred location: User Path .Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Create Substitutes Concept Procedure Quick Reference Create Substitute This command creates a substitute part for every subassembly within the active assembly. as determined by the selections in the Naming Scheme portion of the dialog box.The cells in this column display one of three locations.Each cell in this column contains the name of a first-level subassembly within the active assembly. Right-click and select Remove row to remove the subassembly from the table and prevent the Create substitutes command from creating a substitute part for the subassembly. Source Path . The Create Substitute dialog box provides a means to select the subassemblies for which to create a substitute part.

You can use it in addition to.Undoes any changes made to the default naming scheme using the Apply option. or instead of.Enabled by default. and closes the Create Substitute dialog box.subassembly. Creates the substitute parts and named Level of Detail representations.Enables the edit field. Level of Detail Name OK Cancel . Dismisses the Create Substitutes dialog box.Applies any changes that you have made to the naming scheme. activates the newly created Level of Detail representations in each subassembly. You can edit the suffix string to suit your design situation. or instead of. the Suffix option. The name of the substitute part file is the name of the subassembly with a prefix you enter in the Prefix field. The name that is applied to the Level of Detail representation created within each of the subassemblies. Naming Scheme Provides the means to control the default naming scheme. Apply . Prefix . Revert . You can use it in addition to. Suffix . the suffix field is also supplied with a default string: “_SUB” that adds the suffix to the name of the subassembly to create the file name of the substitute part file. the Prefix option.

Access: Ribbon: Assemble tab Detail Productivity panel Link Levels of Named Levels of Detail Lists named Level of Detail representations within the active assembly. Applies the named Level of Detail representation to each first-level subassembly in the active assembly containing a named Level of Detail representation with the same name. Closes the Link Levels of Detail dialog box. Terminates the command and closes the dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Productivity Tools > Link Levels of Detail Concept Procedure Quick Reference Link Levels of Detail Provides the means to select a named Level of Detail representation from the active assembly. Provides the means to select a single named Level of Detail representation. The selected Level of Detail representation is activated in any subassembly which contains one of the same name.. Displays the Quick Reference topic within the online help. The selected Level of Detail representation is activated in any subassembly which contains one of the same name. Help OK Cancel .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties Topics in this section Center of gravity Mass properties Check for interference between components .

Select the COG work point and appropriate component geometry to measure straight line distance between geometry and COG work point. Start the measure command. Select a COG work plane and appropriate component geometry to measure perpendicular axial distance between geometry and selected plane. 2. 3. 1. Select the work planes to measure distance along the perpendicular axis.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties > Center of gravity Concept Procedure Select the center of gravity The center of gravity symbol contains three selectable work planes and a selectable work point. Use the work point to measure straight line distance. .

Update Clipboard Material and density properties General Properties Inertial Properties . and other values affect the model. right-click on a virtual part in the assembly browser and select Properties.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties > Mass properties Concept Procedure Quick Reference Properties . right-click and select Properties.Physical tab Calculates physical and inertial properties for a part or assembly to demonstrate how differences in materials. The measurement units are controlled by the Document Settings Units tab. Assembly access: Part access: Select a component. Click the Physical tab. iProperties. analysis tolerances. To access the properties of a Virtual Part. Click the Physical tab.

an appropriate message appears.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build assemblies > Physical Properties > Check for interference between components Concept Procedure Quick Reference Assembly interference Analyzes selected sets of components for interference. If no interference is found. Access: Ribbon: Inspect tab Interference Interference panel Analyze Interference Analysis Interference Detected . If interference is found. the interfering volume is temporarily displayed. A report describes the interfering components and the location and volume of the centroid of the interfering body.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials Topics in this section Bills of materials Manage item numbers in bills of materials Structure of bills of materials Bill of Materials Editor Parts lists and BOMs in iAssemblies .

You can also export a bill of materials (partial or full) to an Engineer's Notebook note.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials > Bills of materials A bill of materials is a table that contains information about the parts within an assembly. you can view and edit properties for the bill of materials. You can modify values on the bill of materials by changing the design properties in the Properties dialog box or in the Bill of Materials dialog box. Data in the parts list derived from the Properties dialog box can be edited in the property dialog box. Quantities on the bill of materials are updated when a part is added or removed from the assembly. you can create a similar document called a parts list. Every item is automatically assigned an item number. Within a drawing. The Item Column displays item numbers in the bill of materials. The data can be overridden in the Edit Parts list dialog box. The placed parts list can then be edited. Bill of materials information is automatically collected from iProperties in the Properties dialog box. Quantity property in the bill of materials Virtual components Equivalent Components Stock Number iProperty . The exported file can be used in an application such as a spreadsheet or text editor. You can publish parts list to the DWF format. with changes to its structure and content. vendors. The item number can be edited as needed. The table includes quantities. names. The parts list derives data generated by the assembly and the Properties dialog box (as reflected by the bill of materials). costs. Changes to item numbers update automatically in the parts list and balloons. Using the Bill of Materials command in the Manage panel of the Assemble tab. or any other information someone building the assembly needs. such as the Title and Part Number from the Project tab.

select the Structured or Parts Only tab. . Any integer ranging from 1 to 10. For preselection of none or one. Click Renumber. The radio buttons for selection control are set based on preselection.000. When two or more rows are preselected the dialog box defaults to Selected Rows. Start Value Increment The smallest valid value found in the selection is used for the start value.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials > Manage item numbers in bills of materials Concept Procedure Quick Reference Renumber Access: In the Bill of Materials dialog box. the default is set to All Rows and the radio buttons are disabled.

and Inseparable.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials > Structure of bills of materials Concept Procedure Structure bills of materials The BOM Structure iProperty defines the status of the component in the bill of material (BOM). Set BOM Structure using BOM Editor Set BOM Structure for a component Override the BOM Structure for an instance of component Set BOM Structure attributes in the BOM Editor . Tip You can set a default value for BOM Structure on the Design BOM tab of the Document Settings dialog box. until it is overridden at the component instance level. Purchased. Phantom. BOM Structure has five basic options: Normal. Reference. The BOM Structure for all components is set to this value.

Select the direction of the searching process. Enter a string to replace the original string with. Access: In the Bill of Materials dialog box. Select to distinguish between lower case and upper case letters. Click to find the next occurrence of the searched string. Enter a string to search for. and click Find or Replace on the menu.. right-click a BOM cell or a set of multiple BOM cells. Find what Replace with Match Case Direction Find Next Replace Replace All .Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials > Bill of Materials Editor Concept Procedure Quick Reference Find and Replace Use the Find and Replace dialog box to find or replace a string in the BOM table. Click to replace the original string with the new string. Click to replace the original strings in all BOM table or in a set of selected cells.

You can create a Parts List of selected members or a traditional single assembly parts list. In the BOM. The Bill of Material editor displays quantities for members within an iAssembly. You can only edit the quantity of the QTY column per member. Note The Bill of Materials command is disabled within an iAssembly member. You can edit a QTY for an item. Note Item QTY refers to a column choice that displays a calculated quantity for an item which is separate from a QTY for an item. The BOM view displays the active member. . The Item QTY is calculated and you cannot edit it. separate QTY and Item QTY columns display for each member as the item count is affected individually for members with component suppression. only one BOM view is provided containing the aggregate list of items and Item numbers. However. You can also create an aggregate parts list of specified members.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Bills of materials > Parts lists and BOMs in iAssemblies Concept Procedure Manage bills of materials in iAssemblies Multiple assemblies exist within an iAssembly. Click the iAssembly down-arrow to access remaining list or display all members.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations Topics in this section Assembly representations and configurations View representations Flexible assemblies Positional representations in assemblies Level of Detail representations Shrinkwrap assemblies .

What are representations? What are configurations? What makes representations different from configurations? How can you combine representations and configurations? How is this an advantage? How do I know which one to use? . and recommends how to use them together for a variety of workflows.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations > Assembly representations and configurations This topic introduces the 2 types of assembly manipulation tools. representations and configurations.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations > View representations Concept Procedure Quick Reference View representations A View representation preserves an assembly display configuration so that you can recall it by name the next time you work on the assembly. click to expand the Representations folder. right-click the View node. Access: On the Assembly browser. Storage Location Design View Representations . and then click New or Edit or click the Design View Representations icon on the browser title bar.

Right-click a subassembly in the graphics window or the browser. 2. An icon denoting the flexible state marks the subassembly in the browser. To remove flexibility. right-click a flexible subassembly. 3. . as needed. Note If a subassembly or part within a subassembly is adaptive. Individual component files are not affected. Click Save to preserve flexible states in the assembly file. and then select Flexible. 1. Make subassemblies flexible so that each child of the subassembly can solve uniquely from other instances to show each in a different position.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations > Flexible assemblies Concept Procedure Create and edit flexible components Subassemblies are often used several times in a design. Continue to select subassemblies and make flexible. setting flexibility on automatically turns adaptivity off. and then clear the check mark.

with the override value in parentheses. objects that cannot be overridden are not available. double-click a positional representation to make it active. where all modeling tasks are performed Tip You can quickly override one or a few values without accessing the Override Objects dialog box. The master positional representation is the default state of the assembly. On each tab. right-click a component name and select Grounded (Override) to change the grounding state. Positional Representation Constraint tab Pattern tab Component tab . Access: In the browser. and then select Override to open the Override Objects dialog box. right-click an object that participates in a positional representation. offset values. right-click a constraint in the browser and select Modify (Override). Used to make in-process adjustments to positions of objects in the current positional representation. For example. the Override Objects dialog box overrides suppression status or constraint value.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations > Positional representations in assemblies Concept Procedure Quick Reference Override Objects For assemblies that participate in a positional representation. grounding status. and flexibility status. In the graphics window or browser. Items with overrides are indicated by bold text in the browser. You cannot override values in the master positional representation. Or.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations > Level of Detail representations Concept Procedure Edit Level of Detail representations Once a Level of Detail representation is created and saved in a subassembly. Note Open a subassembly to edit its Level of Detail representations. Edit Level of Detail representations Copy Level of Detail representations Delete Level of Detail representations Rename Level of Detail representations Create and activate a Level of Detail representation in a nested subassembly . A Level of Detail representation cannot be edited-in-place in an assembly that consumes the subassembly. it can be activated in any consuming assembly.

When you merge seams between faces. The shrinkwrap part is a simplified version of the source assembly that can provide a significant reduction in file size in consuming assemblies or applications. This selection produces the . Assembly Shrinkwrap Options Style Single solid body merging out seams between planar faces Select to produce a single solid body without seams between planar faces. A surface composite is the fastest method and creates the smallest file of the three options. The default method creates a single surface composite. Use the hole and geometry removal tools to help protect intellectual property. the face assumes a single color. Solid body keep seams between planar faces Select to produce a single solid body with seams between planar faces retained. Single composite feature This is the default selection.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Representations > Shrinkwrap assemblies Concept Procedure Quick Reference Shrinkwrap assemblies The Shrinkwrap command creates a part from an existing assembly. Select to produce a single surface composite feature.

Hole Patching None Does not remove any holes. Holes do not need to be round to be included. Parts and faces Removes any face including entire parts which meet the visibility criteria. If enabled. It is the default setting. reselect Preview to see the effects of the change. The mass properties of the original assembly are cached. Ignore surface features for visibility detection Available if Remove geometry by visibility is enabled. The default setting is on.composite feature. Individual faces which meet the visibility criteria are not removed. This selection produces the smallest file. If not enabled. any visible work features in the component are exported and can be Simplification . Colors and seams of the original components are retained. The check box is selected by default. If options are changed. surface features participate in visibility detection and can hide geometry. and retained. All Removes all holes that do not cross surface boundaries. Range Specifies the circumference or perimeter of the holes to include or exclude. Remove parts by size Select to enable the option to remove parts based on the size ratio. Holes do not need to be round to be included. surface features do not affect visibility detection. Increasing the slider value removes more parts and faces. Visibility percentage A value of zero removes all parts or faces that are not visible in any view. Whole parts only Parts which meet the visibility criteria are removed. Include other objects Work Geometry When selected. Preview Select to visualize the results of the current selection settings in the dialog box. Remove geometry by visibility Select the check box to enable the options to remove geometry based on visibility. The ratio indicates the difference between the part bounding box and the assembly bounding box.

a part is created using less memory by excluding source bodies from the cache. The Parameters and Export Objects dialog boxes share the same parameter statuses. Parameters When selected. Break link Reduced Memory Mode Permanently disables any updates from the source component. . When the check box is selected.features in the component are exported and can be derived. The Parameters folder includes a subfolder that contains folders from the Parameters dialog box. any iMates defined in the source assembly are exported and can be derived. Checked on by default. iMates When selected. any visible and unconsumed 2D or 3D sketch in the component are exported and can be derived. Sketches When selected. Breaking or suppressing the link removes the memory savings. No source bodies appear in the browser. any parameters in the source assembly are exported and can be derived.

and Algebraic Operators Component Authoring Best practices and general workflows Design Accelerator Browser Material Database .Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview Topics in this section Understand functional design Design Accelerator Functions. Prefixes.

Using functional design. the following areas are part of Functional Design: Design Accelerator Frame Generator Autodesk Inventor Studio AutoLimits Content Center . rather than spending time on the modeling operations necessary to create 3D representations. It provides a more intuitive design environment. It supports design by function and adds mechanical content and intelligence. Within Autodesk Inventor. you can create mechanically correct components automatically by entering simple or complex mechanical attributes. Designers use functional design to analyze the function of their products and the design problems they are trying to solve. Functional design is not only a set of functions. It eliminates the need for physical prototypes.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview > Understand functional design Functional design is a knowledge content tool that represents the trend to move from geometrical descriptions to capturing knowledge. Functional design provides further advantages: The design and modification process is faster. There is a higher level of design quality and accuracy.

you can decide if you want to delete affected features as well. Components inserted in an assembly using Design Accelerator generators are related to one another using assembly constraints to define their positions.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview > Design Accelerator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Delete Use the Delete dialog box to delete components. When you delete a feature using Functional Design commands it affects the whole connection. How can components be deleted? How are the remaining components affected? . Then.

or simulate motion among several components. Meaning addition subtraction floating point modulo multiplication division power expression delimiter expression delimiter delimiter for multi-argument functions Supported Unit Prefixes The following table lists the unit prefixes supported by Autodesk Inventor. calculate assembly constraints offsets or angles. For example. prefixes. For example. and you can use them to calculate feature sizes. Prefixes. . and the Parameters dialog box. feature dialog boxes. Operator + % * / ^ ( ) . Equations can be simple or contain many algebraic operators. you can write equations in the Edit Dimensions dialog box. Equations can vary in complexity.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview > Functions. and Algebraic Operators Using Equations and Parameters You can use equations wherever you can enter a numeric value. and functions. here is a simple equation: 2 ul *(6+3) The following complex equation uses internal parameters such as pi: (PI rad/5 ul +(25 deg *PI rad)/180 deg)) Supported Algebraic Operators The following table lists the algebraic operators supported by Autodesk Inventor.

enter the prefix symbol.0e-3 1.5 ul * 2.0-15 1. When you add the unit prefix for name to the meter unit.Prefix exa peta tera giga mega kilo hecto deca deci centi milli micro nano Pi co femto atto Symbol E P T G M k h da d c m micro n p f a Value 1. For example. an equation that includes the unit "nanometer" might look like this equation: 3.0e3 1. Syntax cos(expr) sin(expr) tan(expr) Returns Unit Type unitless unitless unitless Expected Unit Type angle angle angle . your equation is calculated based on the length of 2. Do not enter the prefix itself.0e6 1. Supported Functions The following table lists the supported functions.0-9 1.6 nanometers.0e15 1.0-6 1.0e18 1.0e12 1.0e-18 When you use unit prefixes in an equation. Note Prefix symbols are case sensitive.0e-12 1. Enter them exactly as they appear in the previous table.0e9 1.0e1 1.0e-1 1.0e2 1.6 nm.0e-2 1.

Reserved System Parameters The following table lists the reserved system parameters supported by Autodesk .) unitless (Next lowest whole number. and so on. return 2 for 100. 3 for 1000.unit.acos(expr) asin(expr) atan(expr) cosh(expr) tanh(expr) acosh(expr) asinh(expr) sqrt(expr) sign(expr) exp(expr) angle angle angle unitless unitless angle angle unit^1/2 unitless unitless unitless unitless unitless angle angle unitless unitless any any (Return 0 if negative.) any any any unitless unitless any and unitless.) any (Return exponential power of expression: for example.expr2) random(expr) isolate(expr.unit) unitless unitless unitless any any any unitless unitless unit^expr2 unitless any Note Function names are case sensitive.expr2) In(expr) log(expr) pow(expr1.) unitless (Closest whole number. 1 if positive.) unitless (Next highest whole number.expr2) min(expr1. Enter them exactly as they appear in the previous table. respectively unitless any floor(expr) ceil(expr) round(expr) abs(expr) max(expr1.

Note Keep units consistent within equations containing parameters that represent Value 3. You designate a unitless value with the characters ul. for example. to calculate the number of occurrences for a pattern that is based on one occurrence for each unit of a parameter named Width. For example. For example. in.14159265358979323846264338328 2. inches. Parameter PI E Unit Types The unit type that you use with an equation depends on the type of data that you are evaluating. . For example. Convert the Width parameter to a unitless value. 5 ul means that the equation has been evaluated and returned the number 5.ul) The number of Occurrences value in a dialog box requires a unitless (ul) result. to evaluate a linear or angular value. You can do this using the Isolate function. Some equations must return a unitless value. as in the number of occurrences in a pattern. which is a linear value. an equation to solve the number of occurrences in a pattern.mm. or deg). you typically use a unit type of millimeters. but you are referencing the unit width. your linear equation would be: isolate(Width. or degrees (mm.Inventor.71828182845904523536 different unit types.

Allows selection of a feature to map to a table column and specifies individual features to compute or suppress for each family member. The Part Template Parameters dialog displays all part template parameters that can be valid for mapping in a tree structured by parameter categories. Model Parameters Model User Threads iProperties Suppression Displays the part model tree with features and feature related parameters.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview > Component Authoring Concept Procedure Quick Reference Part Template Parameters Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Component . Displays the part model tree with features and feature related parameters. To map the parameter to a column. Decide if a dimensional parameter is used for mapping. and publish it to the Content Center Library. List of User parameters. click the button at the end of the edit fields. Provides list of threads in the part template with Thread Family.Summary. Assign part template parameters to category parameters during the Authoring process. on the Parameter Mapping tab. and Class parameters. or select it and click OK. Note You can save all the information you insert during the Authoring process. Physical (only material) and Custom. double-click a parameter. Provides part template iProperties . . on the Layout tab select the Parameter Category. To display Part Template Parameters dialog box. Designation. Project.

Valid Template parameter mapping What if the table columns are not presented in the Category Parameters tab (Template parameters mapping to Category Parameters) .

A component can be placed in a deep level subassembly. in the case of an error or problem they describe the nature of the error. Note that the drag function is not available to promote or demote components in the browser. Use the (More) in the majority of generators and calculators to access additional setting options.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview > Best practices and general workflows Design Accelerator generators and calculators Design Accelerator generators and calculators support assemblies and weldments. In drawing. Double-click the 3D grip to open the Edit dialog box to enter the dimension directly. 3D grips + double-click : Most of the generators use 3D graphics for better orientation and workflow. sheet metal or part environment they are not available. Move the grip to change important dimensions of the displayed preview. Design Accelerator support of positional representations is limited to changes in the component only. . Only entities inside a parent assembly can be selected in Design Accelerator commands A Design Accelerator assembly is used to organize components under an assembly. Ensure that the subassemblies that the Design Accelerator components are part of are grounded after demoting. Use the 3D preview to see the component in context with other parts of the assembly even before creating it. A single assembly can have only one component assembly. Tips and Tricks When working with Design Accelerator generators and calculators there are many features that can help you to work faster and efficiently: Multi-line tooltips with images describe what you must do or select. Design Accelerator components must be encapsulated in an assembly to apply kinematics. You can promote and demote Design Accelerator components in the browser using the context menu. In that case. in-place edit its parent assembly before you start any Design Accelerator commands.

Output units change: Double-click a result value to change units. You can change the order of generated components. . Items lists – drag : You can drag in most of the generators. in the Bolted Connection Generator. you can change the order of nuts and washers. For example. Enter new units.

and click Save. when you insert Spur Gears connection. Gear 1 and Gear 2 are placed together in one subassembly with a user. Use the Promote command to create another instance of a component and move it up within the assembly structure. All inserted design accelerator components are stored together. The component is designed in this assembly.specified name. Design Accelerator generators and calculators are saved as subassemblies. An assembly node is added to the browser structure. Browser structure of generators and calculators Design Accelerator Context Menu Context menu for Design Accelerator Update . a prompt is displayed with the option to save the design accelerator generator or calculator to the assembly before you continue. When you open any generator and calculator.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview > Design Accelerator Browser Uses the Assembly browser to organize and manage component entities. Change the assembly name and folder or accept the default. For example.

According to the specified values of wire diameters and the ultimate tensile strength. Access: On the ribbon. Tension Spring.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Functional design overview > Material Database Concept Procedure Quick Reference Wire Diameters and Ultimate Tensile Strength Use the dialog to enter values of wire diameters and the ultimate tensile strength of the selected material..Design Data\Design Accelerator\Tables\Custom folder. If generator does not find the ultimate tensile strength value for inserted wire diameter in the table.072 and the ultimate tensile strength value to 232692. generator automatically inserts the ultimate tensile strength value (232692) to the Ultimate Tensile Strength edit field of the Calculation tab. Calculation tab.. or Torsion Spring. Check the box next to the Material edit field to open Material Database dialog box.Design Data\Design Accelerator\Tables\Materials folder.. Wire Diameters.. If you edit the data. Generator finds the closest lower and upper wire diameter values and approximately calculates the ultimate tensile strength. For example. If you set the wire diameter value in the Design tab to 0. Double-click the last column. Double-click the edit field to change values. . click the Design tab. The data from material database are stored in the XML format in . you set the wire diameter value in this table to 0. generator uses the ultimate tensile strength value if you design a spring of an appropriate wire diameter. Add item Adds a row for new wire diameter and ultimate tensile strength values. Delete item Removes selected row with data from the table. the value is calculated. Open Compression Spring.072. tables in XML format are by default stored in .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators Topics in this section Bolted Connection Component Generator Shaft Component Generator Parallel Splines Component Generator Involute Splines Component Generator Parallel Key Connection Generator Cam Component Generators Spur Gears Component Generator Bevel Gears Component Generator Worm Gears Component Generator Bearing Component Generator Plain Bearing Calculator Compression Spring Component Generator Extension Spring Component Generator Torsion Spring Component Generator Belleville Spring Component Generator V-Belts Component Generator Synchronous Belts Component Generator Roller Chains Generator Clevis Pin Component Generator Pin Component Generators O-Ring Component Generator .

you can change type. . there are more possible dimensions for the bolt type. Values in the list depend on the type of the selected bolt. Depending on the selected option. you can see that the hole dimensions are changed in the Design tab. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Fasten panel Bolted Connection and then click the Design tab. Designation For some holes. For bolts. For example. if you select the Loose option and click OK. For bolts. you can change the length only. Threaded . For holes. specify fasteners. to open Modify The dialog box differs depending on whether the selected component is a bolt or a hole. designation. Select the row with hole and click . Modify Bolt Custom Length Check the box to select the bolt length from the drop-down list.Hole Diameter is always driven. and class. diameter.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Bolted Connection Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Modify length/hole Specifies hole and bolt parameters that you can change. Modify Hole Type You have several options to select the type of hole. select bolt and hold the Alt key + length dialog box. In the area on the right side. the hole is adjusted. It designs the threaded hole type. Specify the hole more accurately by selecting the appropriate designation.

the part item with user dimensions is displayed with a green background. You can also change the length of bolt in the graphics window using the 3D grip. Design tab . Double-click the 3D grip to edit the bolt length. Drag the grip to the appropriate length. Confirms the input from the component. Closes the dialog box. The edit field of the part is displayed with a green background in the Design tab. When you enter a user parameter and return to the Design tab of the Bolted connection Generator.type of the selected bolt.

Click the Calculation tab. In the Loads & Supports drop-down list select Loads. On the Loads & Supports area of the Calculation tab. and click Loads properties.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Shaft Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Torque Use the dialog box to enter parameters of shaft torque. select Torque in the tree control. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Shaft. and in the toolbar click Add Torque. . Double-click the torque preview in the Autodesk Inventor window. Properties Moment Enter the value for distance measured from the middle of the section. Enter the torque value.

8 Uniform Light shocks Medium shocks 1. Joint Type Fixed Flexible Crowned Splines are firmly joined by pressing or fixed by rings. Access: On the Design tab.0 . Note This option is available for Involute Splines only and if the ANSI Standard is selected.2 2. or Parallel Splines.8 1.4 Heavy shocks 1.0 1. Ka .Application factor This coefficient reflects the effect of the character and the type of loading on decrease of the loading capacity or the coupling.2 Cyclical shocks 1.2 2. Splines are flexibly joined to allow axial movement. It is determined according to empirical values given in the following table: Drive Type of loading Continuous Light shocks 1.5 1.8 3. click Key. Involute Splines.1 2. Power Transmission panel.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Parallel Splines Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Loading Conditions Specifies the influence of production and operating parameters on the connection acceptability. Uses external splines with crowned teeth for misalignment up to 5 degrees. avoiding axial movement. and on the Calculation tab click Loading Conditions.8 2.

0 2.2 4.5 0.3 0.0 1. It is determined according to empirical values given in the following table: Total number of revolutions [millions] 0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000 Kw 1. It is determined according to empirical values given in the following table: No.8 2.4 0.4 1.3 Fully bi-directional 1. Kf Unidirectional 10000 100000 1000000 10000000 Wear-life factor This coefficient reflects effects of wear of contact surfaces during the appropriate service life of the coupling (measured in number of revolutions) on increase of the loading capacity the coupling.4 0.7 0.5 .0 0.0 0.0 0. of Torque Cycles Fatigue-life factor.01 0.Fatigue-life factor This coefficient reflects effects of the operational character and appropriate service life of the coupling (measured in number of torque cycles) on increase of the loading capacity of the coupling.

Tip: For common accuracy of production and installation. a coefficient of 0. the loading is not distributed exactly uniformly onto the two keys due to production and assembly inaccuracies. it is assumed that half of the teeth carry the load (Ks = 0. the load is only carried by one third of the teeth (Ks = 0. The ratio between the theoretical and actual load bearing surface of the coupling is defined by the coefficient of distribution of the loading.3). Note In cases of couplings with 1 key. the size of the coefficient is given in a range from 0. With regards to the accuracy of bearing.75 is taken into account .6 to 0.8.Note only for flexible joints. the coefficient is equal to 1. The actual load bearing surface of the coupling is lower than the load bearing surface determined theoretically. At a common and higher mounting accuracy. For splines with higher production inaccuracy. . Load Distribution factor In couplings with two keys. The factor indicates the load is not spread evenly on all the spline teeth because of production and assembly inaccuracy.5). Factor of Tooth Side Contact Note This factor is available for Involute Splines only.

In the Involute Spline Connection Generator.5 . Tooth Side Specifies the type of tooth sides. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Involute Splines.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Involute Splines Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Loading Conditions .1 0.5 .3 . Allowable pressure p D [kg/mm3] flexible under load adverse medium advantageous no load adverse 1.Metric method Specifies the influence of production and operating parameters to the connection acceptability. Recommended values of allowable pressures on tooth sides: Type of loading Working conditions Hardened Tooth Side NonHardened Tooth Side Joins splines firmly by pressing or fixed by rings avoiding axial movement.5 . Note This dialog box is available only if you select the ISO or CSN spline type and Metric Method in the Strength Calculation area on the Calculation tab. click Loading Conditions.1 1 -2 2 . Joint type Fixed Working Conditions Specifies the type of working conditions.3.2 0.

5 . it is supposed that one half of teeth carry the load (Ks = 0.5 6 .medium advantageous fixed adverse medium advantageous Factor of Tooth Side Contact 2 -3 2.5 . At a common and higher mounting accuracy.3).5).4 3.10 8 . for splining with higher production inaccuracy the load is only carried by one third of teeth (Ks = 0.12 3 -6 4 -7 4 -7 10 . Calculation Tab .20 The factor indicates the load is not spread evenly on all the spline teeth because of production and assembly inaccuracy.14 12 .

click Key.Application factor This coefficient reflects the effect of the character and the type of loading on decrease of the loading capacity or the coupling.4 Heavy shocks 1.2 2.8 Uniform Light shocks Medium shocks 1. Splines are flexibly joined to allow axial movement.1 2. and on the Calculation tab click Loading Conditions. Joint Type Fixed Flexible Crowned Splines are firmly joined by pressing or fixed by rings.2 Cyclical shocks 1. It is determined according to empirical values given in the following table: Drive Type of loading Continuous Light shocks 1.2 2. Access: On the Design tab.8 2.8 1. Uses external splines with crowned teeth for misalignment up to 5 degrees. Involute Splines. avoiding axial movement. Power Transmission panel. Ka .0 . Note This option is available for Involute Splines only and if the ANSI Standard is selected.5 1.0 1.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Parallel Key Connection Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Loading Conditions Specifies the influence of production and operating parameters on the connection acceptability. or Parallel Splines.8 3.

0 2. of Torque Cycles Fatigue-life factor.1 1 10 100 1000 10000 Kw 1.8 2. It is determined according to empirical values given in the following table: Total number of revolutions [millions] 0. Kf Unidirectional 10000 100000 1000000 10000000 Wear-life factor This coefficient reflects effects of wear of contact surfaces during the appropriate service life of the coupling (measured in number of revolutions) on increase of the loading capacity the coupling.5 .0 0.3 0.3 Fully bi-directional 1.Fatigue-life factor This coefficient reflects effects of the operational character and appropriate service life of the coupling (measured in number of torque cycles) on increase of the loading capacity of the coupling.01 0.5 0. It is determined according to empirical values given in the following table: No.0 0.4 0.4 0.7 0.0 1.2 4.0 0.4 1.

For splines with higher production inaccuracy. the loading is not distributed exactly uniformly onto the two keys due to production and assembly inaccuracies. the load is only carried by one third of the teeth (Ks = 0.6 to 0. the size of the coefficient is given in a range from 0. a coefficient of 0. . At a common and higher mounting accuracy. The actual load bearing surface of the coupling is lower than the load bearing surface determined theoretically. Factor of Tooth Side Contact Note This factor is available for Involute Splines only. The ratio between the theoretical and actual load bearing surface of the coupling is defined by the coefficient of distribution of the loading.Note only for flexible joints. the coefficient is equal to 1. Load Distribution factor In couplings with two keys.3). it is assumed that half of the teeth carry the load (Ks = 0.8.75 is taken into account . With regards to the accuracy of bearing.5). The factor indicates the load is not spread evenly on all the spline teeth because of production and assembly inaccuracy. Note In cases of couplings with 1 key. Tip: For common accuracy of production and installation.

104 0. The last value must be 1. You can copy the values from the table directly to the TXT file. File Format The Motion file is a text file that contains 2 columns of values delimited by tabs or characters ". Linear.2.0. if the last value in the table is 30. or Cylindrical Cam. The values must be listed ascendingly.352 . Power Transmission panel.216 0.4.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Cam Component Generators Concept Procedure Quick Reference Add Motion You can define your own motion.0. The first value must be zero.028 0. Motion Name File Name Specify a user motion name to display on the Motion list. generator recalculates value 1/30. For example. Specify a file name with path of file with motion data. The first value must be zero (start of segment). The last value must be 1. On the Design tab click Add next to the Motion Function pull-down list.0. You must specify the motion name and the file name. The second column represents an elevation at position. The values must be listed ascendingly. Access: On the Design tab. click Disc. 0. Example of the values of the Polynomial motion of third degree.1.0 0.3. The first column represents the position in segment. or all values are transformed by 1/last value in the table." or "|". or all elevation values are transformed by 1/last value in the table.0.

648 0.0.1 .7.5.9.896 0.6.0.0.784 0.0.0.5 0.972 1.8.0.

The nearest acceptable value is selected and inserted. According to your selection. Note For the CSN Standard. Click to close the dialog box. Access: On the Design tab. click Accuracy. In the Spur Gears or Bevel Gears Component Generator. Some of these values cannot be selected randomly. list contains all Standard Precision Specification values. If you select a value that does not correspond with the value on the left. Select precision degree.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Spur Gears Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Accuracy Displays a dialog box for input of accuracy standard and accuracy degree. the Precision Specification options are displayed. Power Transmission panel. Calculation tab. . OK Cancel Click to confirm the selection and close the dialog box. but they depend on the inserted values on their left. the value is not inserted automatically. click Spur Gear or Bevel Gear. Selects the standard for accuracy calculation.

the value is not inserted automatically. Power Transmission panel. click Accuracy. Click to close the dialog box. but they depend on the inserted values on their left. OK Cancel Click to confirm the selection and close the dialog box. list contains all Standard Precision Specification values. Note For the CSN Standard. Selects the standard for accuracy calculation.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Bevel Gears Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Accuracy Displays a dialog box for input of accuracy standard and accuracy degree. . Some of these values cannot be selected randomly. Select precision degree. Calculation tab. In the Spur Gears or Bevel Gears Component Generator. Access: On the Design tab. If you select a value that does not correspond with the value on the left. The nearest acceptable value is selected and inserted. According to your selection. click Spur Gear or Bevel Gear. the Precision Specification options are displayed.

. In this case the second value from left is set to 3. The nearest acceptable value is selected and inserted automatically. Some of these values cannot be selected randomly because they depend on the values on their left. Selects the precision degree. values on the right side are updated according to specified value. if you set the first left value to 2. the list contains all Worm Gear Precision Specification values. Note For the CSN Standard. click Accuracy. If you select a value that doesn't correspond with the value on the left. For example. Closes the dialog box. that value is not inserted. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel and on the Calculation tab. OK Cancel Confirms the selection and closes the dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Worm Gears Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Accuracy Displays a dialog box for input of accuracy standard and accuracy degree.

Moves selected load one line down. You can insert Time values either in absolute values or in percent. the time ratio of the loading conditions is crucial. For calculation of Equivalent Dynamic Load P used in Bearing Life Calculation. Deletes selected load Moves selected load one line up. . not the absolute values of the loads. double-click the edit fields. On the Loads section.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Bearing Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Various Load Conditions Specifies the values of various loads. To enter the load values. Click Add load to add load. use the dialog box to enter additional loads. click the load diagrammatic picture. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Bearing and click the Calculation tab. OK Cancel Confirms the loads settings and closes the dialog box. Adds new load. If the load is not constant during bearing life. The diagram on the Calculation tab displays the impact of individual element to the Equivalent Dynamic Load P value. Closes the dialog box.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Calculator OK Power Transmission panel Bearing and on the Calculation tab..Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Plain Bearing Calculator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Diagram of radial bearing Displays the preview of designed radial bearing. .. Calculation tab Advanced. Click to close the dialog box. click Preview.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab Spring panel click the Calculation tab.Calculation tab Sets parameters for calculation of a compression spring. Compression and Spring Strength Calculation Calculation Options Load Dimensions Spring Coils Spring Material Check of Buckling Fatigue Loading Assembly Dimensions (More) Results Summary of Messages Toolbar buttons . You can calculate generator data based on selections made in the Design tab.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Compression Spring Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Compression Spring Component Generator .

Type of Strength Calculation Calculation Options Loads Dimensions Spring Prestress Spring Material Assembly Dimensions Spring Coils (More) Results Summary of Messages Toolbar Commands Spring panel Extension and click the .Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Extension Spring Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Extension Spring Component Generator . Access: Ribbon: Design tab Calculation tab.Calculation tab Sets parameters for calculation of an extension spring.

Access: Ribbon: Design tab the Calculation tab.Calculation tab Sets parameters for calculation of a torsion spring.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Torsion Spring Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Torsion Spring Component Generator . Spring panel Torsion and click Spring Strength Calculation Calculation Option Loads Spring Mounting Dimensions Spring Coils Spring Material Assembly Dimensions (More) Results Summary of Messages Toolbar Commands .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Belleville Spring Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Belleville Spring Dimensions Use this dialog box to modify the existing spring values or add new spring sizes. Add You can add a new spring size. Reverts all changes Deletes all changes created and reverts to original data. Enter all required values for new spring size. [mm] Spring dimension Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Material Thickness Unloaded Height . Access: Ribbon: Design tab the Design tab. The following table lists the data displayed for each spring size: Name D [in]. [mm] d [in]. [mm] t [in]. Note The list of springs depends on the selected standard in the Spring Type list. Click the Add icon to insert new spring size. Click Spring panel Belleville and click in the Dimensions group box. Remove You can remove the existing spring size. [mm] H [in].

Confirms the input of the coupling.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > V-Belts Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Coordinates Controls the X and Y coordinates of the pulley given by precise input. The Fixed position by coordinates placement type must be selected for the pulley. V-Belts Generator Design Tab Synchronous Belts Generator Design Tab . Access: In the Autodesk Inventor assembly preview of the V-belt. double-click the center grip of the pulley. Closes the Coordinates dialog box.

double-click the center grip of the pulley. V-Belts Generator Design Tab Synchronous Belts Generator Design Tab . Access: In the Autodesk Inventor assembly preview of the V-belt. Closes the Coordinates dialog box. The Fixed position by coordinates placement type must be selected for the pulley.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Synchronous Belts Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Coordinates Controls the X and Y coordinates of the pulley given by precise input. Confirms the input of the coupling.

Overrides number of strands adopted from a chain by default. or sprocket hub size. you are responsible for all sprockets' properties. select the blue grip within Autodesk Inventor window. It is determined by size of driver sprocket and transmission ratio. Customizes dimensional parameters of the sprocket such as tooth gap shape properties. Select the Diameter option to retain the sprocket size when you change the size of the driver sprocket. you cannot enter the sprocket size value. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Roller Chains and click the Design tab. All others can be flat idlers. You can select active strand which is used for the chain. double-click the sprocket within the preview. the size of this driven sprocket changes as well..\Design Data\Design Accelerator\Tables\Chains\RollerChains folder). If you select the Transmission Ratio option. the sprocket size values are set according to the chain standard (data tables are stored within the . Note To set active strand. Custom size Custom number of strands . The transmission requires a minimum of 2 toothed sprockets. Design Guide Controls the size of the idler based on a diameter specified.. or appropriate transmission ratio. On the Sprockets group box. Note This dialog box is displayed only if you select the roller chain sprocket. Number of strands of the sprocket can be bigger than number of strands of the chain. click Sprockets Properties commands. By default. To more precisely control dimensions and properties of sprocket for analysis.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Roller Chains Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Roller Sprocket Properties Set up properties of a toothed sprocket. or click within the dialog box. If you select the Custom Size option. If you change the size of the driver sprocket.

some sprockets can act also as idlers or power can split into more driven sprockets in some ratio. The first sprocket (driveR) always has 100% power so the power ratio value is 1. Power ratio Power ratio magnitude range is from 0. Dimensions Modify the sprocket dimensions. The moment of inertia is considered not for a sprocket itself but for entire rotating mass that holds with the sprocket. If more than 2 sprockets are within the chain drive. Inertia moment Theoretical tooth form Generates sprocket with theoretical form of the tooth gap for specified number of teeth. the generator considers it an Idler.0. . When you have a design with 2 sprockets drive. If the Vibration analysis option is selected within the Calculation tab then the inertia moments of toothed sprockets cannot have a zero value. An important value for calculation of natural frequencies of the chain drive.0. select this option to change the direction of the chain motion.0.0 to 1. When you have a design with multiple sprockets drive. select this option to change motion just for the given sprocket.Motion clockwise/ Motion counterclockwise Changes the motion direction. See the Geometry design properties chapter within the Engineer's Handbook for more information. If the power ratio is 0. depending on the amount of power that is distributed by a given sprocket. See the Geometry design properties chapter within the Engineer's Handbook for more information. ISO tooth form Generates sprocket with idealized ISO form of the tooth gap for specified number of teeth.

To insert a value on the Calculation tab. select any Pin Generator. Fasten panel. Its value depends on the pin type and connection loading character. Includes the value in the calculation. With regards to the mentioned parameters. or you can select a value from the table. OK Cancel Confirms the selection and closes the dialog box. Its value depends on the pin type and connection loading character. Access: On the ribbon. the literature gives values of the coefficient in a range from 1 to 3. you can enter the value in the Calculation tab. Running Fit Specifies the overall effect of manufacturing and operational parameters upon reduction of the loading capacity of a pin loaded with shearing or bending stress. the literature gives values of the coefficient in a range from 1 to 3. On the Calculation tab. Pernament Fit Specifies the overall effect of manufacturing and operational parameters upon connection loading capacity reduction in terms of allowable deformation of contact surfaces. click the white field with a value. click the Design tab. With regards to the mentioned parameters.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Clevis Pin Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Service Factor Displays the list of factors and appropriate values. click next to the Service Factor edit field. . To edit the field manually. and click OK. Closes the dialog box.

Access: On the ribbon. You can also change the length of a pin in the Autodesk Inventor window using the grip. type. click the Design tab. length. Items area.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > Pin Component Generators Concept Procedure Quick Reference Modify Pin Changes pin parameters (tolerance class. Click any Pin Generator. for example) and return to the Design tab of the pin generator. Closes the dialog box. click the Custom Properties commands. . Design tab. When you enter a parameter (Length or Diameter. Fasten panel. If you drag the grip to the appropriate length. the value is automatically inserted into the generator. and so on). Confirms the parameters entered for the component.

At that point you can insert an o-ring into the assembly. No Pattern option is selected.Pattern tab Connect to the Content Center server and configure Content Center on your computer before you insert components using the O-Ring Generator. the displayed options depend on the type of selected o-ring. O-Ring By default. See the Content Center Help.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Component Generators > O-Ring Component Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference O-Ring Generator . axial or radial. Apply and OK commands are grayed out. They become available when you specify the placement geometry and select a family with a valid o-ring member. Radial o-rings Axial o-rings Menu Commands . When you select an o-ring. or Manage libraries across design workgroups Help to learn how to use the Content Center. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel and click the Pattern tab.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators Topics in this section Weld Joint calculators Solder Joint Mechanical Calculators Clamping Joint Calculators Tolerance Mechanical Calculator Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator Press Fit Calculator Power Screw Calculator Beam and Column Calculator Plate Mechanical Calculator Brake Mechanical Calculators .

Joint Material and Properties .Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Weld Joint calculators Concept Procedure Quick Reference Spot Weld Calculator . Compares allowable stress with auxiliary comparative stress. or resulting reduced stress with the allowable stress by using a standard calculation procedure. but the evaluation of results for the strength check is different.Calculation tab Sets parameters for calculation of a spot weld joint. which is determined from the calculated partial stresses by using conversion factors of the weld joint when the strength check is carried out with this method. See the Engineer's Handbook for calculation formulas. Both methods calculate resultant stresses in a similar way. Access: Ribbon: Environments tab Calculator Calculation of Statically Loaded Weld Specifies the Standard Calculation Procedure and Method of Comparative Stresses. Standard Calculation Procedure Checks joint strength by direct comparison of calculated normal. Selects a calculation method for statically loaded weld joints. See the Engineer's Handbook for used methods of weld joint calculations. Dimensions Summarizes all parameters necessary for definition of the weld geometry. Convert panel Spot Weld Method of Comparative Stresses Loads Enter the acting force. Displayed options depend on the Weld Design selected type. See the Engineer's Handbook for calculation formulas. shear.

Enter the value or click the arrow to set the value in the Safety Factor dialog box. the selected material is changed to User. Toolbar buttons . double-click the double line at the bottom of the tabs or click the chevron. Results Displays the calculated values and the weld strength check. Edit the properties of the material. Choose the corresponding weld design. Summary of Messages area Displays the reports about calculation. To open the Summary of Messages area at the bottom of the tab. When you edit the value. Yield Strength Displays the maximum stress that can be applied without permanent deformation of the test specimen. The value is automatically modified according to the selected material. Safety Factor Weld Design Diagrammatic pictures of weld design are changed according to the selected weld type. if needed.Opens the Material Database where you select a material.

Shear Safety Factor Specifies the Shear Safety Factor value you enter or select in the dialog box that opens when you click the button beside the input field. Edit the properties of the material. and joint properties. The recommended range of appropriate coefficients is displayed in the dialog box. Access: Ribbon: Environments tab Calculator Type of Strength Calculation Joint Design Check Calculation Load Specifies the force carried by the joint or for the torque in the stepped joint. Designs the step depth for the indicated load. The direction of load action is shown in the diagram of the solder joint in the dialog window. are represented in the same way. Joint Material and Properties Select the check box to open the Material Database and select a material.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Solder Joint Mechanical Calculators Concept Procedure Quick Reference Step Solder Joint Calculator . Performs the strength check for the specified load.Calculation tab Sets parameters for calculation of a step solder joint. Forces and moments which load the joint and which are entered in the Loads section. dimensions. Convert panel Step Solder Dimensions Specifies dimensions of connected materials. dimensions. Results . and connection properties. The picture of the weld joint contains the most important geometric joint dimensions specified in the Dimensions section. if needed.

are presented in the Results section. Toolbar buttons . including the results of the strength check. To open the Summary of Messages area at the bottom of the tab. Summary of Messages area Displays the reports about calculation.Assessments of the joint strength. refresh the values in this section by clicking the Calculate button (F5 key). double-click the double line at the bottom of tabs or click the chevron. If input parameters are changed.

d. D. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Calculator Loads Loading is entered through torque. select the Type of loading. Dimensions Enter the dimensions of the cone hub joint. Taper Ratio D D. D. Calculates the joint length for the specified pin diameters and taper ratio. Calculates the minor pin diameter for the specified taper ratio. and joint length. if needed. major pin diameter. Allowable pressure in the joint is entered by selection from the list according to the joint character or by typing a value into the input field. Taper Ratio L d.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Clamping Joint Calculators Concept Procedure Quick Reference Cone Joint Calculator Sets parameters for calculation of cone joints. minor pin diameter. L Ratio Taper Calculates the pin taper ratio for the specified pin diameters and joint length. Edit the properties of the material. Calculates the major pin diameter for the specified taper ratio. L. Power Transmission panel Cone Joint d. and joint length. Allowable Pressure . Taper Ratio d Joint Properties Type of Loading Material Using the roll-down menu. Check the check box to open Material Database and select a material. L.

It displays the reports about calculation. Summary of Messages area Summary of Messages area opens at the bottom of the tab when you double-click the double line at the bottom of tabs or if you click the chevron at the bottom of the tabs. Toolbar buttons .Results Displays the calculated values and the joint strength check.

Tolerance Redefines the tolerance type and value for the selected dimension. Click the arrow and the tolerance from the list. Click the arrow and select from the list. You cannot change the value in this dialog box. Sets the value for upper tolerance. Sets the tolerance value for the hole dimensions when using Limits and Fits tolerance. Click the arrow and the tolerance from the list. Dimension List box. Confirms the tolerance inputs. Closes the Tolerance dialog box. you can enter individual chain element dimensions and tolerances. Name: Model value: Enter the tolerance name.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Tolerance Mechanical Calculator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Tolerance In the Tolerance dialog box. Sets the value for upper tolerance. Type: Specifies the tolerance type. The tolerance method determines which tolerance values are available. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Tolerance Calculator. Displays the computed value of the selected dimension. click Edit. Upper: Hole: Lower: Shaft: . Click the arrow and select from the list. On the Calculation Tab. Sets the tolerance value for the shaft dimensions when using Limits and Fits tolerance.

The list is dynamically updated when the Fit Type is changed. Select 1 of the predefined Fits. (To display the More Options area. Transition. Capitol letters are used for holes. Limits are defined by a letter and a number. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Calculator The Limits and Fits Mechanical calculator takes recommendations from ISO 286 or ANSI B4. you enable these selections and Limits entries are reset to default values. or Interference.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator Use to design fits and limits.) Each standard has its own profile and the units of the nominal diameter and deviations are millimeters for ISO and inches for ANSI. Selected fit is displayed in a graphic form. If you manually enter any letter or number. Power Transmission panel Limits/Fits . The Limits graph is dynamically updated to display the selected fit. Select the limit letter and number. When you click the Fit Type and Preferred Fits drop-down arrows. The Limits graph is dynamically updated to display the selected Limits. and lower case letters are used for shafts.1. click More in the lower right corner of the Calculation tab. Conditions Tolerances Tolerance Zones Specify the limits and fits. the Fit Type and Preferred Fits pull-down lists are disabled. Fit Type Preferred Fits Limits Select Clearance. The option to select a standard is available within the More Options area.

Limits graph Displays all available hole and shaft tolerance classes for the entered nominal diameter and tolerance grade. double-click the double line on the right or click the chevron. You can see currently selected tolerance class. Using this technique. Click a tolerance class to change it. It is the size of the tolerance zone. (More) Results To display the Results area on the right side of the Calculation tab. Subtract the Standard Tolerance Grade from the Fundamental deviation to determine the minimum size or lower tolerance of the limit. The number is the Standard Tolerance Grade. The area displays numerical values for the tolerances. It defines the Interference fit (negative) or Clearance fit (positive). The following items are displayed in the Results pane: Hole Minimum diameter of the hole (Hole min) Maximum diameter of the hole (Hole max) Upper tolerance of the hole (Hole upper) Lower tolerance of the hole (Hole lower) . displayed in a hidden line. Pause the cursor over each fit symbol to see the information about any fit deviations. which belong to the selected tolerance class. The Zero line is displayed. you can design the transition fit with respect to the maximum center value. It is the maximum size or upper tolerance of the feature. The dimensions that join the center of the tolerance zones can have a value of less than zero. Click Calculate to calculate the values.The letter is the Fundamental Deviation from the basic size. The fit parameters are dimensioned to show the tolerance zone dependencies clearly.

Shaft Minimum diameter of the shaft (Shaft min) Maximum diameter of the shaft (Shaft max) Upper tolerance of the shaft (Shaft upper) Lower tolerance of the shaft (Shaft lower) For Clearance Fits Minimum clearance diametric value of the fit (Clearance min) Maximum clearance diametric value of the fit (Clearance max) For Transition Fits Maximum interference diametric value of the fit (Interference max) Midpoint Distance between midpoints of tolerance zones (Midpoint) Toolbar buttons .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Press Fit Calculator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Press Fit Calculator Sets parameters for calculation of a press fit. Maximum torque required to transfer between shaft and hub. If solid shaft is considered use 0. Internal shaft diameter of hollow shaft.0. Axial force required to transfer between shaft and hub. External shaft diameter in place of contact. Enter the value of safety factor.0 specially if non-static load is applied. Use higher number than 1. If you enter values that do not correspond with other dimensions. . the values are displayed in red. Performs a calculation according to required force. Power Transmission panel Press Fit Dimensions Enter dimensions for press fit. Outer Diameter Shaft Diameter Inner Diameter Enter outer diameter of the hub. This value is multiplied with force or torque and in fact describes size of over design. Required Torque Required Force Torque Force Safety Factor Performs a calculation according to required torque. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Calculator Required Load Enter values for required transferred loading.

You can specify the dimension only when the Assembly Clearance check box is selected.. Limits and Fits This part of the panel is used to find standard fit for shaft and hub. Surface quality affects the size of the trueing at contact surfaces and the size of efficient interference. You can adjust the maximum and minimum interference.0. Connection Length Enter length of pressure connection. you can adapt the limit deviations. the calculated interferences are shown in red and display an error message.considered use 0. the limit deviations are calculated and numerically expressed. Standard hub and shaft fit that is calculated based on ISO or ANSI standard. Trueing is not applied to perfectly Surface Smoothness . If so. partial results are calculated. Your changes are not saved. You cannot exceed maximum possible or minimum possible interference. Design Accelerator presents a new solution or calculates new limit deviations. To adapt limit deviations. If the corresponding standard fit for the calculated maximum possible and minimum possible interference cannot be found. Click OK to return to the Calculation tab. When you edit the fields. clear the check box for the Specify manually option in the Fundamental Deviations box. Fit Symbol Change.. Note : When you click Calculate. Fundamental Deviations Advanced Assembly Clearance Assembly clearance is an important dimension for the shaft cooling temperature calculation and hub warming. It is not necessary to start the calculation again. Opens the Limits and Fits Mechanical Calculator Interference Fit dialog box. In the tolerance field.

The Surface Smoothness fields for editing surface quality are only available when you select the Surface Smoothness check box. if needed. For smooth surfaces.interference. The surface quality value is not used in the calculation. Click the button on the Clamping Factor box to open the Clamping Factor table. Clamping Factor (pressing) Hub Material Opens the Material Database where you select a material. Trueing is not applied to perfectly smooth surfaces. Applies this factor for connections manufactured (connected) in the cold state. All properties that are used in calculation are displayed and can be modified if "user" material is selected. All properties that are used in calculation are displayed and can be modified if "user" material is selected. Sets limitations for shaft cooling. Temperature Limitation of Hub Warming Up Limitation of Shaft Cooling Hub Warming Up Sets limitations for hub warming up. If you clear the check box. Edit the properties of the material. Specifies the minimum warming up temperature for the hub if the connection is assembled in the . you can specify the value of trueing. Shaft Material Opens the Material Database where you select a material. Clamping Factor The calculation contains a table of minimum values for the steel parts clamping coefficient. Edit the properties of the material. if needed. Material can be selected form predefined values. Material can be selected form predefined values. the efficient interference equals the minimum interference and the maximum loading capacity. Pressing force affects the assembly shaft and hub.

Specifies the minimum cooling temperature of the shaft if the connection is assembled in the hot state. Also. Summary of Messages Toolbar buttons . which can be reduced by using shaft cooling.for the hub if the connection is assembled in the hot state. Base Temperature Shaft Cooling Specifies the base temperature of the surroundings environment. the hub warming temperature is shown. Results Displays the results of strength proportion calculation.

geometric dimensions. and checks allowable pressure in its threads. Screw Diameter Sets geometric screw dimensions.Torque Thread Friction Factor Screw Specifies or calculates screw diameter. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Screw Calculator Type of Strength Calculation Screw Diameter Design Material Design Check Calculation Loads Specifies force. Sets the value of maximum operating torque. length. Axial Force Max. usually the thread small diameter. . and Mean Screw Diameter Min. Calculates the screw diameter according to the specified load. Thread Diameter. and thread friction coefficient. Performs the stress check in the screw. and maximum length of loaded screw. and safety coefficient.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Power Screw Calculator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Power Screw Calculator . Pitch. Values are presented in the table in the Engineer's Handbook. moment. Power Transmission panel Power Sets the smallest screw diameter. Designs the minimum material values for the specified load. and properties. factor for end conditions.Calculation tab Sets parameters for calculation of a power screw. material properties. Max. Sets the friction coefficient in the thread between the nut and the screw. Sets the value of maximum operating force carried by the screw. nut height.

Diameter Nut Height Factor for End Conditions Max. Sets the yield strength of the screw. Check the check box to open Material Database and select a material. Click the arrow to show appropriate values in the Allowable Thread Pressure table. Allowable Thread Pressure Elasticity Module Yield Strength Safety Factor Type of transmission Rotation Shift Results Displays the calculated and limit stresses in the screw and pressure in the thread. such as steel. Specifies screw properties. Sets the coefficient according to the diagram of mounting types. aluminum. Summary of Messages area Displays the reports about calculation. Sets the allowable thread pressure in the nut. usually from 2 through 10. or a custom value. Specifies the active nut (thread) height. Edit the properties of the material. Specifies the maximum loaded length of the power screw. See the chapter in the Engineer's Handbook. To open the Summary of Messages at the bottom of the Calculation tab. Length Material small diameter. double-click the double line at the bottom or click the chevron. Toolbar buttons Shift Transform rotation to shift. Selects the material. Rotation . Transform shift to rotation. if needed. Sets the required safety level.

From the Loads & Supports drop-down list select Supports. and on the toolbar click Add Restraint. select restrain in the tree control. Enter the radial displacement values for XY and XZ planes.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Beam and Column Calculator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Restraint Use this dialog box to enter parameters of a restraint. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Frame panel Beam/Column Calculator Click the Beam Calculation tab. . Double-click the support preview in the Autodesk Inventor window. Define the plasticity for XY and XZ planes. In the Loads & Supports area of the Calculation tab. Distance Yielding Radial Displacement Enter the distance value which defines the distance of the restraint from the left side of the element. and click Restraint properties.

Performs the strength check for the specified load. The value is automatically modified according to the selected material. Yield Strength Displays the maximum stress that can be applied without permanent deformation of the test specimen. Support type Select the supported edges or fixed edges and the support type. Designs the minimal material values for specified load and dimensions. the selected material is changed to User. square. dimensions. When you edit the value. and rectangular shape with uniformly distributed load over the surface. . if needed. or with load concentrated at the center. Edit the properties of the material. Load Select the appropriate type of load and load input. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Frame panel Plate Calculator Type of Strength Calculation Design for specific deflection Design of minimal material values Design of plate thickness Strength check Shape of plate Select on of the place shapes from the drop-down menu: Circular Flat Plate. Material Select the check box to open Material Database and select a material. Designs the minimal thickness and material values for specified load and deflection.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Plate Mechanical Calculator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Plate Calculator Calculates flat plates of the circular. or Rectangular Flat Plate. and properties. Designs the minimal thickness of plate for specified load and properties. Square Flat Plate.

Safety Factor Dimensions of Plate Summarizes all parameters necessary for definition of the plate geometry. click the Results icon. To complete the plate calculation or design. It displays the reports about calculation. click Calculate. Summary of Messages area To open the Summary of Messages area at the bottom of the tab. Toolbar buttons . double-click the double line at the bottom of tabs or click the chevron. To create an output report.selected material is changed to User. Tip Specifies the value you enter or select from the predefined list. Results Displays the calculated values and the plate strength check.

Calculated value of Start Energy. Access: Ribbon: Design tab Power Transmission panel Drum Brake Calculator. Closes the Start Energy dialog box. Then click the button next to the Start Energy edit field. Enter value of Speed of the braked element.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Calculators > Brake Mechanical Calculators Concept Procedure Quick Reference Start Energy Displays a dialog for energy calculation. Calculated value of the Rotary Energy. Enter value of Mass of the braked element. Cone Brake Calculator. . or Band Brake Calculator. Click to confirm the selection and close the dialog window. Enters the Start Energy value in the calculation. OK Cancel Rotation Energy Moment of Inertia Revolutions Rotary Energy Kinetic Energy Mass Speed Kinetic Energy Start Energy Enter value of Moment of Inertia of the braked element. Disc Brake Calculator. Enter the value for Revolutions of the braked element. Calculated value of the Kinetic Energy.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center Topics in this section Content Center Installation and Setup Administrative tasks on the Autodesk server Migrate or synchronize user libraries Configuration of Content Center libraries Content Center Environment Find parts in the Content Center Library Content Center Consumer AutoDrop Refresh Standard Components Content Center Editor Publish parts and features in Content Center .

Overview Install the server and client components for a design team. Then the administrator configures the Content Center libraries in the Configure Libraries dialog box. or include a common project (. the administrator creates the vault project file first and makes it the active project. If you are connecting to a vault database and the Content Center libraries database.ipj) as a template. Autodesk Vault does not support included project files. if needed. In the common project.ipj) with the desired configuration of Content Center libraries. This project can be used as a template or as an included project. Create a common project file (. Library configurations for team members are saved in the Autodesk Inventor project and can be edited in Project Editor. create the user accounts for anyone requiring editing permissions. In Autodesk Vault Server Console.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Content Center Installation and Setup Concept Procedure Share libraries across design workgroups Before beginning. designate an administrator who installs and manages Content Center libraries on the Autodesk data management server. This enables each team member to have the same configuration. Install the server components Use the server console to configure libraries on the server Create Content Center Editor user accounts in the server console Install the client components . Each team member can create a personal project using the project file (. Communicate user account information and the Login procedure to each member in the team.ipj) file that is configured with the shared libraries. change the folder where standard components are created. Note You cannot include a project file in an Autodesk Vault project file.

ipj) and configure Content Center libraries Configure local project settings .Connect to the server from Autodesk Inventor Create a project file (.

idf file comprise one library and must be maintained as a pair for both Import and Export. Note An .idf file (containing Content Center library data) to the server.idf files) Note For information on the location of the libraries see the Autodesk Data Management Server (version) Implementation Guide.idf files) that are not in the database to the server console. Attaches an existing . Attach a library (pair of . Access Start Programs Autodesk Autodesk Data Management Autodesk Vault (Server Console). which may be different than the name of the . Use the Attach command to: Reattach to the server a library you previously detached. Copies library files (a pair of . The guide is installed as a PDF in Program Files > Autodesk > ADMS [version] > Help.mdf and .mdf file. Use the Library Name dialog box to specify the library name.mdf and an . The server console displays the list of Content Center libraries currently available on the server. Import .Reference Use the server console to perform Content Center Library administrative tasks.mdf and .mdf and . Context Menu for Libraries folder Create Library Attach Creates a read/write Content Center library that can be configured for use in a local or remotely served Autodesk Inventor project.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Administrative tasks on the Autodesk server Concept Procedure Quick Reference Autodesk Server Console .

for example. or can be manually copied to another location. Context Menu for a selected library Detach Removes Content Center libraries from the list of available libraries in the Content Center Library Manager dialog box. to be backed up or moved to another computer. The libraries can be reattached and made available using the Attach command. All data contained in the library is permanently deleted. The guide is installed as a PDF in Program Files > Autodesk > ADMS [version] > Help. Edits the display name of the library.Note For information on the location of the libraries see the Autodesk Data Management Server (version) Implementation Guide. Note The read-only status of Autodesk Inventor standard and Parker libraries cannot be changed. Copies a library from the Autodesk Inventor 2008 or 2009 partition to the Autodesk Inventor 2010 partition. The guide is installed as a PDF in Program Files > Autodesk > ADMS [version] > Help. Delete Export Read Only Copy Edit Display Name Note For information on the location of the libraries see the Autodesk Data Management Server (version) Implementation Guide. . Copies a set of library files that are in the server console to a specified location. Detach does not delete them from the database. You can specify a folder on the same computer or a location available on the network. Detaches and deletes the selected library from the database. Changes the status of a user-created read/write Library to read-only.

If not selected. Parent families must be available in the current library configuration to perform the synchronization. Synchronization is not mandatory. The Libraries to Synchronize list displays all libraries that include out-of-date copied families with link to parents. change the location of the backup folder. Step 1: Welcome Page Step 2: Libraries to Migrate Review the introduction and click Next Select libraries to migrate and click Next. The Libraries to Migrate list displays all legacy libraries that need to be migrated. In the Projects dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Migrate or synchronize user libraries Concept Procedure Quick Reference Update Tool Use the Update Tool guide to migrate and synchronize user libraries. the library will not be available for use in your version of Autodesk Inventor. click Update Tool. Set the options and click Next to start the process. Do not create backup of customized part templates Select to discard your customized family templates. and you can replace the standard Step 3: Libraries to Synchronize Step 4: Library Analysis . In the Configure click Configure Content Center Libraries. Select location for family templates backup If appropriate. If you clear the selection for a library. customized legacy family templates are saved in the backup folder. Access: Click Manage Projects. Libraries dialog box. Select libraries to synchronize and click Next.

and you can replace the standard templates with your customized templates.folder. Done lists all actions that are complete. Final fix required lists families that require additional table fix. . The log file is saved in the specified folder. Create Log file Select to create a log file. Overwrite existing files Select to replace the existing files in the backup folder with the new files. Failures lists families that did not update and why the family failed to update. Step 5: Update Finished Review the process report.

you sometimes see edm_wse. So. Each installed product writes to its own log file in one of those subfolders. The log files are typically written to Documents and Settings\[USERID]\Local Settings\Temp. and Web client installations (named Server. there are subfolders for the server. client. Vault.log under Server\ too. . In addition. You can use a log file to track system operations. respectively). warning. and errors. and WebClient.log and msde.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Configuration of Content Center libraries Concept Procedure Quick Reference Content Center log files Log files are generated which record the events that occur during installation.

Moves the corresponding column to the left in the Detail List view. Select a property to display it in the view. Moves the selected property down in the list.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Content Center Environment Concept Procedure Quick Reference Customize Selection Use the Customize Selection dialog box to select or reorder properties displayed in the Detail List view. Access: In the Content Center dialog box. Lists family properties that can be displayed in the Detail List view. click View > Detail List on the menu. Moves the corresponding column to the right in the Detail List view. Properties list Move Up Move Down . Then right-click a column heading on the Detail List table and click Customize. Clear the check box to remove a property from the view. Moves the selected property up in the list.

Note A structure of all available categories is displayed. Displays all Search Result families in the Content Center dialog box. To specify a description as search criteria.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Find parts in the Content Center Library Concept Procedure Quick Reference Advanced Search Use Search for searching in Content Center Library. select the check box and enter a name in the text field. select the check box and enter a Part Number in . Look In: Search Now Search Result: Move to Content Center Basic Tab Name To specify a name as search criteria. Select categories to include them in the selection. Part Number To specify a Part Number as search criteria. or Members to list all members of families that match the searching criteria. select the check box and enter a description in the text field. You can search in the entire Library. Access: In the Content Center dialog box. and then Look For: Click the drop-down arrow and select Families to list families in Search Result. click Search click Advanced Search on the Quick Search bar. Click the Categories button to specify categories to include in the search. Lists families that match the selected search criteria. or you can search for a part that matches specific criteria in the Advanced Search dialog box. Starts the search process. .

Displays the search criteria to use when Search Now is clicked. If you select In List operator. or range for the selected parameter. list of values. For string parameters. To specify a Material as search criteria. Select a parameter from the list of category parameters. Ends by. Select a condition operator for the selected parameter. and click OK. use a semicolon to separate individual values. Notes: Enter a value with the unit for numeric values. If the unit is not specified. Standard Material To specify a Standards search criteria. If you select Material as Parameter. Starts with. click the drop-down arrow and select from the list. select the check box and click the button next to the Value field. Defines a value. Advanced Tab Define more criteria Parameter Condition Defines a search condition.select the check box and enter a Part Number in the text field. Then select appropriate materials in the Select Materials dialog box. or In List operator. click the button next to the Value field to select materials from the list. Value Add to list Find items that match these criteria . centimeters are used as the default unit. choose Contains. Adds the search condition to the list of search criteria.

Replace from Content Center: Replaces a Content Center component in an assembly. Change Size Use the Family dialog box to select a family member. and then complete 1 of the following operations: Place from Content Center: Places a part into an assembly. Available only for Content Center parts. Places the selected member as a standard part. . Places the selected by using the Content Center component iMates. Replaces all instances of the selected part in the assembly. Place Feature: Places a feature into a part or assembly. Note The available options depend on how the dialog box is accessed Access: The following commands use the Family dialog box: Open from Content Center Place Part from Content Center Place Feature from Content Center Replace from Content Center As Custom As Standard Use iMates Replace All Places the selected member as a custom part. Change size: Changes the size of a Content Center component in an assembly.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Content Center Consumer Concept Procedure Quick Reference Place or Replace from Content Center.

Context menu: Add to Favorites Select tab Table View Family Information Adds the part or feature with the selected parameters to the active Favorites group. .

The target cone angle and the bolt head cone angle must be the same. use drag and drop or double-click the selected AutoDropenabled family. Access: In an open assembly file: In the Place from Content Center dialog box: Select an AutoDrop enabled Family.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > AutoDrop Concept Procedure Quick Reference AutoDrop Use AutoDrop to automatically size and place standard content. washers.used for bearings.used for bearings. Note Hold down ALT and double-click an AutoDrop enabled family to place a member from the Family dialog box. washers. retaining rings. and so on. Select a shaft cylinder . and click OK. and so on. Select an edge on a shaft .used for a countersunk bolt. Select an edge in a housing . Double-click an AutoDrop enabled family. From the Browser Bar Favorites drop-down menu.used for bearings. Overview of individual cursors: Select a conical hollow face . retaining rings. The Family dialog box allows selection of specific sizes and material. .

used for external and internal retaining rings.used for nuts. bearings. pins. the inserted component can follow the pattern. washers. If the target geometry is in a pattern. Select a normal planar face . Done inserts the component to the assembly and stops AutoDrop. This command finishes the current insertion and AutoDrop continues with the given family. If the target geometry is in a pattern. The subsequent default member is always the last one dropped. You can insert several sizes during one command call. Available for some bolts only. bearings. By default. Used as a secondary target after a cylindrical face was selected. Toolbar commands Change size inserts the part and opens the Part Family dialog box where you can edit the component. and so on. and so on.Select a hollow cylindrical face -used for bolts. Bolted Connection opens the Bolted Connection Generator. not an assembly. this option is switched on. Note The pattern must be on a part. Follow pattern for rectangular patterns. Apply inserts the component to the assembly. bolts. the inserted component can follow the . pins. Select a hole edge -used for bolts. Select a groove edge Select an inner groove edge . Select a tapped cylindrical face . nuts. washers.used for nuts. Follow pattern is for circular patterns. and so on. pins.

such holes are not populated. if you select a circular edge of a hole and in the target component there are several co-planar circular edges with the same diameter. If there is a component already inserted to some geometry. Insert multiple inserts multiple components. use this switch to populate components for all holes. regardless of the flip. the Flip command is not available. By default. the inserted component can follow the pattern. which look the same from both sides. The bearing is always inserted to mate the adjacent planar face. It changes the bearing side used for mating (for example for tapered roller bearings). This switch is available if AutoDrop identifies several available targets like the selected target. If the Insert multiple switch is on. For example. Use the tooltip of the Insert multiple button to check how many components are offered for the insertion. . the flip has no visible effect. Flip flips the bearing. For example. With some bearings. if a screw is inserted to some of the holes. Note The pattern must be on a part. this option is switched on. If the particular bearing family template does not have iMates defined from both sides of the bearing.geometry is in a pattern. Insert multiple function disregards such target. Insert multiple function does not offer targets for insertion that are already occupied. not an assembly. AutoDrop highlights the targets. This behavior happens even if the screw is invisible or suppressed.

Differing Language displays the language of the standard part when it differs from the current Content Center language.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Refresh Standard Components Concept Procedure Quick Reference Standard Component Refresh Use Refresh Standard Components to update out-of-date standard parts in an assembly by using the most current data from the Content Center library. For more details. see Statuses of standard parts before and after refresh. Clear the selection to skip the standard part during the refreshing. Content Center Files displays the path to the folder where Content Center part files are stored. The status changes after the part is refreshed. Status displays the status of the standard part. Access: Open an assembly file which contains Content Center standard parts. Standard parts must be saved in the Content Center Files folder to include them in the Refresh Standard Components process. Component shows the display name of the standard part. and click Manage tab Content Center panel Refresh. Use the Family Name to find the family in Content Center. if appropriate. Current Project Information Revised Standard Components . Project Name displays the name of the current project. The display name is for example visible in the assembly browser. Part File displays the name of the standard part file. Refresh selects the standard part to refresh. Family Name displays the current Family Name of the family saved in the library. Family Folder displays the folder where the standard part is saved within the Content Center Files folder. Lists all out-of-date Content Center standard parts.

Clears the selection for all standard parts in the Revised Standard Components list. Starts the refreshing process. see Warnings and Failures list and description. Opens the log file and displays a detailed report of the refreshing process. For more details.Select All Unselect All Refresh Click to Open Log File Selects all standard parts in the Revised Standard Components list. .

right-click. Select a family. and click Material Guide. Is available only while the process runs. and click Material Guide. right-click. and click Material Guide. Adding materials is always completed for the family in progress before the process stops. Select families (or one family). and select Family Table.Final Report Review the process report. right-click. Closes the Material Guide dialog box. Access: Click Manage tab Content Center panel Editor to open the Content Center Editor dialog box. select family members (rows) to add material to. Terminates the material adding process. Saves a detailed report about the material adding process into a TXT file. In the Family Table dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Content Center Editor Concept Procedure Quick Reference Material Guide (Panel 8) . or families to add materials and do one of the following: Select a category. Stop Save Report Finish . right-click. Then locate the category. family.

A dialog box to specify parameters and properties for the selected Extrude. You can publish either with all center points or publish the hole as a single hole without existing center points. For hole features with multiple hole center points. Text on a profile sketch is not included in a published feature. After specifying parameters and properties.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Content Center > Publish parts and features in Content Center Concept Procedure Quick Reference Publish feature Use the Publish Feature to select an Extrude. Sweep. Access: Click Manage tab Content Center panel Publish Feature. Parameters tab Properties tab . Sweep. or Hole feature is displayed. you can publish the hole in two ways. or Hole feature and its parameters and publish to a Content Center library. click Next to open the Publish dialog box. Revolve. Revolve.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator Topics in this section Frame Generator Apply or Modify End Treatments BOMs and Cut Lists Structural Shape Authoring Tips for generating frames Frame Generator browser .

Error messages are shown in different ways: If problems occur. While most errors produce a logical error message. changing. an uncommon and unknown error can result in a message stating the error is unknown. Autodesk Inventor displays a message dialog box. Problems can also occur while you use commands such as Miter or Lengthen/Shorten Frame Member. or updating frame members. When you pass the cursor over the node for the sick element. The dialog box explains where the error originated and why the error occurred. a tooltip explains the reason for the sickness. You can fix errors when they occur in various operations: Insert frame member Change frame member Miter Trim to Frame Trim to Face Notch Lengthen Promote/Demote Position update sick End Treatment update sick Other .Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator > Frame Generator Concept Procedure Quick Reference Resolve errors Errors can occur when inserting. An icon is displayed next to a node in the browser indicating that the element is sick.

Select Frame Members to Remove End Treatments Select the frame member to return to its original creation state. . Access: On the ribbon.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator > Apply or Modify End Treatments Concept Procedure Quick Reference Remove End Treatments Returns a frame member to its original creation state. and select Remove End Treatments . Click the Frame panel drop-down arrow. click the Design tab.

and support ballooning and cut list roll-up. length. names. All frame members receive a unique part number. Quantities on the bill of materials are updated when a part is added or removed from the assembly The Frame Generator is integrated with the bill of materials and drawing functionality in Autodesk Inventor. Frame members behave like other Autodesk Inventor parts in Bills of Material (BOMs) and Parts List. vendors. It includes quantities. The BOM functionality in Autodesk’s Inventor software supports three of the most common structural frame bills of material: A unique part number for frame members with identical stock. and cut treatments.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator > BOMs and Cut Lists A bill of materials is a table that contains information about the parts within an assembly. and other needed information. costs. Often. the part number is the stock number. Assigning Part Numbers Cut Lists . A single part number per frame stock type.

When you select a category. The selected sketch point is highlighted in red in the graphics window. it is automatically selected. Base Extrusion Select Geometry Parts authored for Frame Generator require a base extrusion feature.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator > Structural Shape Authoring Concept Procedure Quick Reference Structural Shape Authoring Access: Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Structural Shape Layout Defines the category and geometry of the part to be published. the graphics and selection prompts adjust appropriately to guide authoring. the user has to manually select the base feature. The Selection column contains two selection filters. Predefined Point is the default. Category Use the pull-down menu to view the list of available publishing categories. . and is shown in the Selection Preview. and is selected automatically once a base extrusion is selected. Two geometry types are listed. Geometry Mapping In the geometry mapping group box. Default Base point This row becomes available after the first selection row is satisfied. Select Geometry defines a base point based on your selection of a point in the highlighted sketch of the selected extrusion feature. define the structural shape. The default insertion point is the geometric center of the profile. If there is more than one feature. If there is only one extrusion feature in the part.

Required parameters have a light yellow background. Mapping is required for parameters displayed with a light yellow background. Saves the authoring of the part and then closes the dialog box. . OK Available when all of the geometries are selected. Category Parameters and Table Columns Lists the parameters for the selected category. Enables mapping of table columns to category parameters. and optional parameters have a white background.Selection Preview A selection preview provides dynamic visual feedback from the sketch of the extrusion feature you select. Parameter Mapping Enables mapping between category parameters. Completes the authoring of the part and starts the Publish part command. The only required parameter for Frame Generator authoring is the base length. Publish Now Available when all geometries are selected and required parameters are mapped. The preview is available after you select a category for authoring and the extrusion feature is selected. Cancel Discards authoring input and closes the dialog box. and template parameters. family columns. All steel shape categories provide the same parameters to map to the appropriate part table column names.

Setting transformation to a frame member occurrence has no effect in the parent assembly when the frame document is in Positional representation. although they can move or rotate together. ellipse). A frame can be placed in a deep-level subassembly. Note that the drag function is not available for promoting or demoting frame members in the browser. Frames must be encapsulated in an assembly to apply kinematics. Frame members cannot be inserted on closed curves (like circle. In that case. Each frame member must have a corresponding line in the reference skeleton part. Only entities inside a parent assembly can be selected for Frame Generator commands. You can promote and demote frame members in the browser using the context menu. Frame Generator does not consider bending practices or bend deformation according to established manufacturing standards. Ensure that the subassemblies that contain the frame members are grounded after demoting. use the standard sweep feature in Autodesk Inventor to complete the insertion. To ensure best performance of Frame update. you can create sharp bends that cannot actually be manufactured due to material or manufacturing process limitations. Individual frame members do not move relative to one another. As a result. perform an in-place edit on its parent assembly before you use any Frame Generator commands. Frames are automatically updated while you edit the skeleton model. Frame Generator support of Positional representations is limited to changes in the frame only. Consistency between the frame assembly and the reference skeleton model might be broken if you do one of the following: Replace the reference skeleton components . put only skeleton lines for locating frame members into a skeleton model.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator > Tips for generating frames Frame members Frame Generator supports assemblies and weldments. If closed curves are involved. You must keep the reference skeleton model in sync with the Frame assembly.

Frame members are based on the same standard. Frame members created with Frame Generator have identical Stock Numbers to the numbers found in Content Center. If splines or arc segments are involved. family. If you create frame members using multiple edges and the Merge feature. End treatments Frame end treatments of a rail on a spline are not directly supported in Frame Generator. You can complete multiple end treatments by accumulating basic end treatments. Vault. you cannot apply automatic end treatments to them with Frame Generator commands. you can apply cuts and trims using standard modeling commands within Autodesk Inventor to edit the part directly. . Frame Generator provides a mechanism for automatically organizing. Drawing manager. and BOMs With Frame Generator. Note If the Part Number is left blank. either add a straight segment at the end and use the automated functionality for end treatments. Frame Generator leaves the Part Number blank when the frame member is created. and size as Metal Shapes in the Content Center. The part name follows standard Autodesk Inventor behavior by defaulting to the file name for each frame member. or other manual methods to update them. or use the standard editing commands in Autodesk Inventorto complete end treatments. You can change this part number. Use a frame assembly to organize structural members under an assembly.Replace the reference skeleton file on disk Check out inconsistent skeleton files from the Vault. A single assembly can have only one frame assembly. Autodesk Inventor populates the file name for a part number upon creation. parts lists. Once you save file names that include length. Frame Generator in Autodesk Inventor 2010 does not support frame members created in Autodesk Inventor 2007. you must use Design Assistant. Frame Generator doesn't have multiple end treatment commands. Instead. you can extract end treatments on individual structural members in bills of material (BOMs) and parts lists.

naming. Skeletal frame models default to a Reference state in BOM structure. . and saving under a file name.

an assembly node is added to the browser structure. a prompt is displayed with the option to save the skeletal model as an assembly before you continue. When you save the skeletal model as an assembly.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Build structural frames with Frame Generator > Frame Generator browser Uses the Assembly browser to organize and manage machine frame entities. When you insert the first frame member. a folder is created in the project workspace with the name of the frame assembly. When you click OK to confirm the name of the frame assembly. and a second prompt is displayed to specify the name for the frame assembly. The frame is designed in this assembly. Browser structure of frames Context menu for frame members Context menu for end treatments .

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments Topics in this section Weldments environment Templates for weldments Strategies for designing weldments Weld bead feature types Weld feature groups Welding symbols on models .

it cannot be converted back to a regular assembly. Click the arrow to select from the list. Click the desired button to specify a new standard. Click the desired button to specify the weld group to use. You set the standard to use and the default weld bead material. back up each assembly before converting it. Access: Ribbon: Environments tab Weldment Convert panel Convert to Standard Sets the standard to use for the weldment file. Although all assembly capabilities are available within a weldment. Specifies where to place any existing assembly features. Feature Conversion Weld Bead Material BOM Structure . Click the arrow to select a material from the list.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments > Weldments environment Concept Procedure Quick Reference Convert to Weldment reference Converts an existing assembly file to a weldment assembly. Default is the standard set at installation. You also indicate the weld feature group in which to place any assembly features. Note Once you convert an assembly to a weldment. Sets the BOM structure to use in the converted assembly. Sets the weld bead material to use as the default.

7. To replace the default template.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments > Templates for weldments Concept Procedure Create templates for weldments All new weldment files are created with a template. Set the standard to use. settings from the default weldment template are applied to the weldment.iam" and replace it with a template that has the same name. 2. visibility. 1. change the sizes of the origin work planes to accommodate the average weldment size. remove "weldment. 4. 3. Specify the weld bead material type. Save the file in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder or a subfolder of Templates. using an existing template. You can create your own templates. and then add them to the templates provided by Autodesk Inventor. A weldment file automatically becomes a template when it is saved to the Templates folder. Set the default units of measurement. and enabled status. When you start a new weldment. Note The "weldment. Create a weldment. If needed. .iam" file in the Templates folder is the default assembly template. 6. Set the properties for the file. 5.

Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments > Strategies for designing weldments You design your weldments based on how you want to create and maintain welding symbols and weld bead annotations (caterpillars and end fills) in your drawings. Use of the weldment environment supports the automatic creation and updating of model welding symbols and weld bead annotations in the drawing environment. or manual methods. It also supports the creation of specialized weld state views in drawings. Design weldments for assembly size and performance Design weldments for automation in drawings Design weldments for specialized weld state views in drawings . You can create and maintain your welding symbols and weld bead annotations using fully automated. You can also create specialized views of the different weld states in your drawing. partially automated.

The Bead box specifies the parameters for constructing the cosmetic bead. Edge is the default. Select Mode Sets the selection preference for areas on which to apply the cosmetic weld bead. A cosmetic weld can terminate on a work plane or extend across all selected geometry for a full-length weld. From-To select beginning and ending faces or planes on which to terminate the weld feature.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments > Weld bead feature types Concept Procedure Quick Reference Cosmetic welds Creates a cosmetic weld feature in a weldment assembly. In a weldment. Loop selects a closed loop. Click the arrow to select the extent method. The weld bead and the welding symbol are separate features in the welds folder of the browser. A welding symbol may be created simultaneously with the feature. Chain automatically selects tangent. Cosmetic weld beads are useful when the design does not require interference analysis or the aesthetic appearance of solid weld beads. so you can specify any welding symbol values for any weld bead feature. The welding symbol and the weld bead feature are not associated. When consumed by a welding symbol. Extents Area . Sets the cross-sectional area for a cosmetic weld bead so the physical properties of the cosmetic bead can be calculated. Determines the method for ending a cosmetic weld. click Weld tab Weld panel Cosmetic. contiguous edges. but may be created in a separate operation. but must be parallel. Access: Right-click the Welds folder in the browser and select Edit. Their approximate physical properties can be included in mass properties. the faces or planes may be on other parts. All creates the weld on all features and sketches in the specified direction. the cosmetic bead is a child node of the welding symbol. On the ribbon.

Select Create Welding Symbol to expand the dialog box to set welding symbol parameters. . Click this link to go to the Model Welding Symbol Reference .

select iProperties. Except for color style. Enabled Weld Bead Color Style End Fill Color Style . and then click the Weld Bead tab. Also sets color style of the weld bead material. which specifies that the weld bead feature can be selected in the graphics window. Sets the color style to use for the weld bead material. Default is On (checked). Sets the color style to use for end fill. Controls characteristics for weld bead features in a weldment assembly weld bead group. Default is As Weld Bead. The default setting is On (checked). Clear the check mark to turn visibility Off. Visible Specifies whether the weld bead feature is visible in the graphics window. characteristics may also be set from the context menu. Clear the check mark to change weld bead features to Not Enabled.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments > Weld feature groups Concept Procedure Quick Reference Weldment group properties Access: In the browser. Default is As Material. right-click the Welds group. Specifies whether solid fillet weld beads and cosmetic welds are visible and enabled.

Staggers the welding symbols for fillets. Available for ISO and DIN only. When consumed by a welding symbol. Access: In a weldment assembly. Bead Selects one or more cosmetic. select the Create Welding Symbol check box. click Weld tab Weld panel Symbol. Click the arrow to select no identification line.Autodesk Inventor > Assemblies > Weldments > Welding symbols on models Concept Procedure Quick Reference Model welding symbol Provides annotation and acts as a grouping mechanism by referencing multiple beads with a single welding symbol. Sets the layout and contents of the welding symbol. All weld bead features (consumed and unconsumed) are listed in the Beads folder under the Welds browser node. Identification Line Swap Arrow/ Other Symbols Stagger Tail note box ABC . The welding symbol groups the features into a composite weld bead. identification line above. or identification line below the reference line. On the ribbon. Click to switch the arrow and symbols above or below the reference line. The welding symbol leader is attached to one of the consumed beads. and groove weld beads to be consumed by a welding symbol. right-click the Welds folder and select Edit. Adds description to the selected reference line. You can drag the leader point to any of the consumed beads. annotated by a single welding symbol. If creating a welding symbol at the same time as the bead. Available only if fillet welding symbols are set on both sides of the reference line. fillet. Select check box to enclose note text in a box. beads are nested under the welding symbol that consumes them. The beads and welding symbols are grouped in the welding browser under the Welds folder.

Specifies the distance between welds. Specifies the contour finish for the weld. Specifies the length of the weld. Click button to select symbol from palette.Prefix Leg Depth Symbol Sets a prefix to precede Leg 2 text. Sets the weld depth. Specifies the angle between weldments. Specifies the number of welds. Specifies whether the weld is brazed. Specifies the number of welds. Specifies the angle between weldments. Specifies the space between weldments. Specifies the clearance for the braze. Specifies the type of weld for secondary fillets. This button is available only when the active drafting standard is based on ANSI. Select or clear the check box to add or remove the brazing symbol. Angle Number Length Pitch Contour Secondary fillet type Angle Brazing Clearance Depth Diameter Gap Height Length Method Middle Number . Specifies the diameter of the weld. Specifies the finish method for the weld. Click the arrow and choose the contour from the list. Arrow side symbol selects symbol to display on arrow side of the reference line. Specifies the length of the weld. Specifies the depth of the weld. Click the button to display and choose from the palette of available weld types. Specifies text for the leg. Click the arrow and choose the method from the list. Specifies the type of inspection to perform on the weld. Other side symbol selects symbol to display on the other side of the reference line. Specifies the height of the weld.

Click the arrow to select an unconsumed fillet bead. Click the button to turn the symbol off or on. All Around symbol Fillet Weld Linking . the Current Bead option prefills the symbol values with fillet bead values. Specifies the thickness of the weld. Click the button to turn the flag off or on. Specifies the size of the weld. None is the only option if all no fillet weld beads exist or all are consumed by welding symbols. Specifies the thickness of the weld.Root Root gap Size Small leg Spacing Thickness Flag Specifies the root thickness of the weld. Specifies the gap for the weld. Associatively links values of a single fillet weld bead with one side of the fillet welding symbol values and options. linked welding symbol controls are controlled by the bead and cannot be edited. Can be linked to one side (Arrow or Other) or both sides of the parent welding symbol. Available only when unconsumed fillet weld beads exist or when creating a new fillet weld bead. Select None to remove the association between the fillet bead and the welding symbol. allowing access to previously linked values. Specifies whether to use an all-around symbol on the selected reference line. When a welding symbol is created with the fillet bead. Specifies the space between welds. When the link is established. Specifies whether to add a flag indicating a field or site weld to the selected reference line.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings Topics in this section Drawings overview Create drawing views Drawing annotations Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD Exploded views and presentations .

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview Topics in this section Drawing Environment Drawing Browser Templates for drawings Sheet Formats Create drawings Deferring automatic updates to drawings .

Use this template or another predefined template. is managed by the CAD Administrator. Microsoft Vista: Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates. notes. or delete the elements as needed to customize them for your company. your selection of a default drafting standard sets the default template used to create drawings. which contains a master version of all styles. so they are available to other designers. it is automatically assigned an active drafting standard that controls the styles used to format dimensions. title blocks.idw or Standard. Save the changes to sheets and views. text. A drawing becomes a template when you save it in the Templates folder. or create your own templates to enforce conventions. title blocks. BSI. Override this behavior by specifying a full path and file name to any Autodesk Inventor drawing (*. blocks. The active standard has a default set of styles. modify one of the predefined templates. and view definitions can be retained in the template. save them to the style library. By default. Your borders. the new template is available. Add or edit styles in the current document. create a DWG template in Autodesk Inventor using an AutoCAD file that contains the appropriate layers.dwg files directly. in the drawing template. and revision tables. Autodesk Inventor drawings also include elements that are not part of the named standard. for example. You can use the default standard or select from another named standard (ANSI. preserving annotations on drawing sheets. if you have a drawing file that contains the setup you want to use for other drawings. GB. If you must supply customers with AutoCAD files. edit. or JIS). View annotations and general notes are not saved in a template.idw. Usually.*. line weights. For example.dwg) in the following registry key: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Autodesk\Inventor\RegistryVersion[version]\Applets\DrawingLayout\Preferences\General\Standard Template Override Setting the drafting standard Setting up drawing resources Setting up sheets in a template Adding default views Setting properties Setting a default drawing template . ISO. terminators. Create a template from a drawing.dwg) located in the Templates folder for the current project or in the Default Templates location. such as custom symbols.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview > Drawing Environment Each new drawing is created from a template. the style library. and if you want other designers to use the custom styles. Note Autodesk Inventor needs a valid drawing template file when opening AutoCAD . and other elements that are dictated. and borders you need to deliver to your AutoCAD customers. The location of the Templates folder is by default: Microsoft Windows XP: Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates. When you install Autodesk Inventor. The next time you create a drawing file. save a copy of it in the Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Templates folder. When you create a drawing. Autodesk Inventor uses the Standard drawing template files (Standard. DIN. Specify the object defaults for these properties in the Styles Editor. Copy.

and views in a drawing or template. Drawing Resources Sheets Views .Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview > Drawing Browser Concept Quick Reference Drawing browser Shows the Drawing Resources. sheets.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview > Templates for drawings Concept Procedure Customize drawing templates The following steps get you started quickly with your company standard for drawing files. These steps are overview of the main components of a customized drawing template. The Drawing Resources folder in the Drawing browser contains folders for sheet formats. and sketched symbols.Part C: Format text tips Setting Sheet Formats Updating styles . borders.Part A: Set up and maintenance tips Title block basics .Part B: Adding Properties Title block basics . Each can be reused in new sheets and saved in the template file. Custom IDW template setup overview Configure Document Settings Clean up the browser Setting the border Title block basics . title blocks.

Sets the number and style for the vertical zones. Sets the number and style for the horizontal zones. Click to select an option. Bottom/Right sets the base point for zone labeling to the bottom right corner of the drawing border. Select Insert or Edit Instance from the menu. Number of Zones sets the number of horizontal zones. Enter the number in the box. Label Sets the label style for horizontal zones. Click to select an option. Number of Zones sets the number of vertical zones. Access: In the drawing browser. Top/Left sets the base point for zone labeling to the top left corner of the drawing border.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview > Sheet Formats Concept Procedure Quick Reference Edit Drawing Border Parameters Edits the parameters for a custom zone border inserted in a drawing. expand Drawing Resources and Borders. and right-click a custom border instance. Label sets the label style for vertical zones. Enter the number in the box. Horizontal Zones Vertical Zones Label Zones From .

shows a thumbnail view of the source drawing. and lists drawing resources. and sketched symbols to multiple drawings. Source Resource shows the drawing resources hierarchy. Skipped Files dialog box opens if a target file: Is the same as the source drawing. shows a preview image. Optionally replace existing resources in the target drawing. Add drawings opens the Select Target Drawings so you can browse to the desired folder to select one or more target drawings. Use the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard to: Transfer selected title blocks. Source Drawing selects files to process in a detailed view. A target drawing can be listed only once. borders. . Select Target Drawings page Selects the target drawing or multiple drawings. Is read-only. Preview. Access: Click Start menu [version] Tools Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard. Close Autodesk Inventor before you can use the wizard. Welcome page Describes the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard processes. Click the File or Path column name to sort files. if available. Is already listed. Select Source Drawing and Resources page Selects the source drawing.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview > Create drawings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard The Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard is a command that copies drawing resources from a source drawing to a target drawing. Navigate to the appropriate folder.

and sketched symbols. Select Option page Specifies how to handle drawing resources in the target file that have the same name as drawing resources in the source file. Start begins processing of selected files. Yes replaces drawing resources in the target file with the same name as resources in the source file. No gives a unique name to target drawing resources that have the same name as those in the source file.Has not been migrated to the current version of Autodesk Inventor. . Begin the Batch Processing page Shows progress of transferred selected borders. Cancel halts processing. The target drawing version retains its original name. Results of the processing are shown in a log file. title blocks. Pause temporarily halts transferring resources. The copied resource is named Copy of ResourceName. Next progresses to the next page when one or more target drawing is specified.

associated drawings are updated automatically. keeping it static until you change its update status. To defer automatic updates before opening a drawing To defer automatic updates in an open drawing To enable automatic updates in a drawing . You can defer the automatic updates for a drawing.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawings overview > Deferring automatic updates to drawings Concept Procedure Defer automatic updates to a drawing When you change part and assembly models.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views Topics in this section Develop assembly drawings Design view representations in drawing files Drawing views Drawing view alignments Sketches in drawings Projecting geometry to a drawing sketch Section views Detail Views Overlay Views Break Operations Crop Operations Slice Operations Create drawing views of surfaces .

You can schedule plotting so that several jobs print in a batch at a specified time. Access: From the Start menu. Autodesk Page Setup Select Drawing Files Select Project Preview Print . click Programs Autodesk Inventor [version] Autodesk Multi-sheet plot.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Develop assembly drawings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Multi-sheet plot Plots a collection of drawing sheets of one or more sizes.

you can edit the drawing view and select a different Level of Detail representation. When creating a drawing view. For more information about creating and annotating drawings using Level of Detail representations. On the ribbon. Click the drawing sheet to place the view and close the dialog box. 4. 5.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Design view representations in drawing files Concept Procedure Create drawings of assemblies using Level of Detail representations Use a Level of Detail representation when creating a drawing of a top-level assembly to reduce the number of files loaded in memory. you can select a Level of Detail representation. Select the Level of Detail to represent in the view. Note After the view is created. In the Drawing View dialog box. 3. and other information. 2. Specify the Design View and Positional representations. Suppressed components are not used when computing the drawing view. 1. orientation. click Place Views tab Create panel Base. see the following sections: Guidelines for creating a view Guidelines for creating and maintaining annotations . browse to the appropriate assembly.

feature and component selection priorities. trails.lin files as the line type for an edge property. Feature. Sets the line color for the line type. line weight. Manages properties for view edges.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Drawing views Concept Procedure Quick Reference Part. or Color independently. and color for selected edge. Specifies how a line or type of curve is displayed. Specifies the thickness of the line type. Set to By Layer to inherit the line weight specified for the layer. Available only in a drawing sketch. Enter scale size in the text box. symbols. and sketch geometry. feature or part to the value specified in the style or for the current document. For more information. Access: Right-click on the edge of an object. Set to By Layer to inherit the line type specified for the layer. By Layer Line Type Line Weight Scale Color . and then select Properties from the menu. Changes the scale of the selected line type. select Other from the bottom of the Line Type list. user-defined symbols. overrides values set in the style. Clear the check box to set Line Type. Select the check box to show properties specified as By Layer. see Select Line Type (LIN file). Note To load an AutoCAD .lin file. Line Weight. Note You can load and use line types from AutoCAD *. or Edge properties Changes the line type. Set to By Layer to inherit the color specified for the layer. Available only when the Select command on the Quick Access toolbar is set to either Feature Priority or Part Priority.

or rotate an edge precisely by specifying an angle. and then select Rotate from the menu. the detail view maintains its relationship to the base view. When you rotate a base view with a dependent detail view. annotations maintain their associativity to the views. right-click. or an associated sketch. Other dependent views do not rotate with the base view. Note When you rotate views. Access: Select the view.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Drawing view alignments Concept Procedure Quick Reference Rotate Drawing Views Rotates the orientation of an existing drawing view. Method of Alignment Direction . You can rotate a view to make a selected edge vertical or horizontal. You cannot rotate a view that has a dependent section or auxiliary view.

Drawing. Access: Style Text attributes Font attributes Model. and Custom Properties Parameters Symbol Zoom buttons Ribbon: Sketch tab Draw panel Text .Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Sketches in drawings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Format Text Use the Format Text dialog box to set the attributes for a drawing or sketch text.

You can then use the projected geometry in the sketch.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Projecting geometry to a drawing sketch Concept Procedure Project geometry in a drawing view to a sketch You can select geometry in a drawing view and project it to a sketch associated with the view. . the projected geometry is used to help define sketched lines. The following image shows how model geometry can be projected into a sketch. In this particular example.

If you change the geometry in the model.Projected geometry remains associated to the parent geometry. . the projected geometry updates when the drawing is updated.

Right-click. . Select the geometry to project. 3. or open an existing sketch. On the ribbon.1. and then select Done [ESC] to project the selected geometry to the sketch. click Sketch tab Draw panel Project Geometry. 2. 4. Create a sketch attached to a drawing view. Tip On the Quick Access toolbar. click the arrow next to Select and change the filter to Select Part to select all geometry in a part in the view.

Selects the geometry to define the depth of the breakout area. The parent view must be associated to a sketch that contains the profile defining the breakout boundary Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Break Out. To Sketch uses sketched geometry associated with another view to define the depth of the breakout. Depth Type . Selects the method for defining the depth of the breakout. Through Part uses the thickness of a part to define the depth of the breakout. From Point sets a numeric value for the depth of the breakout. and then click to select the parent view. and then click the geometry in the drawing view. To Hole uses the axis of a hole feature in the view to define the depth of the breakout.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Section views Concept Procedure Quick Reference Break Out Removes a defined area of material to expose obscured parts or features in an existing drawing view. When the Profile command is selected. Click to select the arrow button. Click the arrow next to the box and select the Depth Type from the list. click the sketch profile to select it. Boundary Profile Depth Selector Selects the sketch geometry to define the breakout boundary.

Clear the check box to omit non-sectioned parts from the view. Select Show Hidden Edges to display the hidden edges in the view temporarily. Display . Available only when the Depth Type is From Point.define the depth of the breakout. You can pick a point on the hidden line geometry to define the depth of the breakout. Depth Specifies a numeric value for the depth of the breakout. Select Section All Parts to section parts that are not currently sectioned in the breakout area. Clear the check box to omit hidden lines in the view.

When creating a detail view of a presentation. . The view is created without an alignment to the parent view. trails are visible.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Detail Views Concept Procedure Quick Reference Detail View Creates and places a detailed drawing view of a specified portion of a parent view. but can be turned off if necessary.

Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Create panel Detail View/Scale Label Style Display .

projected. Positional Representation View Representation Label Display . A base view. or auxiliary view is the parent for an overlay view. Specifies the positional representation to use for the overlay view. Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Create panel Overlay And then click the view to use as the parent view. if applicable. Specifies the appearance of tangent edges and work features. A positional representation can be used in multiple overlay views. The Master positional representation can be used. Click the command to change the label visibility. The Edit View Label edits the view label the Format Text dialog box. The design view can be different from the parent view to allow an overlay view that shows only needed components. Clear the check box to enter a name in the box. Each overlay view can use a different design view representation. Specifies a positional representation and design view representation for position and visibility characteristics. Specifies a design view representation to use for an overlay view. Select the Associative check box to update the view when changes are made to the associative design view representation in the assembly environment. Indicates the label text used for the overlay view.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Overlay Views Concept Procedure Quick Reference Overlay View Creates an overlay view to show an assembly in multiple positions in a single view. The Use Positional Rep Name check box sets the name in the browser and label. The Toggle Label Visibility controls the visibility of the overlay view label.

Select the check box to shorten the length of tangent edges to distinguish them from visible edges. of a dependent view. Foreshortened sets the display of tangent edges. All reference models use reference line styles.The Tangent Edges sets the visibility of tangent edges the overlay view. Clear the check box to hide them. To change the display style. Style Sets the display style for the view. the dependent view uses the same display style as its parent view. . Select the check box to show work features. Style from Base sets the display style of a dependent view to be the same as its parent view. To change the display style. Sets the display to a shaded rendering. Sets the display to remove hidden lines. As Overlay sets all view items to the line type specified by the Layer style. Layer sets the line style for the overlay view. Select the check box to display tangent edges. click a command. Work Features specifies if work features are visible in the overlay view. When the check box is selected. As Part sets geometry to standard line styles used in the part model. clear the check box. Sets the display to show hidden lines.

Access: Style Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Break Orientation Display Gap Symbol Propagate to parent view .Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Break Operations Concept Procedure Quick Reference Break Creates a broken. foreshortened view.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Crop Operations Concept Procedure Quick Reference Crop Settings Use to set boundary type and visibility of crop cut lines for crop operations. Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Crop Default Boundary Type Display Crop Cut Lines .

Cannot be entirely made of reference geometry. Can be located in a Parent. this command is already activated when the dialog appears. Select an unconsumed Sketch for defining the Slice sketch geometry. Components that are not crossed by the Slice sketch geometry do not participate in the Slice operation.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Slice Operations Concept Procedure Quick Reference Slice Creates true zero-depth section views in a drawing. Checked The browser settings are overridden. Reference geometry cannot be selected for Slice sketch geometry. Child. Sketches which were created in a Draft View cannot be used for slice sketch geometry. or Sibling View of the Target View. Valid sketches include the following: Must contain at least one open profile (only open profiles are used for the Slice sketch geometry). Access: Ribbon: Place Views tab Modify panel Slice Select Sketch By default. All components crossed by the Slice sketch geometry participate in the Slice. . Note An unconsumed Model Sketch (in a part or assembly model) that is recovered in the Drawing cannot be used for slice sketch geometry. Not checked The Slice operation obeys the browser context menu settings for each component. if they are crossed by the Slice sketch geometry. Slice All Parts Override the browser context menu settings and slice all parts in the view.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Create drawing views > Create drawing views of surfaces Concept Procedure Include or exclude surfaces in a drawing view The workflow differs according to the combination of bodies and surfaces in a file. Create views containing both solid bodies and surfaces Create views containing surfaces but no solid bodies .

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations Topics in this section Suppressed annotations Dimensions in drawings Centerlines and center marks Symbols and sketched symbols Tables Hole notes Hole tables Balloons Parts lists Text in drawings Text in drawing sketches Weld annotations in drawings Revision tables and revision tags Sheet metal annotations in drawings .

it is not suppressed. If multiple leaders exist. . Note If a feature is unsuppressed or an assembly component is made visible. the dimension is suppressed if any of its target features or components are suppressed or made invisible. it is suppressed. Some leaders also have secondary leaders that reference other features or components than the primary leader. Components may be made invisible in the assembly (in a design view) or in the drawing. For example. the attached annotation does not appear. If only a primary leader is present and attached to a suppressed feature or invisible component. annotations are also unsuppressed and become visible. Some guidelines to help you understand why an annotation is no longer visible in a drawing: If a dimension is attached to multiple features or edges. and the primary leader is attached to a suppressed feature or invisible component. If a feature is suppressed or a component is made invisible. a center mark attached to a hole center becomes suppressed when the hole feature is suppressed. Any dimension attached to the center mark is also suppressed.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Suppressed annotations Annotations in drawings are suppressed when a part feature is suppressed or an assembly component is made invisible.

You can copy properties for these dimensions: Linear dimensions (placed and recovered from model) Angular dimensions (placed and recovered from model) Radial and Diameter dimensions (placed and recovered from model) Ordinate dimensions Ordinate and baseline dimension sets Note Individual ordinate and baseline dimension set members are valid sources only. Right-click again and select Settings to show the Copy Dimension Properties dialog box. Clear the check box to retain the current style of the target dimension. Style Select the check box to replace the style associated with the target dimension with the style of the selected dimension. Layer Dimension Overrides . Select the Text check box to copy the text overrides to the target dimension. but the entire set is a target. Access: Right-click a drawing dimension and select Copy Properties. Select the check box to replace the layer of the target dimension with the layer of the selected dimension. Those settings generally override the defaults specified in the dimension style. Specifies which of the properties set in the Edit Dimension dialog box to copy. Clear the check box to retain the current layer of the target dimension.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Dimensions in drawings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Copy Dimension Properties Copies one or more properties from the selected dimension to a target dimension.

Select the Inspection check box to copy the inspection dimension attributes specified on the Inspection Dimension tab of the Edit Dimension dialog box. Select the Precision and Tolerance check box to copy the overrides specified on the Precision and Tolerance tab of the Edit Dimension dialog box. Select the Arrowhead Shape check box to copy the arrowhead shape to the target dimension. . Select the Arrowheads Inside/Outside check box to copy the arrowhead position from the selected dimension to the target dimension.to the target dimension.

Apply to Projection Work features button Threshold . Access: When setting up a drawing or template. Only visible user-defined work features in the toplevel model are recovered. Axis Normal creates center marks when the circular edge is normal to the view plane. Centerlines are not added to features that fall outside the specified threshold. Sets the projection of objects in view for which automated centerlines or center marks are applied. cylindrical features (including the arc of punch features). use the Sketch Geometry option. bends.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Centerlines and center marks Concept Procedure Quick Reference Automated Centerline Settings Sets the defaults for adding automated centerlines and center marks to drawing views or changes the centerline and center mark settings for the selected view. Selects the features to which automated centerlines are applied. use the Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern buttons. or Include to recover a specific work feature. Defaults are used when a view is created. Click Tools tab Options panel Document Settings Drawing. Axis Parallel creates centerlines when the circular edge is parallel to the view plane. use Include Work Features to recover work features in the view. fillets. rightclick. select the view. If the features are used in a pattern and a patterned centerline is used. To add automated centerlines to a view. To add center marks to a sketch. and then select Automated Centerlines. To recover additional work features. and sheet metal punches. arc. Features can include holes. revolutions. click Automated Centerline Settings. Sets the limits for automated centerlines on fillet. and circular features.

Enter the minimum and maximum radii. Arc Angle Threshold Angle Minimum sets the minimum angle for creating a center mark or centerline on circles. Fillet sets threshold for applying automated centerlines to fillet features. or ellipses. Click the arrow. and circular features to the threshold. Enter the minimum and maximum radii. and then select the precision. . arcs. arcs.to features that fall outside the specified threshold. Precision sets the rounding precision for comparing the size of fillets. Circular Edges sets the threshold for applying automated centerlines to arcs and circular features.

minimum roughness value. Enter the appropriate values in the boxes. Majority indicates that this symbol specifies the standard surface characteristics for the drawing.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Symbols and sketched symbols Concept Procedure Quick Reference Surface Texture Symbol Specifies the content of a surface texture symbol. roughness value Ra minimum. Surface Type Click a button to select the desired surface type. be placed directly on the geometry in a drawing view. A specifies the roughness value. Basic Material removal required Material removal prohibited Miscellaneous Specifies the general attributes of the symbol. Click the button to add or remove each attribute. Surface Texture Symbols can also be used in notes and in the tolerance block. . The options in the dialog box are determined by the surface texture style. Access: Ribbon: Annotate tab Symbols panel Surface Symbols can be created as stand-alone objects. All-round adds the all-round indicator to the symbol. Force tail adds a tail to the symbol. or reside on top of a leader line which points to the geometry. The diameter is specified in the Leader style. Surface characteristics Defines the values for the surface characteristics. or grade number.

for ISO or DIN. maximum roughness value. This option is not used for ANSI. Specifies the machining allowance. F' specifies the surface waviness for JIS. E Not available when the Machining Removal Prohibited is selected. This option is not available when the removal prohibited option is selected. specifies the roughness cutoff or sampling length for additional roughness value. This option is available only when B has an entered value. C' for ANSI. B specifies the production method. C for ANSI. If the active drafting standard is based on ANSI. specifies the waviness height or sampling length. Click the arrow and choose the symbol from the list. ISO. or coating. For JIS. B' specifies an additional tail for the production method if the drafting standard is based on ISO or DIN. specifies the cutoff value and evaluation length. specifies the sampling length for additional roughness value. A' specifies the roughness value. For ISO or DIN. . For ANSI. treatment. or grade number. roughness value Ra maximum. minimum roughness value. specifies the roughness cutoff or sampling length for roughness average. can also specify the waviness height. or DIN standards. Available only when A' has an entered value. for JIS. specifies the reference length and evaluation length. F specifies the roughness value other than Ra or the parameter value other than Ra. D specifies the direction of lay. this box can be used to enter a note callout.minimum. or grade number.

click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor. Heading Gap shows the preset value. column header. Select the Title check box if you want the title to display. Line Spacing sets single. Text Styles shows the styles associated with the title.xls or . Direction to Wrap Table sets the wrap to Left or right. Title specifies the title to display on the table and in the browser. Sets the options for naming and formatting tables. row spacing. and cell data. and then select Table Layout or click the Table Layout command.csv file as the title . Row Gap shows the preset value. Heading specifies the placement of the heading in the table. . and sort order. Set to ascending or descending order. right-click a column heading. changes the title. or triple spacing between lines of text. click Table and edit values. the location of the heading. double. Heading and Table Settings Table Wrapping Note To change the default settings.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Tables Concept Procedure Quick Reference Table Layout For tables formatted by a Table style. Enter the title in the box or leave it blank if you want to use the name of the . bottom. and select Edit. or no heading. In the Edit Table dialog box. Direction specifies the direction of the item numbers in the table. Select the Enable Automatic Wrap check box and then specify the maximum rows and number of sections. Set top. Not available if the check box is not selected. Access: Right-click the table. In the Style and Standard Editor dialog box. The changed values are valid for the current document only. table wrap preference.

. Use caution because the changed setting could affect all other documents that use the style.unless you select click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Save to replace the library style.

Check the box to use model units. Access: Hole type Edit Field Right-click a hole note and select Edit Hole Note. Remove the check mark to use the measurement units specified by the dimension style. type a correct stacking sequence. Precision/Tolerance Settings opens the Precision and Tolerance dialog box so you can add tolerance information to values included in the note. For example: C <DIST1> X <DIST2> would result in C 10 X 10 Note To stack text. Use Default sets hole note to the default format. and variables to configure the annotation text of the note. or override the default precision settings. Allows custom configuration of the quantity note display in the context of a hole note (represented by the Quantity Note symbol). Tap Drill selects the Tap Drill hole note type. Click a value or symbol to add it to the hole note. Click a button in the Values and Symbols section to add the corresponding property to the note text. Overrides settings specified by the hole note style for the current document. Edits the content of the note. To remove. Displays the hole type. right-click and choose Stack. place the cursor Options Values and . Edit Quantity Note opens the Quantity Note dialog box. Adds values and symbols to the Edit Field.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Hole notes Concept Procedure Quick Reference Edit Hole Note Modifies formatting and note text for a hole note. inserted symbols. Part Units sets the note to use the measurement units of the model. Click the arrow next to the Insert Symbol button to select and insert a symbol. You can use a combination of text. select it.

Thread designation does not display if the thread has no thread information in part modeling. Fastener fit represents the fastener fit class used to define hole parameters in part modeling. Does not display if the feature has no fastener information. To remove. It is not a part modeling parameter. . Selects a symbol from the list to add to hole note. place the cursor after the value or symbol in the Edit Window and backspace.and Symbols symbol to add it to the hole note. Fastener size indicates the fastener size used to define hole parameters in part modeling. Hole diameter Hole depth Counterbore/Spotface diameter Counterbore/Spotface depth Countersink hole diameter Countersink hole angle Countersink depth is calculated from model hole parameters. Not displayed if the hole note is used inside a hole table or if the quantity is less than two. Does not display if the feature has no fastener information. Does not display if the feature has no fastener information. Quantity note adds text to indicate quantity. Custom thread designation Thread pitch Thread class Thread depth Tap drill diameter Fastener type indicates the fastener type used to define hole parameters in part modeling.

Property Heading Type Leading/Trailing Zeros Justification Units Formatting Available only for numeric columns of the hole table. or right alignment. click Manage tab Table style. Controls the display of leading and trailing zeros. Heading sets the alignment for the column heading. enter a different name. right-click a Property in the Column Settings area. Displays the type of data in the column. Sets the name of the selected column. Access: Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor. center.Hole Table Sets the column format for properties in the hole table. center. Select a hole table or punch table style in Style and Standard Editor. right-click a Property in the Column Settings area.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Hole tables Concept Procedure Quick Reference Format Column . To change. On the Formatting tab of the Edit Hole Table dialog box. Unit Type selects the type of measurement units. and then select Format Column. On the Formatting tab of the style panel. Click a button to select left. Sets the alignment for the column heading and respective cells. . Note To change the default column format for properties in hole tables. and edit the Hole Right-click a hole table and select Edit Hole Table. Click a button to select left. Value sets the alignment for the data in the column. and select Format Column. Displays the name of the selected column. or right alignment.

Fractional Text Scale sets the text scale for numbers in stacked fractions. Available only if a fractional format is selected. . If inches or feet are selected. fractional format is available in the Format option. Decimal Marker selects the marker for the decimal format.Format selects a fractional or decimal format. Units selects the measurement units. Fractional formats are available only if Length is selected as Unit Type and inches or feet are selected as Units. Precision selects the precision of values displayed in the selected column. Click the arrow to specify either a period or comma as the decimal character.

Lists parts according to the active selection filter. Access: Right-click a balloon in the drawing and select Attach Balloon From List to open the Attach Balloon dialog box. Filter Table Right-click menu . Invert Selection inverts the current selection. Filters parts displayed in the table. Click the arrow to select a filter from the list. Custom/Virtual Parts Use the Attach Balloon dialog box to select parts to be ballooned and the balloons attached to an existing balloon. Specify points for the balloon leader line in the graphic window. Use the Custom/Virtual Parts dialog box to select custom/virtual parts to be ballooned. Right-click and select Custom/Virtual. Select All selects all parts in the list to be ballooned. Clear All clears the selection for all parts in the list. The Custom/Virtual Part dialog box is displayed. Right-click and select Continue.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Balloons Concept Procedure Quick Reference Attach Balloon. Click Annotate tab Table panel Balloon.

specifies the name of the worksheet. and then select from the list.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Parts lists Concept Procedure Quick Reference Export Parts List or Table Saves the parts list or table to an external database. . If the file type is Microsoft Excel. spreadsheet. Access: Save in File Name Click Export in the Edit Parts List or Edit Table dialog box Browse to select the location for the external file. If the file type is Microsoft Access. Note The name for a DBF file cannot be longer than eight characters. Specifies the name of the external file. Enter the file name or click the File button to select an existing file. Click the arrow. Not used for other file types. Specifies the type of external file to use. Save As Type Table Name . or text file. specifies the name of the table.

Click to ignore any input and dismiss the dialog box. Alignment Vertical Click to align multiple selections to the left edge of the first selected text box.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Text in drawings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Align text Access: Within a drawing with at least two text boxes selected: rightmouse click and select Align from the context menu. Help Apply Close . Click to display this help page. Click to align multiple selections to the right edge of the first selected text box. Horizontal Click to align multiple selections to the top edge of the first selected text box. Used to input the offset distance from the selected edge of the first text box. Click to apply the selected alignment to the selected text boxes. Offset Data entry field. Click tto align multiple selections to the bottom edge of the first selected text box.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Text in drawing sketches Concept Procedure Quick Reference Geometry-Text Use Geometry-Text to create and align text to sketch geometry. Access: Ribbon: Sketch tab Draw panel Geometry Text Geometry Text Orientation and Format Font attributes Zoom buttons .

Access: Ribbon: Annotate tab Symbols panel Welding Sets the layout and content of the welding symbol. or right-click the view. and select Get Model Annotations Get Welding Symbol. Available for ISO and DIN only. To add welding symbols that maintain association to the model. the dialog box displays the available data from the model. a welding symbol does not update if the model changes. Available options are determined by the weld symbol style and the associated drafting standard. Symbols and values change. if applicable. or identification line below the reference line. . depending on the specified weld type and the active drafting standard. If the model in the drawing view is a weldment that contains fillet welds. Identification Line Swap Arrow/ Other Symbols Stagger Click the arrow to select no identification line. set the weldment options on the Options tab of the Create View dialog box when you place a view. Choose the weld type and secondary fillet type. Note Once placed. specifies the content of a welding symbol placed on a selected weld edge. identification line above. Staggers the welding symbols for fillets. Click to switch the arrow and symbols above or below the reference line. Available only if fillet welding symbols are set on both sides of the reference line. and then specify the corresponding attributes.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Weld annotations in drawings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Drawing Welding Symbol In a drawing view. The dialog box opens when you place a welding symbol.

Specifies a prefix to precede the symbol.the reference line. Specifies the length of the weld. Secondary fillet type Angle Brazing Clearance Depth Diameter Gap Height Length Method Middle Number Root Root gap Size Small leg Spacing . Click the arrow and choose Flush or flat finish. Select check box to enclose note text in a box. This button is available only when the active drafting standard is based on ANSI. Specifies the height of the weld. Select or clear the check box to add or remove the brazing symbol. Specifies the diameter of the weld. Convex finish. Specifies the finish method for the weld. or Toes blended smooth (DIN only). Concave finish. Specifies the space between weldments. Specifies the number of welds. Tail note box ABC Prefix Leg Depth Pitch Contour Adds description to the selected reference line. Specifies whether the weld is brazed. Specifies the type of inspection to perform on the weld. Click the button to display and choose from the palette of available weld types. Specifies the contour finish for the weld. Click the arrow and choose the method from the list. Specifies the gap for the weld. Specifies the thickness of the weld. Specifies the root thickness of the weld. Specifies the depth of the weld. Specifies text for the leg. Sets the weld depth. Specifies the size of the weld. Specifies the distance between welds. Specifies the clearance for the braze. Specifies the space between welds. Specifies the angle between weldments. Specifies the type of weld for secondary fillets.

Click the button to turn the symbol off or on.Thickness Flag Specifies the thickness of the weld. The diameter of the all-round character is specified in the leader style. All-around symbol Symbol box . delete the current symbol. Click buttons to add a welding symbol to the current symbol. Click the button to turn the flag off or on. All edits affect the current symbol only. or activate the Previous or Next symbol. Specifies whether to add a flag indicating a field or site weld to the selected reference line. Specifies whether to use an all-around symbol on the selected reference line.

Click a button to select left. click the Format Column button. To edit a table column: Right-click a table and select Edit. Available only when editing a parts list in the drawing and Use Default Formatting is selected. click Table.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Revision tables and revision tags Concept Procedure Quick Reference Format Column . or right alignment. center. To change. Specifies the width of the column. Value Sets the alignment for the data in the column. Stacked Fractional Text Enables stacking of numeric fractions. In the Style and Standard Editor dialog box. right-click a column name cell to open the Format Column dialog box. In the Edit Table dialog box. Property Heading Column Width Leading/Trailing Zeros Justification . Controls the display of leading and trailing zeros. enter a different name.Tables Sets the formatting and alignment properties for a column in the table. or right alignment. Access: To define columns in a Table style: Click Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor. Click a button to select left. All fractional numerical strings (in 1/2 format) in the selected column are replaced with a stacked numeric fraction in the drawing. On the Default Column Settings tab. Heading Sets the alignment for the column heading. center. Sets the name of the selected column. Displays the name of the property displayed in the selected column. Sets the alignment for the column heading and respective cells.

If inches or feet are selected. Available only if a fractional format is selected. Decimal Marker selects the marker for the decimal format. Use Default Formatting Apply Units Formatting . fractional format is available in the Format option. Units selects the measurement units. Fractional formats are available only if Length is selected as Unit Type and inches or feet are selected as Units. Unit Type selects the type of measurement units. Click the arrow to specify either a period or comma as the decimal character. Precision selects the precision of values displayed in the selected column. Enables the formatting and units settings for the selected column. Uses the default settings specified in the standard.Stack Properties button Opens the Stack Properties dialog box and sets the format and text scale for stacked fractions. Changes made to these settings only apply to the selected column. Unit String displays the name of the units next to the value. Fractional Text Scale selects the text scale of numbers in stacked fractions. Available only when editing a parts list in the drawing and Use Default Formatting is selected. Format selects a fractional or decimal format.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations > Sheet metal annotations in drawings Concept Procedure Quick Reference Edit Hole Table Modifies formatting and options of a hole table. Overrides settings specified by the hole table style for the current document. Formatting Options . Access: Right-click a hole table and select Edit Hole Table.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD Topics in this section Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD Standard Annotate (ESKD) tab Sheet Format Title Block Drawing Annotations Parts List .

Inventor 2010 now supports GOST standards and the ESKD standards subset. ESKD is the Unified System of Design Documentation. .Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD Standard GOST is a set of technical standards published by the Federal Agency on Technical Regulating and Metrology of the Russian Federation. This system governs everything from font type and size to text placement on a page. a subset of the GOST standard.

Displays the Welding Symbol dialog box. Access: Icon Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Name Unidentified Surface Texture Definition Displays the Unidentified Surface Texture dialog box. Add soldering symbols to the drawing. Add one or more surface texture symbols for certain elements and for all elements that do not have a surface texture defined. Add gluing symbols to the drawing. Gain access to some options from drop-down in panel bar. Add surface texture symbol that applies to all elements. Displays the Stitching Symbol dialog box. Add stitching by staples symbols to drawing.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Annotate (ESKD) tab Concept Procedure Quick Reference Annotate (ESKD) tab Used to add GOST compliant annotations. Displays the Soldering Symbol dialog box. Surface Texture Symbol Welding Symbol Soldering Symbol Gluing Symbol Stitching Symbol Stitching by Staples . Add stitching symbols to drawing. Add welding symbols to the drawing. Displays the Gluing Symbol dialog box. Displays Surface Texture symbol. symbols. and more. Displays the Stitching by Staples dialog box.

Add datum identifier to the drawing or to another symbol. Datum Identifier Symbol Marking Symbol Stamping Symbol Surface Covering Symbol Leader Text Technical Requirements Table Balloon Auto Balloon . Add new technical requirements to the drawing sheet or edit existing technical requirements. Displays the Leader Text dialog box. Add text to a leader line. Add a marking symbol to the drawing or to another symbol. Displays the Table dialog box. Displays the Auto Balloon dialog box. The balloon can appear in the parts list when associated with a part. Add a balloon to the drawing or to a symbol. Use Auto Balloon to create multiple item balloons for selected components. Add a stamping symbol to the drawing or to another symbol.Feature Control Frame Display the Feature Control Frame dialog box. Places a surface covering indicator at a specific place on the drawing. Use with the Leader Text symbol to add details for the surface covering symbol. Select the number of columns and rows then add a table to the drawing sheet. Displays the Stamping Symbol dialog box. Displays the Marking Symbol dialog box. Displays the Datum Identifier dialog box. Add feature control symbols to the drawing. Displays the Technical Requirements dialog box. Select balloon characteristics. Displays the Balloon dialog box.

.balloon characteristics. Parts List Displays the Parts List dialog box with an automatically generated parts list that you can edit.

An additional title box that appears on the drawing border.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Sheet Format Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet Format Accept default format or change default sheet format. Long side of sheet is vertical. One of three GOST compliant title boxes. One of three GOST compliant title boxes. An additional title box that appears on the drawing border. You can select predefined sizes or create a custom size. Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Drawing Sheets panel Sheet Format Right-click the Sheet. Long side of sheet is horizontal. One of three GOST compliant title boxes. Identify zones on drawing sheet. An additional title box that appears on the drawing border. Some change options are available from the browser context menus. Vertical is the first field and horizontal is the second field. Type the vertical and horizontal zone enumeration. and select Sheet Format from the context menu. custom format. Drawing sheet height. Drawing sheet width. Name Size Multiplier Height Width Portrait Landscape Show Zones Start zone enumeration from Form 1 Form 2 Form 2a Extension 1 Extension 2 Extension 3 Drawing sheet name. . Sheet width is multiplied by the selected number. Drawing sheet size. Add custom size.

Note Click the column title once to sort. New materials can be added to the list. Changes to a material display in the drawing title block while the material is selected. click a second time to reverse the sort . Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Block Favorites Material name Material shape Material assortment Creates new material row at the end of the table. Closes the dialog. Closes the dialog box and use specified material in the dialog.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Title Block Concept Procedure Quick Reference Materials Select and manage materials. Drawing Sheets panel Title Material column Shape column Assortments column New Select Close order. Some default materials are covered in the dialog box.

Inserts a symbol in the active text field. Reverses the most recent action. or Underline buttons to apply the style to the Technical Requirements Insert Symbol Type Property Precision Add Text Parameter Undo Redo Style . Reverses the effects of the previous Undo command. Attach technical requirements.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Leader Text Procedure Quick Reference Leader Text Add one or more lines of leader text to the drawing with limited text formatting. This field is active when you select the Associative Text Type property. Specifies the precision for numerical properties displayed in the text. Physical Properties . Sets the style. The Associative Text property type.Model. Property associated with the property type. A reference to the selected item in technical requirements is inserted into the first line. Inserts content from the Associative Text Property field in the text fields. Display the Technical Requirements dialog box to associate technical notes to the leader text. Align all text in the center. Italic. Access: Align Left Center Align Right Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Text panel Leader Text Align all text on the left margin. Align all text on the right margin. Click the Bold.

Underline buttons to apply the style to the text. Sets the height of the text in sheet units (inches or millimeters). Enter the size or click the arrow and select a size from the list. Insert Landing Line below Insert Landing Line above Text Height Inserts landing line under the leader text. . Inserts landing line above the leader text.

309-73(chg3) GOST 2. GOST standards updated in 1973. Global surface texture defines the surface texture for all part surfaces without a specific surface texture definition. Material cannot be removed from the part. Type of surface texture is not specifically identified. This field is enabled only when you click the Removal of Material Required button.309-73 Treatment Unspecified Removal of Material Required Removal of Material Prohibited Force Tail Majority All-around GOST standards updated in 1973. Basic surface texture symbol. You can use a combination of typing text and selections from the context menu. Symbols panel Unidentified Production Method . Adds the all-around indicator to the symbol with the diameter specified on the leader. Adds a tail to the symbol. Material must be removed from the part to meet the requirements. Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Surface Texture GOST 2. This button is specific to Global Surface Texture.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Unidentified Surface Texture Procedure Quick Reference Unidentified Surface Texture Add global surface texture information to drawing. Fields change depending on the GOST standard you select. Identifies the appropriate production method for the texture.

Insert a new Surface Texture Value line.Surface Texture Value Identifies the surface roughness. You can use a combination of typing text and selections from the context menu. Remove a Surface Texture Value line. Texture Direction Add Row Remove Row . Identifies the surface texture type left by the cutting instrument.

Fields change depending on the GOST standard you select. Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Surface Surface Texture Value Identifies the type of texture you add to a specific location. Full dialog .Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Surface Texture Symbol Procedure Quick Reference Surface Texture Add surface texture information to a drawing. You can use a combination of typing text and selections from the context menu. Surface texture applies to a specific place on a part and not the entire part.

Click to select the preferred standard used for drawing annotations. In the Weld Annotation context menu. click Select Standard. .Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Welding Symbol Procedure Quick Reference Select Standard Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Welding Symbol.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Soldering Symbol Procedure Quick Reference Soldering Symbol Add soldering information to drawing. Add as much or as little information as required. You can use a combination of typing text and selections from the context menu. Leader lines identify the solder location. Symbols panel Soldering Full dialog . Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbol Weld Index Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding annotation. Expand the dialog box to add more information.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Gluing Symbol Procedure Quick Reference Gluing Symbol Add gluing information to drawing. Expand the dialog box to add more information. Add as much or as little information as required. You can use a combination of typing text and selections from the context menu. Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbol Weld Index Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding annotation. Symbols panel Gluing Full dialog . Leader lines identify the glued location.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbol Weld Index Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding annotation. Symbols panel Stitching Full dialog . Add as much or as little information as required. Leader lines identify the stitched location. You can use a combination of typing text and selections from the context menu.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Stitching Symbol Procedure Quick Reference Stitching Symbol Add stitching information to drawing. Expand the dialog box to add more information.

Symbols panel Stitching by Full dialog . Leader lines identify the staple stitched location.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Stitching by Staples Procedure Quick Reference Stitching by Staples Add stitching by staples information to drawing. You can use a combination of typing text and selections from the context menu. Expand the dialog box to add more information. Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Staples Symbol Weld Index Specifies the weld index that refers to the full welding annotation. Add as much or as little information as required.

Symbols panel Datum .Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Datum Identifier Procedure Quick Reference Datum Identifier Add datum identifier to drawing. Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Identifier Datum Identifier Type one or more datum identifier symbols in the field.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbol Contents and Technique Leader-based Text Tech Requirements Select contents and marking method. Symbols panel Marking . The reference appears in a circle accompanied by marking content and method annotation. The marking symbol is represented by a reference to technical requirements. Add reference to technical requirements. Edit text that appears on the leader line summarizing Contents and Methods.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Marking Symbol Procedure Quick Reference Marking Symbol Add marking symbol annotations to the drawing.

Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbol Content and Technique Leader-based Text Tech Requirements Select contents and marking method. The marking symbol is represented by a reference to technical requirements. The reference appears in a triangle accompanied by marking content and method annotation. Symbols panel Stamping . Add reference to technical requirements. Edit text that appears on the leader line summarizing Contents and Methods.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Stamping Symbol Procedure Quick Reference Stamping Symbol Add stamping symbol annotations to the drawing.

3. A plus (+) sign and a box appear beside the cursor. Click the appropriate surface or surfaces. click Annotate (ESKD) tab Symbols panel Surface Covering. To complete the action. complete the following steps: 1. A context menu appears. 7. Place the cursor on the surface where you want to add the surface covering. From the context menu. 2. A dotted line appears beside the selected surface and a line is added under the Sketched Symbols node in the browser. Right-click after making your selections. 4. On the ribbon. To add one or more surface covering symbols. The plus sign is removed from the cursor. 6. 5. From the context menu. Add Leader Text Edit Surface Covering Symbol Delete Surface Covering Symbol . The surface color changes when you hover over the surface. click Done (Esc). click Continue.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Surface Covering Procedure The surface covering symbol draws a dashed-dotted offset curve for surfaces that require a covering. This command is used with the ESKD Leader Text command to provide detailed information for the surface covering. right-click to display a context menu.

Width of column containing the requirements. Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Requirements Settings Text Settings Text Height: H Line Spacing Item Spacing Left Indent Column Width Use period after numbers Text Location Horizontal Offset Vertical Offset Line Limit Alternate Text Location Horizontal Offset Vertical Offset Line Limit (2nd column) Horizontal offset from top left corner of the title block.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Drawing Annotations > Technical Requirements Concept Procedure Quick Reference Technical Requirements Settings Change text settings in the Technical Requirements dialog box. Check to add a period after the item number. which fill completely the first and second columns. in terms of H. Vertical offset from drawing sheet bottom border. Distance between items. Horizontal offset from top left corner of the title block. Defines the number of lines for second column. Text height of a requirement line. Vertical offset from top left corner of the title block. Set the number of lines that appear in the requirement. Distance between lines in the Technical Requirements. Format panel Technical . the remaining items are allocated in the third column. Indent distance for first line in item. If technical requirements contain too many items.

there is no elimination of widow/orphan lines. .allocated in the third column. Limit for Widow/Orphan lines Sets the limit for widow/orphan lines. If this parameter is set to 0.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List Concept Procedure Quick Reference Parts List: Print Identify the printer and printer setting. Information about the printer. Printer name and type. This option is enabled if you elect to print two or more copies. Place the parts list on the drawing so that it fits on one page. number of copies to print. Click to print the currently displayed page only. Ending page number in a range of pages to print. Place the parts list pages in numerical order. Click to print all pages. Best Fit Custom Custom field . and pages to print. Access: Ribbon: Annotate (ESKD) tab Name Status Type Where Comment Current Page All Pages in Range From To Number of Copies Collate Table panel Parts List Print Select the printer to use to print the parts list. Indicates the printer status. Click to print the range of pages identified in the From and To fields. Specify the number of copies you want to print. Beginning page number in a range of pages to print. Click to identify the number of columns to place on a page. Specify the number of columns to place on the page. Printer location.

Preview button View how the parts list looks on a printed page. .

Press enter to accept the change in the cell. Undo Action Redo Action Delete Entry Add Static Value Move item to new category Save item overrides to BOM Add category Add custom category Remove category Renumber category Sort category Sort parts list Renumber all items Renumber contiguous rows . To edit the cell content.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List > Edit Parts List Concept Procedure Editing the parts list includes changing the content by adding or removing information. A cursor appears in the cell. complete the following steps: From the parts list. click twice in the cell you want to change or click the text in the cell. Type your changes in the cell. Note Your changes are not permanent until you click OK and close the dialog box or until you place the parts list on the drawing. formatting the parts list. and changing the update behavior.

Insert empty row Change parts list table settings .

A context menu appears. All of the following procedures are accessed from a context menu. The Parts List dialog box closes and the parts list on the drawing is updated. complete the following steps: 1.. click Edit Parts List. 3. From the context menu. Procedures for all items on the context menu are not covered in this topic. 4. Click OK to save the changes. 2. editing the table style. The procedures covered include editing the parts list from the drawing. To edit the parts list from the drawing.. and delete the parts list. From the drawing. rotate the parts list. view the bill of materials. Make changes in the parts list dialog box. Edit Table Style View the BOM Delete the parts list from the drawing . right-click the parts list. be sure to place the parts list on the drawing.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List > Edit Parts List on Drawing Concept Procedure Before making the changes described. The Parts List dialog box appears..

or add your own spreadsheet. You can use the default spreadsheet. The Save As dialog box appears. When the export is complete. navigate to the folder where you want to save the file. click the Export button. type a file name. To export a spreadsheet. 4. Note To view the exported file. either open the file from Excel or from Windows Explorer. Click OK to begin the export and save the file. From the Parts List dialog box toolbar. In the Save As dialog box. complete the following steps: 1. Preview parts list in excel Select Excel template Add custom template .Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Drawing annotations for GOST / ESKD > Parts List > Export Parts List Concept Procedure Export information from the parts list to an Excel spreadsheet. the Save As dialog box closes. 2. 3. choose another spreadsheet provided with the application. In the File name field.

Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Exploded views and presentations Topics in this section Exploded views and presentations .

Access: Ribbon: Presentation tab Create panel Tweak Components Create Tweak Transformations Clear . direction. and other settings for a selected component or group of components when adding tweaks to an exploded presentation view.Autodesk Inventor > Drawings > Exploded views and presentations > Exploded views and presentations Concept Procedure Quick Reference Tweak Component Specifies distance.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization Topics in this section Render and animate with Inventor Studio Translate data Share data Design Assistant Autodesk Inventor Tools .

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio Topics in this section Render and animate overview Styles for rendering Rendering Images Animating in Studio .

without parameters. Provides a set of folders unique to Studio. they are followed by a number in sequence. Access: Enter the Studio environment. browser. and provides alternate access to functions from the context menu. Whenever animation objects are added to lists. Productions Animations Lighting (style) Cameras Animation Favorites Local Lights Representations Origin Model Nodes Context menu commands . The context menus for browser content in the studio environment is different from the menus in the assembly environment.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio > Render and animate overview Concept Quick Reference Studio scene browser Graphically illustrates assembly hierarchy. Shows and hides selected components. You can easily change names by slow double-clicking the name in the browser and then entering the name you want to use. and so on. This is to allow multiple object creation without name duplication.

Light browser node context menu commands . Light context menu commands Lighting Styles. In the Studio browser. General tab Illumination tab Shadows tab Directional tab Point tab Spot tab Lighting Styles dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio > Styles for rendering Concept Procedure Quick Reference Lights in Lighting Styles Create and edit lights in lighting styles. Access: On the ribbon. click Render tab Scene panel Lighting Styles . click a light. or In the Lighting Styles dialog box. styles list. double-click the icon in front of a light style.

Only one style can be applied at one time.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio > Rendering Images Concept Procedure Quick Reference Render Image Specifies general settings for rendering images. Access: Ribbon: Render tab Render panel Render Image When you select the Realistic or Illustration style. Changes to the applied style must be done as a post process in an image editor. General tab Output tab (Render Image only) Style tab .Illustration Rendering Tutorial . it is applied to the entire image.Realistic Style tab .

it is applied to the entire image or animation. Access: Ribbon: Render tab Render panel Render Animation When you select the Realistic or Illustration style. General tab Output tab Style tab . Only one style can be applied at one time.Illustration Rendering Tutorial . Changes to the applied style must be done as a post process in an image editor.Realistic Style tab .Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Render and animate with Inventor Studio > Animating in Studio Concept Procedure Quick Reference Render Animation Specifies general settings for rendering animations.

and more . assemblies.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data Topics in this section Parts and assemblies from other CAD systems DWG Translation Create a template to import DWG data Export drawing data to AutoCAD Export parts.

1) or assembly (*.prt.asm.*). *. *.asm.1) or assembly (*.1) file.1) file from Windows Explorer and drop into the graphics window. *. *.1) or assembly (*. and click a part (*. Lists the translators that can be chosen to import the selected file. . Drag a part (*. *. The translators listed depend on the type of file selected.prt.prt.1) or assembly (*. set Files of type to All Files (*. click Place. *.prt.asm.asm.prt.1) file from Windows Explorer and drop onto the Autodesk Inventor title bar.1) file.prt.asm. Place into an open Autodesk Inventor assembly: In an assembly file. Access: Do one of the following: Translate to a new Autodesk Inventor file: Click Open. *. *. Available Translators for (file type). and click a part (*.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data > Parts and assemblies from other CAD systems Concept Procedure Quick Reference Choose a translator Choose from the list of potential translators to import the selected file. set Files of type to All Files (*.asm.asm.prt.prt. Drag a part (*.*).asm.

If you are importing a DWG file. and drawings with associative relationships with Autodesk Inventor drawing views and annotations.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data > DWG Translation Concept Procedure Quick Reference DWG/DXF File Import Wizard The DWG/DXF File Wizard imports parts. click Options. Click Open to start the DWG File wizard. Note on opening DWG files Access: Click Open and select the appropriate file. and then click OK. assemblies. select Import options. DWG File Import Options Model/Layout Options Import Destination Options .

the new template is available. set up drawing resources. if you have a drawing file that contains the setup you want to use for other drawings. Set the measurement units and other document settings. save a copy of it in the Autodesk\Inventor [revision]\Templates folder. lighting. and material styles. Set file properties that are common to the files you import. features. In drawing templates. dimension styles. Tips for creating templates for imported DWG files Remove any unwanted content from the templates. and drafting standards. specify common file properties. you use a template to set the measurement units of the file. or standard drawing views. text styles. The next time you create a drawing file. When you import AutoCAD or Mechanical Desktop files in Autodesk Inventor.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data > Create a template to import DWG data When you create a Autodesk Inventor file. . and drawing files that result. For example. you can choose templates to use in the Import Destination Options dialog box for creating the part. texture. A drawing becomes a template when you save it in the Templates folder. You can develop as many templates as you need and make them available for creating new files. In part and assembly templates. assembly. set up color. and include elements or even content that is common between files. It can include sketch geometry.

arcs circles. Click the following choices to display information about the settings in each dialog box.dwg) Access: In the Save Copy As dialog box. Note on saving drawing files as Autodesk Inventor Drawings (.dxf files.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data > Export drawing data to AutoCAD Concept Procedure Quick Reference Export DWG File Options Specifies options for exporting Autodesk Inventor drawings or sheet metal flat patterns to AutoCAD DWG (. and then click Options. change the file type to AutoCAD Drawings (.dwg). lines.dwg or . click Next to open the subsequent dialog box. DWG File Export Options AutoCAD Mechanical Export Options Export Destination Mapping Options . You can export an Autodesk Inventor drawing file in AutoCAD format to translate the content into AutoCAD objects and to access to the AutoCAD geometric entities in the view blocks (for example. and so on). You can save the settings as a configuration for saving other . When you finish the settings in each dialog box.dwg) files.

and then click Options. Access: In the File Save As dialog box.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Translate data > Export parts. but the portion of the scene included in the view may be different. Resolution Set X and Y both to 0 to generate an image the same size as the onscreen image in the current active view. . . but you can change X and Y values. Set either X or Y to 0 (not both) to have the non-zero dimension value used as given and the zero dimension set to whatever value preserves the shape of the on-screen image Set both X and Y to non-zero values to center the field of view the same as the on-screen image. set the file type to BMP. Enter an integer. and more Concept Procedure Quick Reference Bitmap Export Options You can save a snapshot of the graphics window as a bitmap file. The default creates a bitmap the size of the active graphics view. assemblies.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data Topics in this section Publish to DWF DWF markup Insert objects AEC exchange Engineers Notebook Task Scheduler application Use i-drop to access parts within Web pages Communication Center CAD Manager Control Utility Subscription Center .

DWF output . positional representations. Document type Part (IPT) Condition General DWF output . positional representations. the DWF file includes it The DWF file includes all members and member table The DWF file represents the current state of the model The DWF file includes the current state of the model with stress\constraint indicators and stress scale.. positional representations.complete The DWF file represents the current state of the model If a folded model and flat pattern exists.complete The DWF file includes the assembly with design views. and enabled BOM views.Complete When you Publish a file using the Complete option. The DWF file includes the assembly with design views. Sheet Metal iPart factory iPart member Stress Analysis Document type Assembly (IAM) Condition General iAssembly factory iAssembly member . the published content varies based on the file type as described in the following table.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > Publish to DWF Concept Procedure Quick Reference DWF Output . and enabled BOM views. and enabled BOM views. The DWF file includes all members and member table with design views.

tables. DWG) Condition General .enabled BOM views. DWF output . and enabled BOM views. weld beads. The DWF file includes the assembly with design views. Weldment The DWF file includes the assembly with design views. DWF output . animations. all design views. Only the active LOD only publishes to DWF. LOD Master LOD Non-Master Document type Presentation (IPN) Condition General Document type Drawing (IDW.complete The DWF file includes all sheets. assembly instructions. However. and referenced assembly with complete contents. and enabled BOM views publish.complete The DWF file includes all presentation views. and weld symbols. positional representations. positional representations. positional representations. enabled BOM views. and referenced models with complete contents for the models.

In the Markups browser. The information is informational only. right-click the sheet. You cannot edit the edit field. Following properties appear with their values: Sheet Status Sheet Name Parent File File Location File Size Modified Last Save by . Access: Click Open. and select Properties. Select a DWF file containing markups.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > DWF markup Concept Procedure Quick Reference Sheet Properties Displays the sheet properties and a preview of the sheet.

select Link. After the file is added to the Autodesk Inventor file. any changes you make also change the source file. 2. Close the external file to update the linked Inventor file. All linked or embedded files are found under the 3rd Party folder. Save the edits to show the updates in Autodesk Inventor. When you insert an object. The application for the object type opens so that you can create the object. a 3rd Party folder is added as the first folder in the browser. To link to an existing file. To embed the content of an existing file.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > Insert objects Procedure Insert objects into models or drawings You can link or embed external files (such as spreadsheets or word processing documents) in an Autodesk Inventor model or drawing. The new object is embedded in the model or drawing and does not exist as a separate file. 1. you can make changes that do not affect the source file. In the Insert Object dialog box. choose the options to achieve the desired result: To create a file. . Note You can link to an embedded file from another Inventor model or drawing. select Create from File then click Browse to find the file. only the Inventor file where the external file was embedded is updated. click Manage tab Insert panel Insert Object. select the object type and select Create New. After the file is embedded. On the ribbon. select Create from File. and then click Browse to find the file. When you edit the external file from the linked file and save the edits.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > AEC exchange Concept Procedure Quick Reference Check Design Contains information related to the model and building components. An exclamation next to a node indicates the item needs attention. Click Clipboard to copy the data to the operation system clipboard and make it available to paste in a word processing or spreadsheet application. A check mark next to a node indicates the item is OK. Indicates there are no issues with the item. Access: Ribbon: AEC Exchange tab Manage panel Check Design In the Export Building Components dialog box. Models can be exported with this icon showing except for the Component Type node. Indicates that there is a potential problem with the item and it requires attention. click Check Design. The Component Type is a required field. The Model Complexity it determined by the number of faces and the number of components in the model as follows: Low Medium High Number of occurrences: < 25 Number of faces: < 500 Number of occurrences: > 24 and < 100 Number of faces: > 499 and < 2000 Number of occurrences: > 99 Number of faces: > 1999 .

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > Engineers Notebook Concept Procedure Quick Reference Engineer’s Notebook browser Lists all the notes in a part or assembly. Note list Browser menu . The browser provides options for sorting and organizing notes.

. A Sequential Task manager is provided to set up multiple predefined and custom tasks. Task Scheduler contains predefined task managers for executing common tasks. and a custom task manager for defining your own tasks.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > Task Scheduler application Task Scheduler is a separate application that performs automated tasks and acts as a batch processor in Autodesk Inventor and other applications. In addition to Custom and Sequential tasks. and the tasks you scheduled run at the specified time. The Migrate Files task is used to migrate files directly from the Vault. Close the Task Scheduler window. Autodesk Autodesk Inventor Use the Task Scheduler to organize and define one or more time-consuming tasks from different types of programs. the predefined tasks include: Migrate Files Update Design Publish DWF Files Print Files Import and Export Files Check In to Vault Check Out from Vault Get Latest Version from Vault Convert IDW to DWG Refresh Standard Components in Assemblies More detailed Help is available in the Task Scheduler. and execute the tasks in a specified order at a time that you schedule. To open Task Scheduler. click Start Programs (version) Tools Task Scheduler.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > Use i-drop to access parts within Web pages Concept Procedure Create custom Team Web files Using i-drop parts requires ActiveX. Replace both instances with the name of your part 8. Replace the caption.xml 5. Note my_part1. 9. Replace my_template1. Open to edit C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Web\WebTemplate.ipt is referenced twice. Save the part you want to make available as an iPart to C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Web\. 3.htm\WebTemplate. 7. My Template of i-drop Parts with a caption you want displayed on this page.htm 10. 2. Close Autodesk Inventor. Replace my_part1. If you do not have ActiveX installed on your computer you can download it here: http://www. 4.xml with the name you have given your new XML file. 11. and then close the file.ipt with the name of the part you want to make available as an iPart.bmp with the name of your BMP file.autodesk. Using a graphics program. Save C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Web\WebTemplate. Replace my_image1.htm. create a BMP of the iPart you want to display on your Web page. 6.cab 1. . Open to edit C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Web\my_template. Save the file to C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Inventor [version]\Web\ with a new name.htm as SampleWeb.com/prods/idrop/download/idrop.

On the ribbon. Web panel . click Tools tab Team Web.htm. 12. modify the Team Web address specified in: Tools tab Options panel Application Options File. Start Autodesk Inventor. Your new TeamWeb page displays.Note If you give WebTemplate.htm a name different from SampleWeb.

Specify your country and preferred update frequency specifies the country for which you want the Live Update information to localize. the only option available is to select your country and update preference. Settings Channels . click the Live Update icon. Connect to the Internet and download available information downloads the latest updates and announcements.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > Communication Center Concept Procedure Quick Reference Communication Center Until you configure the Communication Center. Specify which information channels you want to view selects the information channels you want Communication Center to access. Access: At the right end of the Status bar.

Use the CAD Manager Control utility so users can access the Communication Center. Review any associated README files. select Enable Using Local Patch List. 4. 3.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > CAD Manager Control Utility Concept Procedure Install patches using local patch lists You can use a local patch list to specify the patches you want to receive from Live Update. Enter the path to your local patch list. Store the patch file in a location that users can access. In Live Update Configuration. Download a patch file and the associated patch list text file from the Autodesk Web site. 6. To create a local patch list: 1. Save changes to your computer . 5. 2.

View Support Requests lists your support requests. You can update or add attachments. The CAD Manager utility is on the Autodesk Inventor installation CD. install the CAD Manager utility. Resolved Error Reports lists resolved error reports. Edit Subscription Center Profile describes information about your system and its configuration. configuration. You can click a report to see advice about updates or configuration. go to the Subscription Center tab on the CAD Manager Control Utility and select the Subscription Center check box.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Share data > Subscription Center Subscription customers can access the Subscription Center. Selecting the Subscription Center check box gives you access to subscription resources listed on the Help menu in Autodesk Inventor: e_Learning Catalog accesses self-paced lessons to give you hands-on experience. Go to Start Programs Autodesk Tools CAD Manager Control Utility Autodesk Inventor CAD Manager Control Utility. Create Support Request sets up Web-based technical support for installation. To access these resources. . After you install the CAD Manager. which provides resources such as e-Learning and Web support. and troubleshooting.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant Topics in this section Use Design Assistant Package files Manage links between files iProperties Projects and Libraries .

and then click Properties. and click Properties. previews files with a thumbnail sketch. and manages file properties. locates referenced files in folders. Properties Preview Manager . From Microsoft Windows Explorer.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Use Design Assistant Concept Procedure Quick Reference Design Assistant Design Assistant maintains links between Autodesk Inventor files. Access: Click Manage Design Assistant. the file in the active session is replaced with the new file. right-click. Unsaved changes in the current file are lost. select one or more Autodesk Inventor files or a folder containing Autodesk Inventor files. and then select Design Assistant from the menu. Note If you drag an Autodesk Inventor file from Microsoft Windows Explorer into an active Design Assistant session.

Pack and Go Locates a referenced file that was not found during a Pack and Go packing process. . Access: Automatically displayed if file is not found during packing process. select an Autodesk Inventor file (. right-click. Skips all missing referenced files and continues packing process. Cancels the packing process and displays the Pack and Go dialog box without referenced files. Look in Open Cancel Set Project File Skip Shows path of the active directory. Skipped files are not included in packaged assembly.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Package files Concept Procedure Quick Reference Find missing referenced files . Skips the missing referenced file and continues packing process. Start Pack and Go using one of the following methods: From Design Assistant.ipt. The packing process continues. Automatically restarts packing process.iam. . .ipn) in the browser. Skip All .dwg (Autodesk Inventor Drawing). Skipped file is not included in packaged assembly.idw. Adds the selected file. and then select Pack and Go. Sets the project file used for file path resolution during packing process. .

Create a copy of a single file with a different name. and select Design Assistant from the menu. word processing. Note Before working with Autodesk Inventor files created in a previous release. If you drag an Autodesk Inventor file from Microsoft Windows Explorer into an active Design Assistant session. You can: View relationships between files. open them in the current release to migrate the data format. Access: From Microsoft Windows Explorer. Design Assistant Manager updates any references in associated assembly.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Manage links between files Concept Procedure Quick Reference Design Assistant Manager The Design Assistant Manager provides options for managing associations between Autodesk Inventor files. part. the file in the active session is replaced with the new file. select an Autodesk Inventor file. The Design Assistant Manager browser has two sections: . spreadsheet. right-click. Copy an assembly with a different name to create a new assembly. Use Design Manager only for files in a single-user or a shared project. You cannot use Design Manager for files in a semi-isolated project You cannot use Design Manager to work with links to external files such as Mechanical Desktop parts. or text files. When you make changes. or drawing files and displays the new relationships. Rename files. Click the Manage icon. the Design Assistant Manager is not available. Unsaved changes in the current file are lost. Note If you open Design Assistant from within Autodesk Inventor or from a folder in Microsoft Windows Explorer.

Top browser Lower browser .

rightclick.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > iProperties Concept Procedure Quick Reference Properties .iProperties tab Opens the Autodesk Inventor properties (iProperties) dialog box so you can set the file properties specific to Autodesk Inventor files. and then select Properties from the menu. Click the iProperties button to open the dialog box. Click the iProperties tab. Access: From Windows Explorer. select an Autodesk Inventor file. .

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries Concept Procedure Use best practices in projects Create projects Edit projects Change the active project Set search paths for projects Find where files are used Find specific objects in Autodesk Inventor files Set paths for iPart factories in projects .

. Access: The Projects Setup dialog box is displayed if the default project location is not defined. Project Folder: Specifies the location of the Project Files to use for the active Design Assistant work session.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries > Learn about Projects Concept Procedure Quick Reference Project Setup Sets the project file for the active Design Assistant work session. Design Assistant uses the project file to determine the workspace and search paths available for the session.

Autodesk Inventor can resolve the reference because it knows which library to search in. or standard parts. files in different libraries might have the same name. It is a good practice to use Microsoft Windows Explorer to set your library folders and files as read-only. such as a released data set. When resolving library references. select the common project before you click the New button. as well as the relative path from the library folder to the referencing file. An administrator creates a common project with one or more library paths. a set of commonly used components. By default. Libraries are located in a folder with a unique name separate from other data files. using the common project as a template. you right-click the Libraries location. and has the same library definitions as the template project. 2. You can use some or all files in a library. iPart factory parts. the new project created by the wizard uses the selected project as a template. only the named library is searched. To share libraries across design workgroups You can eliminate the need for each member of a design workgroup to set the names and paths manually in their individual projects for the libraries to share. A project can include several kinds of libraries: Standard content iPart Factory Proxy libraries . If you cannot control where referenced parts originate or how they are named.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries > Project libraries A library is a collection of related data files that you reference but usually don't modify. even for parts in different folders or different libraries. Each team member creates a personal project. By assigning the folder as a library. 1. In a project file. References to library files include the library name. and then use menu options to browse to a folder. When you create a project using the project editor. you indicate that the files are no longer editable using Autodesk Inventor. It is a good practice to avoid using duplicate file names whenever possible. A single library can be used across any number of projects.

Another design set .

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries > Collaborative design Concept Procedure Use Autodesk Inventor in workgroups .

A project specifies the locations where Autodesk Inventor searches for files.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries > Collaborative design > Projects for collaborative design Concept Procedure Use Autodesk Inventor in workgroups If you are working in a design team. the CAD Administrator typically sets up the working environment and develops the projects for team members. specify the project to use and set options. Before working on a collaborative project. Set Autodesk Inventor project type To check out files stored in a workgroup location To check in files to a workgroup location To copy files to your workspace To update referenced files .

The Design Assistant tracks and manages file properties. Changes are not visible to others on the design team until the edited files are checked in. The Engineer's Notebook captures design information and other notes. defines provides quick moving and copying cross file references. navigation to key project locations. references. Database queries access file properties. A file status browser in the shared and semi-isolated projects shows the status of all open files in a project. Once package files are published to Autodesk Streamline. . and simplifies folders associated with a project without breaking is working on. See the Autodesk Streamline Web site for additional product information and purchase options.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries > Collaborative design > Tools for working collaboratively Autodesk Inventor provides tools for concurrent design so that members of a group can share design data and work in the context of the same assembly without making conflicting edits. and past configurations. and mark up files in a secure Webbased environment. It includes team members who may not own Autodesk Inventor. manipulate. Autodesk Vault. Tools for extended design teams save all types of Autodesk Inventor design data into package formats. when installed. Additional tools are provided for extended design teams. The tools include: A project editor that manages projects a designer the locations of all files associated with a project. Changes must be checked in to the vault before they are visible to other designers. The semi-isolated project saves changes to files in a personal workspace. Package formats optimize both 2D and 3D digital CAD data for distributing outside the design department and viewing in Autodesk Streamline. and other important information about Autodesk Inventor files. isolates source files from files checked out to designers. and checks files in and out to avoid conflicting edits. links between files. all members of extended design teams can view.

a new version of the file is created in your workspace. or save the file in shared projects. Other designers who are referencing the file continue to see the earlier version of the file and do not see the new version until you check the file back in to the workgroup location in semi-isolated projects. and the previous version is moved to the OldVersions\ folder. What happens when you save a file? How do projects control file versions? Why would you use old versions of files? How do file versions integrate with a PDM? . and they refresh their view of the assembly.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries > File versions Each time you save changes.

and then select Design Assistant. Note The search on the string is case sensitive. When the search is complete. Select Tools Find String from the menu. . the file names are highlighted in the Design Assistant Manager browser.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries > Set search paths Concept Procedure Quick Reference Find String Specifies a string (such as a referenced file name) and searches for it in all files listed in the Design Assistant Manager browser. Click the Manage icon to activate the Design Assistant Manager. right-click. Access: Use Microsoft Windows Explorer to select an assembly file. Search String Enter the string into the box. and then click OK to initiate the search.

use Microsoft Windows Explorer to create it before you add the proxy path or use Add Path again and specify the new folder path. and then click Add Path. In the lower pane. Verify that all Autodesk Inventor files are closed. 3. double-click a project to activate it. If the folder was created previously.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries > Paths for iPart factory parts Concept Procedure Set paths for iPart factories in projects In a project file. . Name the new library the same as the iPart factory library preceded with an underscore character. right-click the Libraries category. 1. In the Project Editor. If the proxy folder does not exist. 4. you can add the iParts to an assembly. Browse to the folder or enter the name of the library folder to add a new library path for the iPart factory file. Browse to the folder location and select it. right-click the newly created library path. A proxy folder is created automatically with the same name as the iPart factory library. and then click Add Proxy Path on the menu. define a library for both the folder containing the iPart factory part files and a corresponding proxy folder. 2. After the libraries are added to the project. enter a location for the iPart factory proxy file. For custom iPart factories only. but with a leading underscore (_) character.

. or customize a template that you use for Mechanical Desktop parts. a series of dialog boxes are displayed so that you can add the path. and then select a Mechanical Desktop file in the Open dialog box. Note You can use the same standard template that you use to create parts. Specifies the Autodesk Inventor part template to use. click Assemble tab Component panel Place. display color. and any other attributes that are set in the template.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Design Assistant > Projects and Libraries > File locations for Mechanical Desktop parts Concept Procedure Quick Reference Link Mechanical Desktop File Options Sets the units of measurement and template for the Mechanical Desktop file when you are placing it in as a component in an Autodesk Inventor assembly. Access: In an assembly file. The template controls the display of the part in the assembly. The Link Mechanical Desktop File Options dialog box opens so that you can specify the measurement units for the file. including the units of measurement. Note If the path to the selected file is not specified in the active project. Click the arrow and select the units type from the list. Units of Mechanical Desktop part Template File Specifies the units of measurement that are assumed in the Mechanical Desktop part.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools Topics in this section Add-In Manager Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard Autodesk Multi-Sheet Plot Style Library Manager Style Management Wizard .

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools > Add-In Manager Procedure Quick Reference Add-In Manager Lists the Autodesk Inventor add-ins that are installed on the system. . You can load or unload any displayed add-in. Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Add-Ins Start menu: Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor [version] Tools Add-In Manager. Available Add-Ins and Load Behavior Description Load Behavior Note If you change the status of an add-in. Sort the list by name or load behavior by clicking the column header. the change is not effective until you click OK. Press CTRL + click to select multiple items on the list.

borders. and lists drawing resources. Select Target Drawings page Selects the target drawing or multiple drawings. Close Autodesk Inventor before you can use the wizard. Select Source Drawing and Resources page Selects the source drawing. Navigate to the appropriate folder. Skipped Files dialog box opens if a target file: Is the same as the source drawing. Click the File or Path column name to sort files. Welcome page Describes the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard processes. Source Resource shows the drawing resources hierarchy. Is already listed. Add drawings opens the Select Target Drawings so you can browse to the desired folder to select one or more target drawings. . shows a thumbnail view of the source drawing. Is read-only. Preview. Optionally replace existing resources in the target drawing. and sketched symbols to multiple drawings. shows a preview image.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools > Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard Procedure Quick Reference Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard The Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard is a command that copies drawing resources from a source drawing to a target drawing. A target drawing can be listed only once. Source Drawing selects files to process in a detailed view. Access: Click Start menu [version] Tools Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard. if available. Use the Drawing Resource Transfer Wizard to: Transfer selected title blocks.

title blocks. The copied resource is named Copy of ResourceName. Pause temporarily halts transferring resources. Start begins processing of selected files. and sketched symbols. . No gives a unique name to target drawing resources that have the same name as those in the source file. Results of the processing are shown in a log file. Cancel halts processing. Select Option page Specifies how to handle drawing resources in the target file that have the same name as drawing resources in the source file. Next progresses to the next page when one or more target drawing is specified. The target drawing version retains its original name. Yes replaces drawing resources in the target file with the same name as resources in the source file.Has not been migrated to the current version of Autodesk Inventor. Begin the Batch Processing page Shows progress of transferred selected borders.

Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools > Autodesk Multi-Sheet Plot Procedure Quick Reference Multi-sheet plot Plots a collection of drawing sheets of one or more sizes. click Programs Autodesk Inventor [version] Autodesk Multi-sheet plot. You can schedule plotting so that several jobs print in a batch at a specified time. Autodesk Page Setup Select Drawing Files Select Project Preview Print . Access: From the Start menu.

and then modify as appropriate or Create Empty Style Library. Unavailable when the creation method creates an empty style library. In the Style Library Manager. New Style Library Location browses to the folder where you want to store the new library. Click the arrow to choose Copy Existing Style Library. the library location. Source Style Library to Copy browses to the library you want to copy when the creation method is Copy. In the Create New Style Library dialog box: Creation Method selects how you want to create the library. Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor Tools Style Library Manager. click the Create New Style Library button. and the source library.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools > Style Library Manager Procedure Quick Reference Create New Style Library Creates a style library by specifying the creation method. and then select styles from one or more libraries. .

Add Specific Files button Browses to the folder that contains the files to process.Autodesk Inventor > Collaboration and Visualization > Autodesk Inventor Tools > Style Management Wizard Procedure Quick Reference Style Management Wizard The Style Management Wizard is a tool for administrators to assist in batch-style management for Autodesk Inventor files. and path. Add All Files in Active Project button Lists all files by file name. Get all files referenced by a specific file by right-clicking the file in the process list. Autodesk Inventor All files must migrate to the latest version of Autodesk Inventor. Clear the check box to exclude a file from processing. Access: Click Start menu Programs Autodesk Tools Style Management Wizard. Drop them in the list to add them. Alternate methods of adding files to the list: Drag and drop files from Microsoft Windows Explorer. The active project is indicated by a check mark. type. Files that are not migrated are skipped during batch processing. Selects files to process in a detailed view. Its settings for Style Library and path are summarized below the window. Lists all defined projects by Name and Project Location. Use the Style Management Wizard when transitioning to using a style library with your design project. Selected files are listed by file name. and Files to Process . Double-click to select a project and make it active. you can: Harvest styles from Autodesk Inventor files and place them in a target style library. and path. The Style Management Wizard uses the active project to resolve all file paths during processing. including assemblies that are migrated but contain components that are not migrated. Welcome page Projects to Manage page Describes the Harvest Styles and Purge Styles processes. Using the Style Management Wizard. file type. Purge styles from Autodesk Inventor files. Purging removes unused style information and can be beneficial in large assemblies by reducing required memory.

Use the Browse button to browse to a specific library. Press Pause to halt the processing temporarily or Cancel to stop. Harvest Styles into Target Style Library specifies the target style library. Browse to the folder where the library will be stored. Specify to copy an existing style library or create an empty library. Adds to the process list all drawings and presentations in the project search paths that use the specific file. and if copying. Select Drawings and Presentations. Select an Existing Style Library Lists the Default Style Library and any project that uses a style library. Select Management Options page Chooses a harvest or purge operation. Use Source Project Style Library Automatically selects the style library specified in the project. Get all drawings or presentations that use a specific file by right-clicking a file in the process list. and then selecting Get Referenced Files. Styles not saved to a styles library are permanently lost. Create a New Style Library Opens the New Style Library dialog box. Adds all files that the selected file is dependent on to the list. Purge All Unused Styles from Files automatically deletes unused styles from selected documents. .right-clicking the file in the process list. Clear the check box of files you want to exclude from processing. the source style library you are copying. Begin Batch Processing Starts batch processing. using previously selected options. and then Get All.

Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization Topics in this section Find and correct design errors AutoLimits Parameters in models Edit models Derived parts and assemblies .

drag a corner of the box. Tip When command message dialog box is open. it appears when a specified fillet radius is larger than the edge to which it is applied or when an extrusion is specified to act as a cut does not intersect with another feature. Message list Copy button Options . Press F4 to rotate. Press F3 to zoom. Press F2 to pan. To resize the dialog box. you can use the shortcut keys to change the view in the graphics window. For example. The title of the dialog box identifies the failed operation.Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization > Find and correct design errors Concept Procedure Quick Reference Command message dialog box Provides information about problems that occur as you design in Autodesk Inventor. Access: The command message dialog box is displayed when an operation cannot be successfully completed.

Yellow Red Boundaries In the AutoLimit Settings browser. the default range is 90-110%. Some options may not be available for all AutoLimit types. Monitored values that fall within that range are considered to be out of the ideal range. the default upper range is 110-130%. In individual AutoLimits. In individual AutoLimits. The default lower range is 70-90%. the default range is less than 60 or greater than 140 or 5070 or 130-150 depending on how you set it. Serious Warning (data exceeds target range). Green OK (data within normal limits). Settings apply to all AutoLimits created in the future. Default setting is Off to avoid clutter in the graphics window. and Serious Warning levels. Select a type to set boundary conditions. The defaults for AutoLimit indicator visibility are displayed when the dialog box is opened. Access: Default Visibility Ribbon: Inspect tab AutoLimits panel AutoLimits Settings Sets visibility preferences for OK. Warning (data approaching limit of target range). expand AutoLimits to show individual AutoLimit types. Default setting is On. Sets boundaries for each AutoLimit type. Warning. In individual AutoLimits. but do not affect previously created AutoLimits. Default setting is On. .Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization > AutoLimits Concept Procedure Quick Reference AutoLimits Settings Use AutoLimits Settings to accept or to change defaults. That is. Select On to display or Off to turn off display of the indicator. monitored values that fall within that range are considered to be acceptable.

. click the Tool Tip icon to set AutoLimits Tooltip Feedback options. Precision Method Lower Upper Tool tip In the AutoLimit Settings browser. Clear the check box to use tolerances set in the boundaries of individual AutoLimits. Use Model Tolerances When selected. Warning. Select this check box to use the tolerances already defined for the model. Defines the left (lower) value of the boundary range. +/. Select check boxes for the information to include in a tooltip for an AutoLimit with defined boundaries.As numbers below or above a total specified value. the range between red levels is three times the model tolerance. Once the boundaries are created. applies the model tolerance to each level (OK. if you create all five levels for a particular AutoLimit. Clear the check box to turn off tool tips. place the cursor over a browser icon of an object to show information related to the AutoLimit. and Serious Warning).boundary conditions. Selects the level of precision (number of decimal places) for AutoLimits tolerances. Selects the method to use as a range for acceptable tolerances: % As a percentage of a total specified value. Defines the right (upper) value of the boundary range. For example.

right-click a parameter that is designated for export and click Custom Property Format. Volume. the Export Parameter check box must be selected. This option must be selected each time a format change is to be made to all exported parameters of the same type. Only parameters of the same type (Length. For Text Type parameters defined in inch or feet units. Access: In the Parameters dialog box. To designate a parameter for export. This option does not link the parameters for future format changes. Export the parameter data type as either text or number. the parameter can be exported in decimal degrees or degrees-minutes-seconds formats. For Text Type parameters. Select the check box to apply the designated format to all exported parameters in the current document. Preview Units String Preview the parameter with export format applied. For Text Type parameters defined in degrees units. and so on) are affected.Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization > Parameters in models Concept Procedure Quick Reference Custom Property Format Enables the format of exported parameters to set. Property Type Units Format Apply to existing comparable parameters . the parameter can be exported in decimal or fractional formats. Select the units for the parameter export. Different choices are available based on the Format setting. select the check box to append the units string to the parameter. Precision Select the precision for the parameter export.

Leading Zeros Trailing Zeros Leading zeros are applied to the parameter if the check box is selected. . Trailing zeros are applied to the parameter if the check box is selected.

Access: On the Tools tab. use the Measure commands to measure distance. Reset Measure Distance Clears the measurement from the Measurement box so that you can make another measurement. distance between two components in an assembly (minimum distance). or Edges and Faces. enclosed regions. or center point of the selected coordinate system. loop. radius and diameter of a circle. Measure UCS dropdown list Measure Angle Measure Loop Measure Area . Shows measured distance from the origin of the part. Measure Angle. select Measure Distance. Measures the length of closed loops defined by face boundaries. distance between two faces. Measure Loops. or position of elements relative to the active coordinate system. Measures the angle between two lines. angle. Origin option is listed first in the drop-down list followed with list of UCSes in your active document. Measures the area of contiguous. Measures length of a line. length of an arc. right-click in the graphics window and select Measure. The drop-down list is available only if your active document contains a UCS. click the arrow to list options. Measure panel. Results are displayed in the measurement box. Measure panel. or points. From the measure box. Part. or Measure Area. Or. edges. or area. Click arrow at left to change selection priority to Component.Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization > Edit models Concept Procedure Quick Reference Measure command On the Tools tab. and then select the option. or other geometry. distance between points.

resetting the sum to zero. Displays eight formatting values and the option to display all decimals. Displays the sum of all measurements you have added to the accumulate. Clears all measurements from the accumulate. .Add to Accumulate Clear Accumulate Display Accumulate Precision/ All Decimals Adds the measurement in the Measurement box to accumulate a total measurement.

any derive that references the solid body enters the Design Doctor. implicitly marked for derive when a derive feature is created. the solid body can be derived. A hand symbol superimposed on the item icon identifies an exported object. Excludes the selected objects from export. by default and regardless of its export state. Note It is one object that is. any unconsumed visible 2D or 3D sketches in the component are exported and can be derived. Marks the selected objects for export. requesting changes to referencing documents on a per-object. Solid Body Sketches Work Geometry Surfaces . Either click the icon next to an individual object and toggle the status.Autodesk Inventor > Design Optimization > Derived parts and assemblies Concept Procedure Quick Reference Export Objects Enables you to specify which derivable objects to mark for export. When exported. Symbols Indicates whether the object is marked for export. If you turn off export with the Export Objects command. any visible surfaces in the component are exported and can be derived. When selected. or select multiple objects and click a status button at the top of the dialog box. Objects must be marked for export in order for them to be derived. This optimizes the update process. When selected. enabling you to change the status on multiple selected objects at the same time. rather than per-file basis. any visible work features in the component are exported and can be derived. Access: Status Ribbon: Manage tab Author panel Export Objects Provides the following command buttons. When selected.

The Parameters folder includes a subfolder that contains folders from the Parameters dialog box. iMates . The Parameters and Export Objects dialog boxes share the same parameter statuses. When selected.Parameters When selected. any iMates defined in the source assembly are exported and can be derived. any parameters in the source assembly are exported and can be derived.

Autodesk Inventor > System Performance Topics in this section Network license Increase performance and capacity Increase performance in file migration .

.Autodesk Inventor > System Performance > Network license License timeout functionality Network connectivity requirement License borrowing Additional Information Contact your CAD manager for more information about using Autodesk Inventor with a network license.

Autodesk Inventor > System Performance > Increase performance and capacity Concept Procedure Application Options tips You may find that by implementing LOD's. If not. and using some of the other techniques described previously. Access: Ribbon: Tools tab Options panel Application Options The following settings on the tabs listed below can affect performance and/or capacity: General File Colors Display Hardware Drawing Sketch Notebook . the next section offers suggestions for adjusting the Application Options to consume the least amount of resources. you eliminate performance issues. Shrinkwrap or Derived substitutes.

and then select From Local or From Vault. Although this method may slow down the migration. 2. click Add.ipt) files. next all subassemblies. Autodesk Inventor [version] In the Task Scheduler main menu.Autodesk Inventor > System Performance > Increase performance in file migration Access: Start Programs Autodesk Tools Task Scheduler. Click the down-arrow in the File name column. and select . 3. Migrate all part (. the main assembly. Note This method is a faster than selecting an entire project at a time for migration within Autodesk Inventor To ensure the full benefit of Memory Saving Mode. The following method reduces the time to open an assembly model. Always make a backup. In the Migrate Files dialog box. click Create Task Files. use Task Scheduler. and finally. since Autodesk Inventor does not need to migrate files before opening them. TIPS In the Migrate Files dialog box. Access Task Scheduler: Programs Autodesk Autodesk Inventor [release] Tools Task Scheduler. Select Add Folder to migrate 2 or more part (. click Options tab Migrate Total Rebuild. Although this method takes longer than selecting an entire project at a time for migration. following these steps ultimately increases Autodesk Inventor performance. 1. migrate all your Autodesk Inventor R10 and earlier files.ipt . Browse to the appropriate folder and click OK. it ultimately increases Autodesk Inventor performance.ipt) files first . To facilitate this task.

migrate the drawing (. 6. This technique can result in "out of memory" and stability issues with large assemblies since Windows on a 32-bit operating system can only allocate a maximum of 2 GB of memory to each CPU process (this 2-GB limit may be spread over RAM or the pagefile). 4.ipn) files. Using this method. Once completed. Repeat the steps for the main assembly. Autodesk Inventor loads every part and subassembly separately into memory including reoccurring parts and patterned assemblies. Migrating just the main assembly.idw) and the presentation (. . repeat the previous steps for all the subassemblies (not the main assembly). Note This method is more efficient than selecting an entire project at a time for migration. Autodesk Inventor loads each part and subassembly into memory on a one by one basis before freeing up the memory for the item. it can start to be a major issue. Finally. 5. With large assemblies containing Component Patterns.to display only part files.

then changes made to that part update the remaining adaptive counterparts. and its adaptive counterparts update when the fixed geometry is changed.Autodesk Inventor > Glossary active part The part that is being edited. and undisplayed parts. In an assembly file. select the part in either the browser or the graphics window before it can be edited. If a part or subassembly was previously hidden or designated as background. See also background. adaptive status . In an open part file. Child geometry updates when the parent is modified. enabled. adaptive compared to associative Associative geometry has a one-way parametric relationship between parent and child geometry. it must be enabled before activation. the default styles associated with the active standard. adaptive part Underconstrained part geometry can resize when designated as an adaptive part in an assembly. Features that were underconstrained in the part file can resize according to assembly constraints and positions of other parts. One part is designated as fixed geometry. Individual part features may be designated as adaptive using the context menu. The active part may be edited. adaptive feature A feature that can resize when constrained to other features. unless they are designated as adaptive. Whenever a part is reassigned from adaptive to fixed geometry. Adaptive geometry can have two-way dependencies. the part is active and available for edit. active standard style In drawing documents. Child geometry projected from a parent part is dependent on parent geometry. Assembly constraints position adaptive parts relative to other parts and adapt the part topology to fully constrained part features. Features are constrained to a specified size. active sketch The current sketch to edit.

In assemblies. which results in a fast load of only the assembly file. adaptive subassembly In the context of an assembly. work planes. aligned dimension A linear dimension parallel to a line spanning the minimum distance between two measurement points. adaptive piston and rod subassemblies are sized and positioned when inserted in an air cylinder assembly. designation of a component that contains underconstrained parts or subassemblies. one occurrence sets the adaptive status for multiple placements of a component. For example. electrical. but may be designated as adaptive in the context menu or the Occurrence tab of the Properties dialog box. all parts suppressed . Parts are rigid bodies by default. For example. When an adaptive subassembly is constrained within its parent assembly. Using assembly constraints to adjust size and shape relative to other parts may modify adaptive part topology. and does not load their occurrences in memory. or to a component in another assembly. For example. a 3D sweep feature relies on adaptive work points positioned relative to other components in an assembly to establish its position. underconstrained geometry in an adaptive part resizes. all components suppressed Suppresses all children of the assembly. and work axes) within a part that is positioned by the geometry of other parts. adaptive work features Construction geometry (such as work points.The status of a part that is not constrained to a specified size or shape. and plumbing (MEP) applications. AEC Exchange Connector A preparation tool that enables Autodesk Inventor content to be used in a connected system in mechanical. consider the hundreds of fasteners in a design. reduced network traffic may also result. The position of the work features adapts to changes made to the referenced geometry. Subassemblies are fully suppressed so that their browser structure is not visible. If the content center files are stored in a remote location. All Components Suppressed is the lowest-weight loading of an assembly. all content center suppressed Suppresses all components designated as content.

assembly .Suppresses all parts at all levels of the assembly hierarchy. tangent arc (specified from the endpoint of a curve to another point). there are two potential places for a weld. and other attributes without loading part files. and an arc tangent or perpendicular to a curve (created by dragging with the line tool). all-around symbol An open circle at the vertex of the welding symbol that indicates the weld is to go around the entire joint. arc Geometry is defined four ways in sketches: center-point arc (specified by a center point and two points on a curve). Also called alternative dimension or dual dimension. The arrow side weld is made with the instructions given below the reference line for an ANSI symbol and above the reference line for all other standards. angle constraint An assembly constraint that controls the angle between planes on two components in an assembly. angle dimension A dimension that denotes the angle formed by two lines. all styles Styles in the current document and the style library. For example. aspect ratio The proportional relationship of height and width. three-point arc (specified by two endpoints and a radius). Subassemblies are loaded. You can investigate the assembly structure. constraints. arrow side In weld situations such as a T-shaped joint. alternate unit dimension A dimension that displays two compatible units of measurement. The proportions of the height to width do not change. The side of the joint to which the arrow points is known as the arrow side. a bitmap used in a sketch can be resized but it retains its original aspect ratio. array See pattern feature.

holes. assembly structure The hierarchical tree shown in the browser that graphically illustrates relationships among components in the assembly model. assembly presentations See presentation views. Assembly patterns are used to place multiple bolts in holes. Constraints may be placed between faces of features. Constraints remove degrees of freedom. associative design view representation A drawing view that is associated to a design view representation in the assembly environment that updates automatically when changes are made to the design view representation in the assembly environment. part edges. and part work features such as planes. An assembly typically includes multiple components positioned absolutely and relatively (as required) with constraints that define both size and position.Two or more components (parts or subassemblies) considered as a single model. inferred axes. Mass and material properties may be inherited from individual part files. components arranged in a circular or rectangular pattern. points. and points. An assembly pattern can be associative to a feature pattern. When the model changes. extrude cuts. like drawing views. Used to define specific manufacturing processes such as match drilling and post-weld machining. flat pattern views are associated with the 3D model. weld beads) that are created and saved in the assembly file. Assembly components may include features defined in place in the assembly. The topology is not passed down to the component files. and tangent. assembly constraints Rules that determine how parts in an assembly are placed relative to other parts in the assembly. flush. All elements in the pattern are identical. component position in the assembly structure compares to the sequence of assembly during manufacturing. assembly features Features (chamfers. updating when the feature pattern is edited. axes. assembly pattern In an assembly. the flat pattern view is . The assembly structure shows the ownership of constraints and components within a subassembly. or to position any component or components in a symmetrical arrangement. In general. associative flat pattern views In sheet metal design. Assembly constraints include angle. mate.

base feature The first feature created in a part. an isometric view is axonometric. For example. selecting an edge automatically selects all edges tangent to it. where a 3D model appears as inclined. . However.sat or . May be an imported base solid (. Y. an associative spline is created instead of a true mathematical ellipse if the offset selection point does not display the parent ellipse axis. all pattern elements are fully constrained as a group. associative sketch pattern elements In sketch patterns. Sketched or placed features add details to the base feature and are positioned relative to one another using dimensional or geometric constraints. The result is a spline equidistant from the ellipse. When Automatic Edge Chain is on. exposing the X. in which case the base feature is a fixed size. AutoCAD spline fit method Creates an Autodesk Inventor spline using the same method used by AutoCAD. Changes to an element update all other elements in the pattern. Pattern geometry becomes copied geometry with no association to other elements.updated. If association is removed during pattern creation or editing. In an assembly or a bill of materials. The base feature should represent the most basic shape in the part.step file format). axis of revolution The centerline of a revolved feature. constraints are removed. automatic edge chain A selection setting used during creation of 3D fillets. axonometric projection A type of orthographic view created by projection lines that are perpendicular to the viewing surface or plane. flat pattern dimensions do not update 3D models. associative spline When creating an offset from an ellipse. an attribute typically refers to a file-level property to incorporate into a structured bill of materials. attribute A data management description of information associated with a part of subassembly. and Z view planes simultaneously.

bounding rectangle A virtual rectangle that represents the extents of an image in Autodesk . often referred to in the flat pattern as the area between bend lines. and bend radius are used to calculate the amount of distortion. but the solid can be modified by adding features. beam Typically a horizontal structural member of a frame often analyzed for load bearing capacity. material. A base solid is fully dimensioned. the area where material deformation takes place. Bills of materials can be single or multiple levels (exploded). bend relief In sheet metal design. a small notch cut at the end of a bend to prevent material from tearing. a document that describes components details such as component name. a factor applied when converting a bend to an unfolded condition. center. bend lines can be displayed in the flat pattern drawing view to show the start. bend In sheet metal design. its size can be changed only by commands in the Solids environment. bend lines In sheet metal design. Material thickness. bill of materials For an assembly. and quantity. a corner seam can be converted to a bend. bend zone In sheet metal design. A bend is the small radius between faces that represents the fabrication process in which bends are applied to a flat pattern to form a 3D part. and end of the bend zone. material type. bend allowance In sheet metal design.base solid A model in SAT or STEP file format imported in Autodesk Inventor as a base feature (the first feature in a model). bottom-up design A sequential assembly design technique that adds previously designed components to an assembly model and positions the components using assembly constraints.

. cached data In the computer memory. Objects are shown in the browser in the order in which they were created. renamed. right-click a curve. a child element is dependent on another (parent) element. constraints. and then change the linetype to a centerline. A typical example is a feature. Catalog folders are used to manage iFeatures in a user-defined hierarchy. Icons represent sketches. and angle. or dependent feature. When an image is placed in a sketch. that depends on a base feature.Inventor. and drawings. features. catalog Microsoft Windows folder hierarchy. In the browser. or attributes for each model. when a part containing an iSketch is edited outside of the parent assembly. For example. to display at a legible scale. added. deleted. such as a cut. It allows a component view and its critical annotation areas. browser The graphical hierarchy showing relationships among geometric elements in parts. chamfer A placed feature that bevels a part edge and is defined by its placement. size. child In a hierarchical design relationship. and moved to a different location in the browser. which in an unbroken view are prohibitively small. the child. the last used solution that yielded usable sketch or system data. broken view A drawing view that was divided with cosmetic break lines and foreshortened. centerline The axis about which a profile is revolved (revolve feature) or swept (sweep feature). Objects can also be edited. copied. assemblies. constraints and dimensions can be applied to the bounding rectangle to position the image. To automate centerline selection. center point A work point placed at the intersection of the default reference planes in a part or assembly file. the assembly displays a message warning that changes may not be reflected in the part because the last-known (cached) data is used to represent the part in the assembly.

that are to be used as a unit. or saving files in DWG or DXF format. The result is the same as that of a coincident constraint applied to the centers of the curves.is indented under its parent. arcs. A child feature can be a parent to other features. In an assembly. a collinear constraint is achieved with a mate constraint between two lines. When this constraint is applied to the center points of two circles. join. the result is the same as the concentric constraint. or axes. configuration file A file that specifies the options for opening AutoCAD or Mechanical Desktop files. Components can be treated as parts within other assemblies. or ellipses to have the same center point. composite iMate A group of individual iMates. deleting the child feature has no effect on the parent feature. edges. arcs. You can add connection points and use them to position . In an assembly. or intersect operation on selected solid bodies. component A part or subassembly placed into another assembly. coincident constraint A geometric constraint that constrains two points together or constrains one point to a curve. circle Geometry defined two ways in sketches: a center-point circle (defined by a center point and a point on its circumference) and a tangent circle (defined as tangent to three lines on its circumference). or ellipses. connection point A point that you can define for use in inferencing or snapping to other geometry. In most cases. when a component with a composite iMate is matched with another component with a composite iMate of the same name. combine Performs a cut. all constraints in the iMate collection solve at once. collinear constraint A geometric constraint that causes two or more line segments or ellipse axes to lie along the same line. selected and named in the browser. concentric constraint A geometric constraint that causes two circles. Assembly components can be single parts or combined parts that operate as a unit (or subassembly).

constraints Rules that govern the position.sketched symbols. Y. such as a sketch used in an extrusion. tools modify the geometry. For example. lines. The line style designates a curve as construction geometry. construction environment Imported data resides in the construction environment until it is promoted to the part environment. Dimensional constraints control size. with data groups nested below it. and relationships among sketch geometry or the relative position between parts in an assembly. corner break . when importing data in IGES or SAT format. coordinate system The set of magnitudes (visually represented by the X. Displays commands and Help for the current operation. Geometric constraints control the shapes and relationships among sketch elements or assembly components. constant-radius fillet A fillet that has the same radius along its entire length. curves. such as repairing errors in imported data. By default. and planes in part and assembly files. slope. title blocks. but not used to define profiles or paths. dimensions. construction geometry Geometry used to assist in the creation of sketches or features. By definition. a Construction icon is placed in the browser. consumed sketch A sketch incorporated into a feature. containing selection window Dragging your cursor from right to left creates a crossing selection. the sketch is consumed by the feature. Applying constraints removes degrees of freedom. Use the Constant tab on the Fillet feature dialog box to select the edges and specify the radius for a constant-radius fillet feature. Objects that are fully within the containing window are selected. a grid displays on the active sketch plane of the coordinate system. context menu The menu that appears when the right mouse button is clicked. In the active construction environment. tangency. and other drawing objects. and Z axes) that determine the position of points.

In sheet metal design. circles. splines. arcs. Each row in the spreadsheet represents an individual iPart with a unique instance. a small notch that prevents material from tearing is placed where two bends join. each of which has a unique instance with parameters. Cosmetic welds represent a wide range of weld types. cut length For frames. or an entire 3D part. including the alignment or overlap of edges. and other values that are maintained in an embedded spreadsheet. When a custom iPart is used in an assembly. cuts are sketched shapes that define material to remove from a single face. which you can add as manufacturing notes in the cut list. or thickness). a corner seam mates edges where two bends join. specific values specified during the iPart definition can be modified (such as length. Each treatment on a frame member produces a custom property called CUTDETAIL(n). custom iPart An iPart factory generates iParts. including lines. corner relief In sheet metal design. a specified depth. and ellipses. corner seam In sheet metal design. and inserts corner relief. . Cosmetic welds always reside in the Welds feature group. curves Geometric objects in a sketch. the overall length of the raw stock required to create a structural member (including enough material to accommodate end treatments on either end). properties. cut In sheet metal design. cosmetic welds are graphic elements that indicate welded edges. cut list A cut list is a table listing components with dimensions and cut treatment information for fabrication and accounting purposes. They do not add mass to the assembly and cannot be used in interference checking. miter of angled flanges. a corner break applies either a radius or chamfer edge to the end of a flange. width. cosmetic welds In a weldment model.

a body floating free in space with no constraints to another grounded body can be moved along three axes of translation and around three axes of rotation. A derived part is linked to the original part and can be updated to reflect changes to the original part. The base feature is listed as a derived part feature in the browser. and intersect) that define the relationship between a sketched feature and an existing feature. In assemblies. such as chamfers and fillets. derived part feature A base feature in a new part that is derived from an existing Autodesk Inventor part. A part can be scaled or mirrored when inserted into a file.cut operation One of 3 Boolean operations (cut. and additional features can further modify the body. Constraints remove degrees of freedom by restricting the ways sketch geometry can change or a freefloating body can move. When creating a derived part. Part modeling features can further modify the derived part feature. Not available for base features. you import a part as the base feature. derived part A new part that uses an existing Autodesk Inventor part as its base feature. cutting plane Used to display an assembly section temporarily for defining new features. degrees of freedom The variables by which an object can move. A cutting plane is an existing plane defined by default work planes within the assembly or within one of the component parts of the assembly. design elements See iFeatures . deck The walking surface of a platform. Such a body is said to have six degrees of freedom. dragging a feature or component farther from the top level. typically constructed of diamond plate or expanded metal. join. dependent features Features that are geometrically dependent on another feature. demote In the browser hierarchy. A cut operation removes the volume of a sketched feature from an existing feature.

Design properties are also used to maintain and update information automatically in title blocks. and sketched symbols. and when recalled. parts lists. dimension style A group of settings that control the default format for dimensional annotations in drawings. downstream process An operation that follows the selected operation in an order-dependent process. For example. A design view captures characteristics such as selection status (enabled or not enabled). and viewing angle. or in parameter files. as a variable in an equation. can be designated as a driving dimension (resizes the model) or reference dimension (does not resize the model). bills of material. dimensional constraints Parametric dimensions that control sketch size. and other annotations. Dimensional constraints can be expressed as numeric constants. usually to present an uncluttered working environment. See also iProperties design view representation A named and saved assembly view where components have characteristics selectively designated. You set up dimension styles in a template or drawing before you place dimensions. zoom magnification. The design layout is a dynamic document that becomes less useful as a project nears completion. In drawing views. It is superseded by detailed part and assembly designs. color and style. as variables in equations. draft . the sketch resizes. components are shown with the designated display characteristics. post-weld machining operations are downstream from the weld bead and weld preparation operations. When dimensions are changed. visibility status. diameter dimension A dimension that controls the size of a circle or arc in a sketch or drawing view. hole notes. The design view representation can be named. Can be stated as a numeric constant.design layout A 2D master drawing or sketch that is drawn to scale with minimal detail to capture the known design parameters of a problem or project. or in a link to a parameter file. design properties The file properties that can be used to find and manage Autodesk Inventor files.

or to add custom annotations to a drawing sheet or drawing view. draft plane A planar face used to determine the direction of the draft angle. Dimensions. and other annotations are placed on the drawing sheet and geometry is placed in the associated sketch drafting standards Specific guidelines for drawing views. title block formats. title blocks. vendors. duplicated feature . Place a draft view and construct a drawing without an associated model. A draft view has one or more associated sketches. Drafting standards facilitate the exchange of information among several users. text. for example. Draft angle can be applied when a sketch is extruded or can be applied to selected faces. or borders to a drawing. Design resources are listed in the Drawing Resources folder in the browser. Its value updates when the geometry changes size. draft view A special view in a drawing that does not contain a representation of a 3D model.See face draft. drawing resources The sheet formats. the data is placed in a draft view. draft angle A taper applied to part faces. When you import an AutoCAD file to an Autodesk Inventor drawing. Use drawing resources to add new sheets. driven dimension A nonparametric dimension enclosed in parentheses that shows the current value of geometry. border templates. driving dimension A parametric dimension that determines the size of sketch geometry and resizes the sketch when its value changes. or use a draft view to provide detail that is missing in a model. and sketched symbols defined in a drawing or drawing template. and manufacturers. dimensions. You can define new drawing resources and add them to the folder. notes. and annotations that ensure uniform presentation of information. to allow extraction from a mold. but it does not resize geometry.

A feature that has been copied and arrayed in a rectangular or circular pattern or mirrored. Placed parts are enabled automatically. or top-level assembly that is activated in place. coping. End treatments can include miters. Except for the active component. butt. Edits are saved to the part or subassembly file. end treatment The geometry of a structural member where it joins another structural member of a frame. endpoint An implicit point on the ends of curves. a part that is fully loaded in memory and can be activated in place for editing. The fillet radius and all fillet options are the same for all edges in a single edge set. edge set A group of edges selected during the creation of a 3D fillet feature. subassembly. Endpoints can be included in constraints. enabled part In an open assembly file. The edit target can be a part file. and as snap points. engineering notes . dimensions. and others. edge The curve joining two model faces. edit target The file to which edits are saved when constraints are applied or when assembly components are created or edited in place. chains together all edges that are tangent to the edges you select to fillet. edge chain In a fillet feature. all components are shown in wireframe and cannot be selected. ellipse Geometry created from the intersection of a cylinder and an angled plane. Double-click the top-level assembly in the browser to reactivate the assembly. edit in place A component is activated (the edit target) and edited in the assembly context.

and Boolean logical operators. Exploded views are defined in an assembly presentation file and then used to add exploded views to a drawing. ul/min equals min-1). and stairwells used to operate and maintain complex machinery. less than. you can capture. and other relationships. offset. functions. and manage engineering notes. Using Autodesk Inventor. extrusion extent. an expression can include inequalities of greater than. external frame Frames often required for platforms. extruded feature A feature created by adding depth to a sketched profile. equations Mathematical expressions that range from simple numbers to complex algebraic and trigonometric expressions that use parameters as variables. equal constraint A geometric constraint that causes selected arcs and circles to have the same radius or selected lines to have the same length. expression A mathematical expression relates one set of terms to a syntactical collection of other terms through mathematical operations. exploded view A view in which parts of an assembly are separated for unobstructed viewing. An extracted feature can be retrieved from a Windows folder (catalog) and placed in a part file. Autodesk Inventor equations support most common mathematic operators but do not support addition or subtraction in exponents. Use the expression ul/units to create a negative exponent (for example. assembly constraint. edit. extract The process of copying a feature out of a part model and storing it in a feature file.Notes attached to a feature. less than or equal to. feature. Unless the . Unlike an equation (whose sides are equal). Each parameter has a unique equation. and taper angle. You can enter an equation as the value of a dimension. You can build external frames either at the time machines or equipment are installed. assembly. access ways. or other object to document the design process and decisions. Feature shape is controlled by profile shape. part. The direction and distance that parts can be moved are dependent on the settings that you specify when setting up the view. or parameter. or concurrently with the machinery. greater than or equal to.

or intersect) and the participating bodies for the operation if multiple bodies exist. After the sketch is modified. sketch. or subassembly to be used as an iFeature. feature Parametric geometry that creates or modifies parts or assemblies. and fixed edge or tangent surface.ide) and can be retrieved by name and placed in a part or assembly file. When Edit Sketch is selected in either the graphics window or the browser. Individual features can be modified as needed. work (construction) features.extruded feature is the first feature. such as a part face or a face in a quilt. feature constraints See constraints. Types include sketched. face draft A taper applied to part faces to cant a surface or allow a part to be extracted from a mold. the feature (and all features created after it) is temporarily hidden and its original sketch appears. and assembly features. Features combine to build up a complex part or assembly model. cut. The iFeature is stored in a feature file (. Draft is defined by specified faces. angle. Relationships among features are defined by geometric and dimensional constraints. and duplicated features. fillet curve An arc of a specified radius placed at the corner or intersection of 2 lines using the Fillet sketch tool. feature sketch edit The Edit Sketch command modifies a feature by changing its sketch dimensions. can create a new body. . face A bounded surface that defines part of an object. Optionally. placed. its relationship to an existing feature or body is defined by selecting a Boolean operation (join. the feature updates to incorporate the changes and all subsequent features reappear. feature file A file created when you extract a feature. pull direction. feature participant See participant components.

fillet weld See solid welds and cosmetic welds. In the Mechanical Desktop. Placing a flush constraint removes three degrees of freedom (two rotational and two translational). a flush constraint is achieved using an assembly mate constraint and selecting a surface normal solution. are fit points. The capability is useful for kinematic mechanism design. Y. A fillet feature is defined by its type. Beginning and endpoints. fly through A motion-oriented view of a part or assembly model. fit point A definition point that does not move when a spline is solved. flush constraint An assembly constraint that points the surface normals of selected faces in the same direction. and Z axes. frame A mechanical component typically composed of welded structural members which serves as the foundation component of a machine or as an external . Welding symbols with no flag indicate to apply the weld in the shop. first-level component A component linked directly to the top-level assembly icon in the assembly browser. and internal points constrained to other geometry. foreign component Parts and assembly models created in another CAD system.fillet feature A placed feature applied to edges and corners of a 3D model. A first-level component can be an individual part or a subassembly that contains multiple parts or other subassemblies. flag A symbol extending out of the vertex of the welding symbol which indicates that to make the weld onsite. and placement. In Perspective Camera mode. radius. you can use the mouse and key commands to navigate internal portions of a model with full range of motion between X. flexible assembly A subassembly that can be positioned in a top-level assembly while allowing its underconstrained positions to be driven or dragged from its parent level.

The tangent plane of any point with positive Gaussian curvature touches the surface at a single point. Frames are typically a single item within a bill of materials. In the graphics window. constraints.access platform. geometric constraints Rules that define the geometric relationships of sketch elements and control how a sketch can change shape or size. grounded component A part or subassembly for which all six degrees of freedom were removed relative to the assembly origin. zoomed in and out. frame skeleton A 2D/3D wireframe or solid body representation of the frame that consists of straight line segments. Any point with zero mean curvature has negative or zero Gaussian curvature. ground shadow Shadow cast below a visible model is updated dynamically as the model rotates or moves. although the ground can later be deleted and relocated. features. if needed. You can position the part or subassembly without reference to other parts. and light defined. horizontal. The effect is similar to a shadow cast on the ground beneath a model. whereas the tangent plane of any point with negative Gaussian curvature cuts the surface. concentric. parallel. The first part or subassembly placed in an assembly file is grounded automatically. Some constraints are inferred according to sketched shape and others may be manually applied to remove degrees of freedom. parts. equal. models can be rotated. material. and assemblies are created and edited. Geometric constraints are coincident. It is fixed in space. collinear. perpendicular. Gaussian curvature The Gaussian curvature of a surface at a point is the product of the principal curvatures at that point. fix. and view characteristics such as color. grounded work point A work point created in a part or assembly to represent a point fixed in . tangent. global parameters Called global variables in the Mechanical Desktop. and vertical. graphics window The active modeling area in which sketches.

space. A grounded work point is indicated in the browser by a push pin symbol. In a part file, the 3D Move/Rotate tool displays when point is created and provides specified transforms from the fixed point. 3D Move/Rotate tool is not available in assemblies. heal Autodesk Inventor can extend adjacent faces until they intersect, or heal, when a face such as a fillet face is deleted. Healing is not possible if, for example, a cube face is deleted. hidden folder A folder displayed in the browser for each sequence in an assembly presentation. You can drag components into the hidden folder for a sequence to hide them for the duration of that sequence in the animation. hole A geometric feature defined by hole type, placement, size, and dimensions. A hole requires a center point sketch for its origin and placement. hole tag An alphanumeric identifier added to each hole included in a hole table. horizontal constraint A geometric constraint that positions selected lines, ellipse axes, or pairs of points parallel to the X axis of the sketch coordinate system or positions 2 selected points (curve endpoint, center, midpoint, or sketch point) the same distance from the primary axis (same Y coordinate). horizontal dimension A dimension that controls the size of curves that are parallel to the X-axis in sketches and drawing views. Can be stated as a numeric constant, as a variable in an equation, or in a link to a parameter file. In drawing views, can be designated as a driving dimension (resizes the model) or a reference dimension (does not resize the model). iFeatures Features, sketches, or subassemblies that can be used in more than one design are designated as iFeatures and saved in a file with an .ide extension. To add an iFeature to a part, use Windows Explorer to drag the file name and drop it in the active part file. To change the size of an iFeature, edit its sketch or feature definition or link it to parameters that define its size. You can precisely position an iFeature using geometric constraints and dimensions. iMate

One half of a constraint defined in a component file. Used to position the component automatically in an assembly when matched to an iMate with the same name on another part. Can be given a unique name to describe its use. iMate definition Created when you create or infer iMates on geometry. When matched in an assembly, the solution is an iMate result. iMate result Assembly constraints that consume one or more iMate definitions. in-line work feature A work feature created during the creation of another work feature. For example, when creating a work point, right-click and choose to create either a work plane or a work axis. You can continue to select and create in-line work features until the requirements for the work point, in this case, are satisfied. In-line work features are dependent on the active work feature command in which they were created. in-place activation The context switch from a parent-level assembly to a child of that assembly, such as a subassembly or an individual part. The activated subassembly or part may be edited, moved, constrained, or otherwise modified. Activating a part, subassembly, or assembly in place changes the edit target to the active object. included geometry Model edges, vertices, 2D lines and arcs inserted from existing parts into a 3D sketch using the Include tool. Included geometry is converted to 3D geometry and can be used in a path sketch for a 3D sweep feature. included path file A secondary project file specified in a project. When an included path file is used, Autodesk Inventor searches the locations specified in both projects to resolve links and references between files. An included path file is often used to specify work group locations on a network. inconsistent constraint A constraint that conflicts with a constraint already placed and, thus, cannot be solved. In assemblies, examples of inconsistent constraints include a requested mate constraint when a flush constraint is required (inverted face normals), a rigid body topology conflict, or the Adaptive status not set. infer iMates

A process by which assembly constraints are converted to iMate definitions stored with the part. insert point A user-defined point at which the cursor is attached when a sketched symbol is inserted into a drawing. If you do not specify an insert point for a sketched symbol, the cursor is attached to the center of the symbol geometry. interference The volume created when portions of multiple components occupy a common space. The volume shared by the intersecting components is displayed; individual components can be modified to eliminate interference. intermittent weld A weld that is not continuous along its length. Two or three values are required depending on the standard. Possible values are length, pitch or spacing, and number. internal frame A frame you can use as the base upon which to build a machine. You can weld frames together, machine and then paint or otherwise finish them, or bolt them together using materials left unfinished, such as stainless steel or aluminum. intersect operation One of 3 Boolean operations (cut, join, and intersect) that define the relationship between a sketched feature and an existing feature. An intersect operation creates a feature from the shared volume of a sketched feature and an existing feature. Material not included in the shared volume is deleted. Not available for base features. invisible part See undisplayed part. iPart A part generated from an iPart Factory, whose multiple configurations are each maintained in a row in an embedded spreadsheet defined in the iPart Factory. The designer of the iPart Factory specifies parameters, properties, features, iMates, and other values to include or exclude from individual iParts. Standard iParts cannot be modified; Custom iParts contain some values that may be modified when the part is used. iProperties File properties that can be used to find and manage Autodesk Inventor files.

iProperties are also used to maintain and update information automatically in title blocks, parts lists, bills of material, and sketched symbols. See also design properties. isolated environment A collaborative work environment in which designers copy all files from the server into a personal workspace before working on them. The project file for an isolated environment specifies the personal workspace and any additional local paths. isometric A type of orthographic projection where a 3D model is situated so that each of the three fundamental model planes (X, Y, and Z) has an equal degree of exposure relative to the view angle of the observer. joggle In sheet metal design, a means to offset material so that material can be overlapped. join operation One of three Boolean operations (cut, join, and intersect) that define the relationship between a sketched feature and an existing feature. A join operation adds the volume of a sketched feature to the existing feature. Not available for base features. joint The location where one structural member becomes coincident with a second structural member. In many frames, these locations are define welded conditions. Joints are most common at either end of a structural member. key values A value used to define an iPart or a table-driven iFeature instance when used in a model. An iPart or table-driven iFeature must have at least one primary key and as many as eight secondary keys. Keys are numbered when defined in the iPart factory and control available values when the iPart is used. For example, selecting a primary key value filters available secondary key values. keyframe animation An animation created by arranging objects and taking snapshots of them at key moments during a sequence of movement or change. These key moments or keyframes become the fixed points in time through which the animation passes. ladder

Platform frames often exist on multiple levels surrounding large equipment, and these levels often require ladder access. Ladders can consist of several parallel vertical structural members connected with various types of rungs. leaf part A single component in the assembly tree or a component in an assembly. library feature See iFeatures. library search paths The locations of files not edited. Libraries can include purchased or standard parts, Mechanical Desktop parts used in Autodesk Inventor assemblies, iPart factories and members, or other internally developed standard parts. A library is often referenced by multiple projects. Each project specifies the locations of its libraries. line Straight curve bounded by two endpoints. The line tool on the Sketch toolbar chains line segments together and creates arcs tangent or perpendicular to existing curves. Segments and arcs are automatically joined by coincident constraints at their endpoints. local style A style cached in the current document. By default, the styles associated with a selected drafting standard are available in a document. loft feature A sketched feature specified by tangency condition, termination, and order of sketches. Loft features blend 2 or more dissimilar sketch shapes on nonintersecting sketch planes. Optionally, can create a new solid body. loop A closed sketch shape that can include sketched curves, edges, and planar faces as boundaries. lump A group of faces that may contain some or no void. A part or surface body should have at least one lump. For example, if you draw two separate rectangles in a sketch and extrude both of them, the resulting part has two lumps. If you create two separate lines (not connected) and extrude them, the resulting surface has two lumps. machining features Assembly features added to the Machining folder in a weldment assembly.

Machining features are added after weld beads are applied to the weldment assembly, often affecting multiple assembly components. Holes and extrude cuts are typical post-weld machining features. machining features group A folder in the weldment environment representing metal removal operations performed after welding. Machining operations often affect multiple assembly components. Holes and extrude cuts are typical postweld machining features. mask A property that describes the transparency of an image inserted in a sketch. When a mask is applied to an image, the mask color is determined by the bottom right pixel of the image. mass properties See physical properties. mate constraint An assembly constraint that joins elements together with a surface normal orientation and an optional offset. A planar mate constraint usually moves two external part faces so that their surface normals point in opposite directions. Mate constraints can be used to join points, lines, edges, or axes together and to adapt diameters of unconstrained cylinders. material properties Properties defined by the material definition stored in individual part files. Properties include Young's modulus, Poisson's ratio, specific heat, density, yield strength, ultimate strength, linear expansion, and thermal conductivity. Mechanical Desktop part Component models created using the Mechanical Desktop. middle-out design An assembly design technique that combines aspects of both top-down and bottom-up techniques. Assemblies designed with the middle-out technique usually have some fixed equipment or requirements, but also require custom design solutions. midpoint The center of a line segment. minimum energy spline fit method Generates a smooth curve with high visual appeal and better curvature distribution. Because splines contain more data, surfaces generated from

the minimum energy splines compute slower than other spline curvature types. missing geometry A constraint error that occurs in an assembly when a component is constrained in position, but subsequent modifications are made to one of the constrained parts. The geometry involved in the constraint is no longer available. It can happen if the geometry was consumed by a subsequent feature operation or if the feature containing the geometry was deleted or suppressed. missing tooth In features or components arranged in a pattern, a position within the logical definition that denotes a skipped or suppressed occurrence. motion constraint Specifies intended motion ratios between assembly components, either by rotation (such as gears and pulleys) or rotation and translation (such as a rack and pinion). The first selected component moves relative to the second selected component. multi-body part A part file that contains more than one solid body. Each body can contain an independent collection of features or shared features. Each solid can be exported as a separate part file at the end of the design process. multiview projection A set of single plane orthographic views used to display an object through one view plane per projection. For example, a first angle projection is one view in a multiview projection set. native component A part or assembly created using Autodesk Inventor. A native component can be created in a part file or in place in an assembly file. nested profile A profile enclosed within the boundary of another profile. Nested profiles can be selected and extruded in a single command operation. For example, concentric circles can be selected and extruded to form a tube. new solid An operation in a part file that creates a new body. The solid body can contain a unique set of features separate from other bodies in a multi-body part file. Features can also be shared with other bodies.

not enabled part A part not required for editing in the current design session but that is provided for context. Often, parts that are not enabled are completely positioned and were placed early in the assembly design process. In an open assembly file, parts are designated as not enabled in both the graphics window and the browser and may not be selected. numeric constant A quantity taken to have a fixed value in a specific mathematical context. Examples of numeric constants include pi, English and metric conversion factors, and the freezing point of water. occurrence Placement of a component, usually in multiple-level assemblies, where a component is replicated as a result of multiple placements of a single part or subassembly. offset geometry Duplicates and positions selected sketch geometry a specific distance from the original. By default, offset geometry is constrained equidistant from the original geometry. OLE object A linked or embedded object that originates in an application external to Autodesk Inventor. origin indicator A marker in a drawing view that sets the origin datum point for ordinate dimensions or a hole table. The origin indicator for a view is placed when the first ordinate dimension or hole table is added. A view can have only one origin indicator. orthographic camera mode A display mode where all points of a model are projected along parallel lines to the screen. other side In weld situations such as a T-shaped joint, there are 2 potential places for a weld. The side of the joint opposite the side to which the arrow points is known as the other side. The other side weld is made with the instructions given above the reference line for an ANSI symbol and below the reference line for all other standards. pad Typically a piece of flat stock added to the end of a structural member to

provide stability where the member is bolted to another. Often, pads are added along the length of a structural member to provide additional material to be machined to close tolerances where additional components of an assembly are attached. parallel constraint A geometric constraint that causes two or more lines or ellipse axes to have the same slope and orientation. parallel dimension Linear dimension that shows the distance between two lines and has the same slope as the lines. parameters Used to define the size and shape of features and to control the relative positioning of components within assemblies. Can be expressed as equations to define the relationships between geometric elements relative to one another. Changes to one element update the other. You can link a spreadsheet to a part or assembly and drive the parameters from cells in the spreadsheet. Can be defined to relate dimensions to functional requirements. For example, the cross-sectional area of a part can be defined with specific proportions and able to withstand a certain load (Area = Load/Material_Strength*Factor_of_Safety). parametric dimension Dimensions are constraints that control sketch size. The sketch geometry resizes when you change the dimension value. Together, geometric constraints and dimensional constraints control the size and shape of sketches used to create features. See also geometric constraint and dimensional constraint. parent and child relationships In a hierarchical system, a parent object owns dependent child objects. Deleting a parent deletes dependent children objects. For example, deleting a plate also deletes the pattern of holes on the plate. Deleting a child has no effect on its parent object. A child object usually has a single parent object and may be a parent to other child objects. In the browser, a child object is indented under its parent. part A group of faces that define a closed volume. part constraints Geometric constraints that control the shapes and relationships among

sketch curves. See also geometric constraints. part features Parametric building blocks that are combined to create a part. Features can be sketched, placed, and duplicated. Relationships between features are maintained by geometric and dimensional constraints. part model A collection of geometrically and dimensionally related features that represent a physical object. A part file contains a single part. If the part was created in another CAD system, the part is a single solid with no parametric relationships among its geometric elements. Parts may originate as .SAT files, Mechanical Desktop parts, OLE objects, design (catalog) elements, or custom parts. Custom parts can be created in part files, or in place in assembly files. Parts are combined to form assemblies. In an assembly, parts can be created in relation to the geometry and topology of parts already in place. participant component An assembly component that is affected by an assembly feature. Participant components are listed under the related assembly feature in the assembly browser. parting line A work plane or sketched line, arc, or spline that shows where to split a face or part. parts list In an assembly, a listing of components. Usually, a parts list is single-level and consists of an item number or other designation, part name and quantity. In some cases, parts list is a term used interchangeably with bill of materials, although large organizations usually make a distinction. path The trajectory of a sweep feature. A path can be an open or closed loop consisting of lines, arcs, ellipses, or circles, with a specified start point. path file See project file. pattern element In an assembly pattern, symmetrically arranged components. Each element contains one or more instances (individual parts). In the assembly browser, pattern elements are listed in a numbered sequence below the assembly pattern object. Each element can be expanded to show the instances in the

element. pattern feature Multiple instances of a placed or sketched feature arrayed in a specified pattern. Patterns are defined by type (rectangular or circular), orientation, number of features, and spacing between features. pattern instance In an assembly pattern, the part or parts selected as an element. The elements (one or more parts) are repeated in a symmetrical pattern, each containing the same part instances. In the assembly browser, instances are nested below each pattern element. perpendicular constraint A geometric constraint that causes two lines or ellipse axes to lie at right angles to one another. perspective camera mode A display mode in which a model is displayed in three-point perspective, like the way objects in the real world are perceived by the human eye. physical properties Physical properties of a part, including mass, radii of gyration, volume, principal moments, products, center of gravity, and principal axes. Mass properties are calculated with respect to the sketch coordinate system and the density assigned to an object through a material property attribute. placed component A part or subassembly created in a separate file, then selected and placed in an assembly. One or more copies (occurrences) of the component can be placed from one part or assembly. placed feature A feature that consists of a defined mechanical shape that serves a known engineering function in a part or assembly. Examples are holes, chamfers, fillets, shells, face drafts, and plane cuts. planar face A 2-dimensional (flat) part face. point A persistent sketch point, work point, curve endpoint, midpoint, or center point. post-weld machining

In weldment design, a machining operation that is performed after welds were applied to the weldment. Machining operations often affect multiple assembly components. Holes and extrude cuts are typical post-weld machining features. See also machining features and machining features group. preparation features Assembly features added to the Preparations folder in a weldment assembly. Preparation features contribute to an optional metal removal process often called a weld prep. They are added before welding to ensure adequate weld strength. Chamfers are typical weld preparations. See also weld-prep. preparations feature group A folder in the weldment environment representing an optional metal removal process. This process is done before welding to ensure adequate weld strength. The removed metal is typically filled back in with the weld bead. Chamfers are typical weld preparations. See also weld prep. presentation view A specialized assembly view. You develop the specialized views, such as exploded views, in a presentation file and then use them to create drawing views or other presentations. primary entity Any line or arc with both of its endpoints in the selection set. principal curvatures The principal curvatures of a surface at a point are the minimum and maximum of the normal curvatures at that point. (Normal curvatures are the curvatures of curves on the surface that are lying in planes, including the tangent vector at the given point.) The principal curvatures are used to compute the Gaussian and Mean curvatures of the surface. profile A closed loop defined by sketched or reference geometry that represents a cross section of a feature. An open profile defined by sketched segments, arcs, or splines can define a surface shape or extend to boundaries to close a region. A profile can enclose islands. project A means to organize Autodesk Inventor files and maintain valid links logically between files. A project consists of a home folder, a project file that specifies the paths to the locations of the files in the project, and the local and network folders containing Autodesk Inventor files.

You can have as many projects as needed to manage your work. The project file for each project must be maintained in the project home folder. project file A file that specifies the locations of files in a project. A project file is a text file with an .ipj extension. We recommend that the file is maintained in the home folder for the project. Specify the paths to all files to manage the links and references between the Autodesk Inventor files in the project. There are four types of locations that can be specified in the project file: workspace, local search paths, work group paths, and libraries. For most projects, a single work group location is sufficient. Library folders are for any released or read-only parts referenced by the project, but not created or edited by it. A project can reference documents from several different library folders. Workspaces are used where the Multi-user mode is set to Semi-isolated. Creating a project file with the work group and library locations set to reference shared folders using UNC paths is recommended. If you work on collaborative projects, the project files can specify many file locations and even reference a secondary project file. projected geometry Geometry (model edges, vertices, work axes, work points, or other sketch geometry) projected onto the active sketch plane as reference geometry. Can include edges of a selected assembly component that intersects the sketch plane when it was cut in an assembly cross section. promote In the browser hierarchy, dragging a feature or component closer to the top level. promote surfaces Imported surfaces are placed in the construction environment where tools correct modeling defects such as gaps between surfaces. When corrected, surfaces are promoted to the part environment where they can be edited with feature tools. property A characteristic of a Microsoft Windows file that can be manipulated from an application or Microsoft Windows Explorer. Properties include author or designer and creation date and can also be unique properties assigned by applications or users. Specifying properties can be useful when searching for part or assembly files. pull direction

The direction a mold is pulled from a molded or cast part. The definition of draft for part faces includes the pull direction. quilt A group of connected faces that do not define a volume. radial dimension A dimension that controls the distance from the center point of a circle and arc to a point on its circumference. Can be stated as a numeric constant, as a variable in an equation, or in a link to a parameter file. In drawing views, can be designated as a driving dimension (resizes the model) or reference dimension (does not resize model). radius Distance from the center point of an arc or circle to a point on its circumference. rail A structural member typically of round tube stock that often is placed around platforms for safety reasons. Typical rail frames include hand rails, vertical rail posts, and one or more intermediate/horizontal safety rails. range A limit placed on a variable. When a range is specified, the value of the variable must lie between the minimum and maximum of the range. reattach sketch Moves a sketch and attaches it to a different sketch plane than the one on which it originated. Use constraints and dimensions to position it and modify sketch size as needed. redundant constraint Constraints placed on fixed topologies that do not remove degrees of freedom, but do not conflict with previously placed constraints. It is marked in the browser with a warning icon, but is allowed to exist because it causes no harm. reference dimension In drawing views, a dimension that does not control the model size and is not intended for inspection. reference edge A sketch curve created by projecting a model edge onto the sketch plane. The curve can be a line, arc, circle, elliptical arc, or spline.

reference geometry Sketch geometry created by projecting the edges, vertices, or work features of another sketch onto the active sketch plane or onto the edges of a face used to define the sketch plane. Reference geometry can be used to constrain sketch geometry or included in a profile or path. Curves that represent the boundary edges of a face used to create the sketch plane cannot be deleted or trimmed, but projected curves can be deleted or trimmed. reference part A simplified part that cannot be edited in Autodesk Inventor. An example is a part imported from another CAD system in .sat or .stp format. reference sketch In an assembly, geometry that exists on one part can be projected onto the sketch plane of a new part. The resulting cross-part sketch geometry is a reference sketch. The size and position of the reference sketch is based on the parent part. A reference sketch can be used like any other sketch geometry to create a feature in the new part. reference sketch geometry Geometry derived from and associated with sketch geometry from other unconsumed sketches. reference vertex A sketch point generated by projecting a model vertex onto the sketch plane. reference work axis An unbounded sketch line generated by projecting a work axis onto the sketch plane. reference work point A sketch point generated by projecting a work point onto the sketch plane. refresh A file menu command. Replaces any file in session that has outdated edits compared to the saved version of the file on disk. All components and their dependents are reloaded without closing the current assembly. If any pending edits exist for a file needing refresh, a prompt appears enabling Save Copy As to preserve the changes before conducting the refresh operation. region A closed profile on a face or plane defined by sketched curves, edges, or

restructure assembly hierarchy In the assembly browser. for example. Constraints between components are retained. Components do not move relative to other components in the graphics window when position is changed in the assembly browser. Used to specify motion of a rack and pinion. the restored element pattern is listed below other pattern elements and has a numeric reference to the previously severed element. rotation constraint A motion constraint that specifies rotation of one part relative to another part using a specified ratio. An extruded region results in a solid body. rigid body A component that cannot change shape or size and acts as a single unit when moved. A restored pattern element replaces a pattern element whose link to the pattern was severed (made independent). same X coordinate A Mechanical Desktop constraint replaced by the vertical constraint in Autodesk Inventor. . components promoted or demoted in the hierarchy or moved from one assembly to another assembly. Optionally. For example. can create a new body. cut. or intersect). Although it contains multiple parts. a subassembly behaves as a single component when placed in an assembly. its relationship to an existing feature or body is defined by selecting a Boolean operation (join. In the browser.planes. restored pattern element A new pattern element associated with a previously created pattern. for example. rounds Fillets created on convex edges. rotation-translation constraint A motion constraint that specifies rotation of one part relative to translation of a second part. or rotated. and the participating bodies for the operation if multiple bodies exist. constrained. Used to specify motion of gears and pulleys. revolved feature A solid feature created by revolving a profile around an axis. a subassembly is a rigid body because its shape and size cannot change. Unless the revolved feature is the first feature.

sequence A group of tweaks in the animation of an exploded assembly. and a viewpoint to create a realistic image. search paths The file locations specified in a project. shape point An internal point that defines the shape of a spline. a cross section that defines the plane about which the body is extended or contracted. selects geometry partially or enclosed in the window. it changes to a fit point. materials for that geometry. a studio. Autodesk Inventor searches all the paths specified in the active project to find any referenced files. SAT file The native file format (ASCII) produced by the ACIS geometry-modeling kernel. When you open a file. By constraining a shape point to other geometry. secondary entity Any line or arc that has only one of its endpoints in the selection set. shared sketch . scene A complete definition of components. a view of the model defined by temporarily hiding portions of components or features on one side of a specified cutting plane. lighting. such as geometry. selection window Using the Select tool to size a window.same Y coordinate A Mechanical Desktop constraint replaced by the horizontal constraint in Autodesk Inventor. section In an assembly. Each task in an animation consists of one or more sequences. section plane In a base body. Shape points can move when a spline is solved. which in turn consists of one or more tweaks.

edges are the boundary between faces on the solid model. The plate detail face is referred to during the definition of unfold equations. one of the side lengths will equal the reserved sheet metal parameter Thickness. It is referred to as a view sketch. Note: If a drawing view is selected when entering Sketch environment. sheet metal edge In sheet metal design. sheet metal design environment Entered by converting a part to sheet metal or specifying sheet metal material for a new part. In part modeling. sheet metal plate detail face In sheet metal design. sheet sketch A sheet sketch is associated to the underlying sheet and is created if no drawing view is selected when entering the Sketch environment. shell . sheet metal plate In sheet metal design. the thin face (material thickness) at the edge of a part.A sketch used by more than one feature. the plate detail face is defined as the face of the edge of the sheet.See also: sheet metal plate detail face. Modeling and flat pattern operations are specific to sheet metal design. sheet metal bend plate In sheet metal design. faces (the sketched outline of material added to a part) are planar and have a uniform thickness defined by the reserved sheet metal parameter Thickness. sheets Corresponds to a page that contains drawing views. For rectangular detail faces. the sketch and sketch geometry are associated to the view. for example. In part modeling. sheet metal face In sheet metal design. a sketch containing hole centers for different hole features. that portion of the (flat or folded) model that contains the material that deforms during a bend or fold. Each sheet can contain a sketch overlay that contains customized sketches that correspond to the drawing views. faces have no thickness and are bounded by edges. plate can be used synonymously with face.

Edits to a skeleton produce design changes on all associated geometry and designs. single plane projection A view angle where only one of the three fundamental model planes (X. 2D or 3D sketches. and represent the structure of a design. 2D curves. Edits to a skeleton part produce design changes on all associated geometry and designs.ipt or *. 3D sketches. 2D sketches. leaving a cavity with walls of a specified thickness. or both sides of the part. relative to the original part surfaces. points. circles. From a specified face. and the dimensions and constraints applied to the curves. sketch A sketch consists of the sketch plane. a coordinate system. Y. References can include solids. arcs. sketch constraints See constraints. Only model surfaces that are exposed in this view state are visible. Can include lines. contained in an *. material is removed from the part. fillets.iam file that are used to build a structural frame.A parametric feature used most frequently for cast or molded parts. such as lines and arcs. Shell walls can be offset to the inside. sketch geometry in drawings A drawing sketch is an overlay that can contain text and 2D geometry. or Z) is visible and parallel to the view plane. skeleton In Autodesk Inventor. outside. sketch geometry Curves that occur in sketches. and work geometry. skeleton part In Frame Generator. A sketch can also incorporate construction geometry or reference geometry. Shells usually have walls of uniform thickness. and ellipses. that are based on solids. or surfaces. but individual faces can be selected and their thickness is specified.iam file. a model which collects references in an *. sketched feature . sketch plane A planar face or work plane on which the current sketch is created. rectangles. splines. one or more parts. Sketches are used to define feature profiles and paths.ipt or *.

Resulting faces can have individual face draft applied. Its size can be changed only by commands in the Solids environment. A sketched symbol can include sketched geometry. Solid weld beads reside only in the Welds feature group. Trim Solid removes a section of the part. A solid weld bead adds mass to the assembly and can be used in interference checking. spline A smooth curve fitted to a sequence of points within a specified tolerance.A feature that originates from a 2D sketch. Resulting bodies can have unique features that are not . slice graphics Reveals hidden plane or face by temporarily slicing away a specified portion of a model. solid model A model in SAT or STEP file format imported in Autodesk Inventor as a base feature (the first feature in a model). linked or embedded bitmaps. or defined where it intersects with the volume of an existing feature. Split Solid creates a multi-body part by dividing a solid object into two separate bodies. sketched symbol A custom symbol you create and save as a Drawing Resource in a drawing or drawing template. solid body An enclosed 3D body that has volume. revolving. A base solid is fully dimensioned. The revealed plane can be used as a sketch plane. The volume created by the sketched feature can be joined with. solid weld bead In a weldment model. and text. Solid welds are not shown as participant components in assembly feature participation lists. You can add a sketched symbol to a drawing sheet as an annotation. sweeping. cut from. sketched part Originates from a custom sketch rather than from an imported solid or predefined shape. an assembly feature that creates the actual weld bead geometry. Extruding. split Split Face divides one or more faces at a specified parting line. It can also contain data translated from DWG files. but the solid can be modified by adding features. or lofting a sketched profile creates feature volume.

static drawing A drawing file on which updates are deferred. each of which has a unique configuration whose parameters. C channel. structural member A single piece of material used in the construction of a frame. shine. specular color. Common structural members include steel angle iron. and other values are maintained in an embedded spreadsheet. these levels often require stairway access. A style includes descriptors such as color diffusion. Files created in other CAD systems can be converted to STEP format and imported in Autodesk Inventor.shared with other bodies. style In assemblies. STEP file An international format developed to overcome some of the limitations of current data conversion standards. Each row in the spreadsheet represents an individual iPart with a unique configuration. standard spline fit method Generates a curve with smoother continuity than the spline-fitting method in AutoCAD. style library . A static drawing does not update when the model changes and you cannot place views or make other changes to the drawing data. The defer updates setting is on Drawing tab of the Document Settings dialog box. a style is the set of information that describes component appearance. its values cannot be modified. typically purchased in stock lengths and sizes. I beams. stretchy feature See adaptive feature. stairway Platform frames often exist on multiple levels surrounding large equipment. When a standard iPart is used in an assembly. ambient color. round/square/rectangular steel tubing. properties. and so on. Stairways typically consist of C channel structural members in parallel on an incline with one or more stair treads depending on the rise required. opacity. standard iParts An iPart factory generates iParts. emissive color. and material.

In the browser. Any features dependent on a suppressed feature are also suppressed. subassembly An assembly file used in another assembly. or as iFeatures.Defined styles reside in the style library and are referenced in documents. A sweep feature usually requires two sketches. Suppressed features are indicated in the browser by a shaded icon. It and its dependent features are visible in the graphics window and can be selected for editing. In most cases. and a path on intersecting planes. surface normal Solid bodies are bounded by surfaces. The surface normal is the outwardpointing vector perpendicular to a particular point on a surface. notch. A feature can be unsuppressed. Parts can originate in part files. a profile. A suppressed assembly pattern element can be unsuppressed. but the original style definition in the library is not affected. suppressed sketch pattern element A member of a sketch pattern whose geometry is no longer available in a profile and does not appear in drawing sketches. fastener. or other geometry that would interrupt the pattern. In the graphics window. a suppressed element is indicated by a shaded symbol and strike-through text. suppressed assembly pattern element A member of an assembly pattern whose geometry no longer appears in the graphics window. as OLE objects. You can suppress an assembly pattern element if it would interfere with other components such as a rod. such as a motor with a gear reducer. surface A 2-dimensional definition of forms and shapes or an object in 3dimensional space that defines area without volume. You can suppress a sketch pattern element if the pattern would interfere with other model geometry that would interrupt the pattern. or can be imported from the Mechanical Desktop or other CAD system. An . The subassembly behaves as a single unit. When assembly constraints are being placed. a suppressed pattern element is shown in a dashed line. Styles in documents (local styles) can be modified as needed. suppressed feature A feature whose geometry no longer appears in the graphics window. sweep feature A feature created by moving a profile along a path. a surface normal vector appears. it can be flipped in the opposite direction.

and then save it with a unique file name. color scheme. and Z axes. target point A point in space that your line of sight passes through. To create a file based on a template. conical.optional guide rail for scaling can be included in a third sketch. or intersect). taper Sets positive or negative taper angle for sweeps. or lofted feature. revolved. Pre-defined properties can include visible default reference planes. Optionally. title block The area on a drawing sheet that identifies the owner. tangent constraint A geometric constraint that causes two curves to have the same slope at the point where they intersect. extension through all faces or to the next face. In assemblies. tangency can be inside or outside a curve. create the content. The target point also serves as a center point for the Rotate tool. the point can be located on the X and Y axes. and the participating bodies for the operation if multiple bodies exist. but two lines cannot be tangent to one another. or ellipse. a line can be tangent to an arc. or equal extension from a selected plane. can create a new solid body. extrusions. the point can be located on the X. task An assembly or disassembly action in the animation of an assembly explosion. Each task in an animation consists of one or more sequences. its relationship to an existing feature or body is defined by selecting a Boolean operation (join. and so on. or drawing file that contains predefined file properties. circle. Unless the sweep feature is the first feature. depending on the direction of the selected surface normal. swept. In assemblies. . In perspective camera mode. In orthographic camera mode. For example. a tangent constraint can be applied between cylindrical. includes a description of the drawing. and coils normal to the sketch plane. template An assembly. Y. On selected components. termination The method selected to end an extruded. you open a template file. and contacts at the point of tangency. drafting standards. Examples are fixed length or angle. cut. part. and provides other relevant information. customized grid settings. and toroidal faces or circular arc edges. one component moves toward another.

top-level assembly The root of an assembly.toolbody An intermediate volume produced when a swept. Shadow draft selects continuous tangent faces and drafts all edges in one operation. the top level of the assembly is represented by an icon and by default. taking advantage of existing part placement and using part features and positional information as the basis for the design or modification of new parts. top-down design An assembly technique in which parts are designed in place within an incomplete assembly. Trails indicate the direction and distance that a component was moved to create the view. such as move or rotate. or revolved feature is created. under which all components are arranged in a hierarchical structure. . transform Change in position or direction or orientation. Edge draft is draft applied to a single face that is not tangent to another face. In the browser. trails Lines in an exploded view that show the relationship of a component to the assembly. In an assembly file. Face draft is shown in the browser as TaperShadow or TaperEdge. type of draft Face draft may be shadow and edge draft. the file name. You specify the distance and direction of movement to provide better visibility of the components and their relationships. Parts designed in the assembly context are designed relative to features on parts already in the assembly. tweaks Adjustments made to assembly components in an exploded view. unavailable geometry See missing geometry. is automatically created when you create an assembly file. tweaking The process of moving a component in an assembly presentation to create an exploded view. extruded. double-click the top level of the assembly to switch from part creation or editing (the part environment) to assembly tasks (the assembly environment).

but does not retrieve the saved version from disk. An update incorporates changes held in memory from the current editing session and updates the display in the graphics window and browser. An unconsumed sketch can be used to show assembly layout and develop design concepts.unconsumed sketch A sketch in a part or assembly model that was not used in a feature. The transition type determines the shape of the fillet. You set a different radius for the start point and endpoint. including the top-level assembly. upstream process An operation that precedes the selected operation in an order-dependent process. You can display unconsumed sketches in drawing views. undisplayed part A part or subassembly whose visibility was turned off in the assembly context. Features and parts designated as adaptive have underconstrained geometry that resizes when it is constrained to fixed geometry (all degrees of freedom removed). but does not retrieve the saved version from disk. allowing work to continue before a part or assembly is updated. For example. variable-radius fillet A fillet that has a radius that varies along its length. Unlike Refresh. underconstrained geometry Features or parts with unsolved degrees of freedom are underconstrained. Update can be triggered automatically or manually. weldment preparations are upstream from the weld bead and post-weld machining operations. Use the Variable tab on the Fillet feature dialog box to . Parts or subassemblies are turned off when they are not needed for the current modeling tasks. update A part or assembly is recalculated after significant changes. Update incorporates only edits made to the active component. Update All can be triggered automatically or manually. undefined geometry See missing geometry. Update All incorporates only edits made locally. allowing work to continue before a part or assembly is updated. update all Recalculates all components to incorporate changes held in memory. Unlike Refresh. Such parts are not opened or loaded into memory.

select the edges and specify the radii for a variable-radius fillet feature. Welds. Can be stated as a numeric constant. vertical dimension A dimension that controls the size of curves that are parallel to the Y axis in sketches and drawing views. Weld bead features are not shown as participants in assembly feature participation lists. For example. as a variable in an equation. weld feature groups Folders in the weldment browser used to organize assembly features that combine to create a weldment. the sketch and sketch geometry are associated to the view. or in a link to a parameter file. Three weld feature groups exist for weldments: Preparations. In large assemblies. can be designated as a driving dimension (resizes the model) or reference dimension (does not resize the model). vertex The bounding point of two or more curves or model edges. it is useful to turn off the visibility of components not needed in the current design. and Machining. Each group represents a particular task in the manufacturing process and is represented in the . whether cosmetic or solid. reside only in the Welds feature group folder. the result is a void inside the cube. In drawing views. visibility A characteristic of an assembly component that determines whether it appears in the graphics window. weld bead feature A weldment assembly feature type used to create complete weld specifications in the model. Note: A sheet sketch is associated to the underlying sheet and is created when no drawing view is selected when entering the Sketch environment. vertical constraint A geometric constraint that positions selected lines. Weld bead features. ellipse axes. when a cube is shelled without removing a face. view sketch If a drawing view is selected when entering Sketch environment. See also cosmetic welds and solid welds. It is referred to as a view sketch. or pairs of points parallel to the Y-axis of the sketch coordinate system (same X coordinate). void A group of faces that define an internal hollow space.

A work axis is useful when no geometry exists to use as an axis. See also preparation features group and preparation features. Work axes can be projected onto a sketch and incorporated into dimension and constraint schemes. axis. workgroup search paths The shared network locations that contain the Autodesk Inventor files for . The metal removed is typically filled back in with the weld bead. work axis A construction feature that defines an axis in 3D space. or point that can be projected onto a sketch as a reference feature and used to construct new features. weld prep An optional metal removal process done before welding to ensure adequate weld strength. Weld features include cosmetic or solid fillet weld beads. welds feature group A group in the weldment browser that represents the process of adding weld bead features to a design. but is not model geometry. A work feature can be incorporated into dimension and constraint schemes. A work plane can be incorporated into dimension and constraint schemes. work plane A construction feature that defines the parametric location of a sketch plane in 3D space. work point A construction feature that defines a point in 3D space. The weldment environment provides all the design tools used in the assembly environment along with unique tools for defining weldments. A work point can be projected onto a sketch and incorporated into dimension and constraint schemes. Chamfers are typical weld preps.browser with a different icon. A work plane is useful when no planar face exists to use as a sketch plane. work feature Plane. when sketching on curved or toroidal faces. weldment design environment A specialized assembly environment that is accessed by converting an assembly to a weldment or by selecting a weldment template for a new assembly. for example. Welds are applied after optional weld preparations and before post-weld machining operations.

your design team. . Details of internal geometry are distinguishable. Your workspace is specified in the active project. Effect is like a shadow cast on the ground beneath a model. workspace The path to the work area on your local machine. Each project specifies the locations of workgroup search paths. x-ray ground shadow Shadow cast below a visible model is updated dynamically as the model rotates or moves.